Ancient's Table • Bastion of Flames • Blackscale Sepulcher • Bloodskull Valley: The Training Grounds • Cazel's Mesa • Condemned Catacombs • Court of Innovation • Cove of Decay • Crypt of Valdoon • Deathfist Citadel • Den of the Devourer • Tower of the Drafling • Eternal Gorge • Firemyst Gully • Gobblerock's Hideout • Nest of the Great Egg • Halls of Fate • Hidden Cache • Mines of Meldrath • Nektropos Castle: The Return • Nektropos Castle: Tribulation • Nektropos Castle • Nizara, City of the Nayad • Obelisk of Blight • Poet's Palace • Valley of the Rogue Magi • Scornfeather Roost • Shard of Fear • The Acadechism • The Sanctorium • Tombs of Night • Estate of Unrest • Vault of Dust • The Sanctum of Fire • Vault of the Fallen • Vaults of El'Arad • Crypt of T'Haen
Goodies for Grobb:
Accessorizing, Grobb Style • Fundamental Furnishings • Home Cooking • Snapper Security • Swamp Reeds
Working Hard for Tupta:
Getting Plastered • House Repairs • Pottering Around • Swamp Treats • Tupta Toys
Accord Assistance:
A Rush Job • Air Repair • Letters From Home • Swamp Foot Lotion • To Dye For
Far Seas Supply Division:
Shipyard Services/Shipyard Building Work • Clockwork Rescue/Clockwork Components • Emergency Portal Repairs/Building a Better Portal • Supply Stocking/Firemyst Supply Stocking
Far Seas Supply Division Weekly:
A Recipe for Disaster • Rescuing the Relics • Restocking the Stores
Craftkeepers:
Bready Goodness • Full Metal Artisan • Eats Shoots and Leaves • Stonebrunt Express • Paineel Replenishment • Further Essential Studies • Back to the Grindstone
Hua Mein Craftsmen:
A Tasty Task • Hua Mein Craftsmanship • Hua Mein Heating • The Bear Necessities • Netting More Fish • Shining Shells • Honoring the Ancestors
Kerra Isle Outfitters:
A Close Eye on Quel'ule • Kerra Kindling • Kerra Clothing • Weaving A Profit • Herbal Healing • Paw Tips and Tail Feathers • Defensive Dressing
Researchers of Quel'ule:
Supplies for the Fighters • Sampling More Strangeness • Reporting to Paineel • Equipping the Front Line • Rebuilding Materials • Reinforcing the Wards • Tracking the Void Influence
Obol Plains:
Tonic for the Soul • Herbs and Spirits • Focused Fire • Where Are All The Clean Bedrolls?
Far Seas Trading:
Botanical Divergence • Reporting Home • Fishing Up Fauna • Researching the Recordings
Altar of Malice Daily:
Sampling the Danger • Sour Tooth • Grim Running • Legendary Pepper • Salve Supplies • Small Arms for Small Arms • Fruitful Foraging
This book is titled "1st Lieutenant Danarg, 291 AS". It is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire. Entry One Put book away.
Day 332, 291: First Lieutenant Mugreeza has learned the price of failure. She could not see what I saw. She could not see that the Frogloks are cunning. She did not know of the caves of Guk. I did. Now the General knows. And now I am First Lieutenant. As it should have been from the beginning. Entry Two Put book away.
Day 70, 294: My command will listen to what I say, for I am their leader. The General is no longer here. He marches with the Arm of Vallon to the scourge the world to the west. The Arm of Tallon marches to join with the dirty orcs. My command now marches to Guk. We will annihilate the Frogs one and for all. Then we will annihilate the rest. Entry Three Put book away.
Day 339, 297: My command bristles at my orders. Do they not know that I was chosen as First Lieutenant? Do they not understand that I am the General to them? They will listen. Yes. They will listen. Entry Four Put book away.
Day 67, 299: We have found some more of the pathetic trolls living in the swamp. The Frogloks will wait to be cleansed. I have a better idea. One that the General will appreciate. We will take the Innothule swamp as ours. The Feerrott has been claimed. Soon this swamp will, too. Entry Five Put book away.
Day 156, 302: I have lost more of the soldiers to these swamps. The enslaved trolls continue to track down their brethren. When the refuse to do so, I personally draw and quarter them for all to see. This proves very effective. Entry Six Put book away.
Day 466, 304: The trolls have begun to fight back. This will not be tolerated. The soldiers are now listening to my orders. Now they know that I speak for the General. I have not had to kill any soldiers at dawn for close to a week now. This is good. I do miss the disembowlings, however. Entry Seven Put book away.
Day 14, 307: The Trolls continue to crawl out of the swamp. Just as we kill one hundred, we watch as two hundred flee in different directions. They have no courage. We should have killed the trolls first then killed Frogs. I will see to correcting the mistake. Entry Eight Put book away.
Day 234, 310: We are beginning to run out of food. The last of our troll dogs we have were eaten today. The soldiers are beginning to complain. I have ordered the next Rallosian who utters a word of contempt will be the next to served as dinner. This will quiet them for now. Entry Nine Put book away.
Day 9, 313: My troops only listen to my orders when we are fighting Frogs. The doomed race does not know that death is coming for them. They do not know that we know where they are. They will see death coming for them. They will feel it. They will embrace it. Entry Ten Put book away.
Day 67, 313: I have ordered all of my Rallosian troops to let the worthless trolls flee for now. When the Arms of Tallon and Vallon unite again, that is when they will be used to crush the trolls. My purpose is more important. We stand before the caves of Guk. Within lies our prey. Close book
Books
"1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS". It is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire. Entry One Put book away.
Day 105, 313: They do not know we are here. They believed we would not know of this place. We did. I did. When the final Froglok lay dead at the feet of my twenty thousand troops, I will name these caves after myself. With the General's blessing, of course. Entry Two Put book away.
Day 212, 313: A messenger has come saying that the Rathe Mountains have been taken by the Arm of Tallon. This is as it should be. I killed the messenger so that he would not be able to return my report. The General does not need to know that things are not running to schedule. Entry Three Put book away.
Day 400, 313: I have lost many troops to the cunning of the Frogloks. Springing from the murky depths, they rained both fire and ice upon us. Many of my brave soldiers died to protect the most important Rallosians amongst us. If their Lieutenant were to die, how would they know the orders of the General? Entry Four Put book away.
Day 34, 314: We have slaughtered their elite warriors today. Our numbers are now half, but this leaves thousands. The Frogloks can hear us coming. We can hear their fear. Entry Five Put book away.
Day 122, 314: We have driven them further into the caves. Why do they not accept their deaths? I am here to give it to them. My troops, my Rallosians, we are here to bring them death. It will be a sweet mercy to them for all they suffered. Entry Six Put book away.
Day 246, 314: The dead have risen to fight us. The Frogloks mean to use their bones to overpower the strength of the Rallosian Empire. MY Rallosian Empire. This will not happen. They have died once. They will die again. Entry Seven Put book away.
Day 313, 314: We have found where the last of the Frogloks have hidden. Here in the lower depths of Guk, they are now trapped. Deep below the earth, they already stand within their tomb. There is no way out. Our forces are too many. I have had horns fashioned from the skulls of the fallen. They will play as my victory completes. Entry Eight Put book away.
Day 420, 314: They are all dead. Once and for all. There are no more Frogloks. The Froglok Lord sat upon his throne, waiting for me. We faced off in mortal combat. He did not expect my blade to be poisoned. His honor failed him in the end. Entry Nine Put book away.
Day 33, 315: We leave these caverns tomorrow. My troops, one thousand strong, have succeeded. We have scourged all life from the upper and lower ends of Guk. This would not have been possible without my leadership. I am the greatest general the Rallosians could ever wish for. Aside from the General, that is. Entry Ten Put book away.
Day 90, 315: The Rallosian Empire spans the lower half of Antonica. My Rallosian Empire. I am the one who conquered the Frogloks. I am the one who reduced the numbers of the trolls. I am as strong as the General and I will prove it. My troops will launch a surprise attack and take the greatest city on Norrath - RALLOS! Close book
Books
"1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS". It is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire. Entry One Put book away.
Day 130, 315: I have had to kill my advisor today. He was a traitor. He claimed that it was folly to attack our own city. Did he not know whom he was speaking to? Does he know what he was speaking to the General? The General of the Rallosian Empire!? Entry Two Put book away.
Day 160, 315: The march is long but it must continue. One cannot hold the element of surprise if we succumb to sluggishness. I will not tolerate disobedience. I will hold another speech tomorrow. The morale of the troops always builds after they hear my voice. Entry Three Put book away.
Day 178, 315: We near Feerrott. This is just as I had planned. I have sent out a scout party to warn us if any trolls try to sneak up. They have not relayed any messages back to the division. I fear this can only mean one thing. Trolls have taken them. Entry Four Put book away.
Day 207, 315: With a heavy heart, I sent the third scout party to look for the remains of the first two. My troops now number five hundred. This will be enough to take the city of Rallos, however. My troops have one thing that Rallos does not have. My leadership. Entry Five Put book away.
Day 243, 315: My troops have fallen sway under a strange Froglok spell. Using deceitful troll magics, the vile fiends ensorcelled one hundred of my troops. In their enchanted state, they spoke of mutiny. Unfortunately, they could not be saved. I ordered their brains kept in sacks so that they can be used as warding charms against evil alligator ghosts. Entry Six Put book away.
Day 290, 315: As I sit within this great circle of stones, I taste each one of the rocks. The blood in my mouth masks the flavor, so I am unable to accurately tell which of these boulders is the truth teller. All of them say that I will die in different ways. I will not tolerate disobedience! These rocks will be toppled! Entry Seven Put book away.
Day 321, 315: In the distance is the mighty city of Rallos. Tomorrow we will take it as ours. For the first time in the history of the Rallosian Empire, our capital will finally be under the rule of Rallosians. And I will be their Great Emperor. For am I not already First Lieutenant Danarg? Am I not already the General Uurduk? Am I not already the Avatar of War? Yes. I am. And Rallos Zek, too! I must not forget I am also him. Entry Eight Put book away.
Day 360, 315: The invasion will begin in a matter of moments. I have devised a plan that involves all of us dressing as washerwomen. We will offer to sell the city a basketful of onions. When they open the gates, we will take the city. The gates are already open, though. We must tell the city to close the gates before we offer to sell them the onions or my plan will not work. Yes. Yes, that will work perfectly! Entry Nine Put book away.
Day 400, 315: The greatest victory since the creation of the world has happened today. We have taken Rallos! The citizens must have gotten wind of our plan. In their pure terror of my cunning, the absolute entire populace killed themselves! Everywhere throughout the city, their corpses line the streets, grasping at their throats! Entry Ten Put book away.
Day 5, 316: What's this? Ahhh... my troops are bringing me to my coronation ceremony. As they walk towards me, I can already see them drawing their blades in a salute to my brave leadership. Yes, yes... they are so astonished at my victory, they cannot even replace the looks of hatred and rage on their faces with ones of joy and love. Let me close this book so that I may welcome my subjects with open arms. Close book
Books
"1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS." It is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire. Entry One Put book away.
Day 72, 263 AS: Urduuk has granted me great honor in making me his first Lieutenant. He has chosen well. I will not fail him. Today marks a glorious day. I will make the first true warriors of our people. I will learn from the Avatar and thrust that learning upon all ogres. Entry Two Put book away.
Day 159, 273 AS: Training goes well. I see flaws and I know how to fix them. The Avatar has granted me insight and shown me the truth of weakness. If a soldier does not succeed, other soldiers will learn from his mistake. Second chances are for the weak. Entry Three Put book away.
Day 390, 274 AS: The General Urduuk has brought us weapons as he promised. Shaped in the image of his holy sword, we now bear weapons worthy of our kind. Bronze no longer belongs in our hands. Our enemies will feel death from fine steel. A soldier will be bound to his weapon, for he and it are the same. Entry Four Put book away.
Day 114, 275 AS: Drilling will continue for the next two days. Disobedience will not be tolerated. Those that die during the lessons will be ogres. Those that pay in blood and sweat will be true Rallosians. Entry Five Put book away.
Day 276 AS: Our Rallosian army strengthens. I have chosen two of the most obedient to be Lieutenants just as I am. The General designed the armor to be given the troops. I am to inform every soldier they must forge their own armor. The heat of the forge must come from the peat of our home. The water that cools the metal must be their blood. Entry Six Put book away.
Day 48, 277 AS: The General and the Avatar demand a demonstration of the troops. If the men fail, this will show that I have failed. The General will grant me the honor of severing my own head from my shoulders, for I am his Lieutenant. Entry Seven Put book away.
Day 49, 277 AS: The wargame has proven me as a true Rallosian. The shock troops have shown they will die when told to. The support troops have shown they will kill their own when told to. The Rallosians now number one hundred score. Training must be doubled. Entry Eight Put book away.
Day 212, 278 AS: The General will take the first legion and will destroy the surrounding undead. No longer will we suffer them. We are not ogres. We are Rallosians. Their brittle bones will become as dust under the boot of the Empire. Entry Nine Put book away.
Day 215, 278 AS: The lizardmen were no match for a handful of Rallosians. Their group could not flee, for we kept coming. We will kill more lizardmen if they interfere. The Avatar was pleased to see this. The General nodded his head in approval. We will bring our might upon the Frogloks. They will be annihilated. I so swear upon the name of the General and the name of The Warlord, Rallos. Entry Ten Put book away.
Day 93, 279 AS: I will not train the Trolls. They are not Rallosians. They are only fodder that does not deserve the honor of battle. I have made four more Lieutenants like me. Now there are seven. They will train these worthless creatures, for so the General has decreed. I will join the General in rebuilding Oggok. Close Book.
Books
"1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS." It is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire. Entry One Put book away.
Day 100, 279 AS: The people are soft. I spent too much time training soldiers. I did not see the rest of the people need to be made into Rallosians, too. We will not live like beasts as our forefathers had. I will see to this, for I am the General's Lieutenant. Entry Two Put book away.
Day 160, 279 AS: Oggok will no longer suffer incompetence. We will have a grand city as we deserve. This will require the hard work from everyone - man, woman, child. Those who will not shoulder the burden will suffer. Entry Three Put book away.
Day 24, 283 AS: Those that cannot fight will craft. Those that cannot craft will supply food. Those that cannot supply food will be fed to the trolls. Those the trolls will not eat will, I will gut open and remove from the city. I have moved many today. I will continue. Oggok has no room for the useless. Entry Four Put book away.
Day 298, 284 AS: The city is being built under the eye of the General and myself. He wants it done faster. I can make the people move faster. We will leave Oggok behind as a testament to our home. Soon enough we will destroy the lesser races and take Norrath. For now, we will build. Then we will destroy. Entry Five Put book away.
Day 473, 284 AS: The Avatar does not want the temple to Zek rebuilt. He says we must battle. I say we must show our greatness to the nothing races. The General agrees with the Avatar and he his stricken me across the face, taking my eye. He is my General, so he may take my eye if he wishes. Entry Six Put book away.
Day 41, 287 AS: The new houses have been built. The people have been moved into the homes according to station and rank. The Troll cages have been built as well. The lesser Lieutenants have not trained the Trolls well. They enjoy pain too much. It is a distraction for them. They will be put on leashes, for they are nothing but our dogs. Entry Seven Put book away.
Day 375, 287 AS: The General has said it is time for the troops to be split among legions. I am to organize the thousand score troops and give them their mark. The General says they are to be marked in the name of Tallon and in the name of Vallon. I will see to their branding. Entry Eight Put book away.
Day 440, 287 AS: They have been trained well. I killed only but seven of the thousand score for flinching in pain. A Rallosion will not flinch when branded with searing metal. The lesser races would call this cruelty. The Rallosian calls this their birthright. Entry Nine Put book away.
Day 77, 289 AS: Battle plans have been laid. The Avatar of War demands to the General that we acquire more armies. I say to the General that the Second Rallosian Empire is enough. The Avatar of War speaks of another Avatar who commands the orcs. He says the orcs possess something the Rallosians do not. They possess tactics. I agree. We will take their tactics and use them. Entry Ten Put book away.
Day 104, 289 AS: The General has rallied all five thousand score of the Rallosians. He says it is time to destroy the world. I agree. Close book
Books
"1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS". It is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire. Entry One Put book away.
Day 107, 289 AS: This world has not known the Rallosians for many centuries. It is time for the world to remember. We no longer suffer the curse of the Rathe. Now we will have our vengeance upon Norrath. The warning horns have been sounded for five hours. I have never heard anything more beautiful. Entry Two Put book away.
Day 120, 289 AS: The Feerrott has been our homeland for centuries. Nature has reclaimed it in our absence. We have returned. We will take it back. The bones of walking ancestors will no longer disturb the living as the Army moves forward. Entry Three Put book away.
Day 140, 289 AS: The General leads us to the south. I am not aware of our direction, but I have instructed my soldiers that they are to destroy everything they see. We have sighted more lizardmen. They have been destroyed. Entry Four Put book away.
Day 160, 289 AS: The Avatar walks with us and tells us that we will be given even more help. We do not need help. We are the Rallosian Empire. We do not subjugate. We do not enslave. We annhilate. Entry Five Put book away.
Day 170, 289 AS: The lizardmen have been driven even further south. Many villages have been found and razed, but this is not satisfying. Our goal is not to kill lizards, it to destroy frogs. And then we kill everything else. We are spending too long in our goal. But our soldiers are obedient. Entry Six Put book away.
Day 193, 289 AS: The soldiers have been tested today. We have reached the forbidden temple and find it filled with life that must be destroyed. They followed the General's orders given by me. This makes me proud. They did not kill the tentacle-headed creatures that guarded the temple. This does not make me proud. Entry Seven Put book away.
Day 199, 289 AS: A week has passed and now we march again. The Avatar and the General spoke with the tentacle-headed creatures. They will not join our force. Their Avatar of Fear has forbidden us from the temple. We are Rallosians, not dogs. We will leave for now. They will pay. Entry Eight Put book away.
Day 240, 289 AS: My soldiers have reported a cavern leading to a world of nightmares. I have personally ended twenty of their lives. A Rallosian does not fear anything. Entry Nine Put book away.
Day 241, 289 AS: The General has commanded we are not to go near what he calls the Gate. I do not understand. We are Rallosians. We do as we please. We are Rallosians. Entry Ten Put book away.
Day 270, 289 AS: The General has explained to me the deal made between the two Avatars back at the temple. I tell him that we do not need the Trolls, even as dogs. He has told me that Second Lieutenant Mugreeza will have more information in her tent. I leave for there now. Close book
Books
"1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS". It is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire. Entry One Put book away.
Day 271, 289: The Rallosians will no longer take direction from a frightened old man. My General has chosen Dergud's successor wisely - Me. His head will be atop my standard flag to let the soldiers know that weakness will not be tolerated. No one is too young to die. No one is too old. Entry Two Put book away.
Day 409, 289: The final lizardman village has been slaughtered. Their death squeals filled the trees. This raised the soldier's morale to all time heights. I will not tolerate unhappy soliders under my command. Any soldier that is unhappy will have their midsection cut open and dragged at the end of the marching line. Entry Three Put book away.
Day 3, 290: The Feerrott is nearly ours. I have sent four platoons to find the last of those who remain within marsh. The General has ordered us to return to Oggok. We will celebrate the first of many victories. Entry Four Put book away.
Day 75, 290: We have tasted victory and it is sweeter than blood. Oggok is no more. What stands is now Rallos, the capital city of the Rallosian Empire. We are not stupid beasts that stomp across the land. We leave tomorrow to show the Frogloks that we are horrible beasts that will stomp across the skulls of all who are not Rallosian. Entry Five Put book away.
Day 77, 290: Rallos lies behind us by many leagues. The marsh is quiet. No sounds of birds chirping. No sounds of splashing in the pools. No sounds of frogs croaking. Soon, this will change. We will hear plenty of Frogs croaking. Soon. Entry Six Put book away.
Day 200, 290: Boredom is settling in. I cannot stand it. I have not killed an opponent in seven days. I am tiring of killing my soldiers. Their obedience makes them too easy. I will push them harder. Entry Seven Put book away.
Day 272, 290: I have been left in command. The General has taken several platoons and leaves with the Avatar. I have been given explicit orders. My General knows they will be followed. Our course of direction changes slightly. Entry Eight Put book away.
Day 441, 290: The troll dogs smelled them before we could hear them. Dergud had wasted a resource with his foolish pride. The trolls are worth their weight in gold. They eat a lot, but they will eat their own if they get too hungry. They are excellent hounds. And now, we have found more. Entry Nine Put book away.
Day 24, 291: The Troll villages have been razed. Those that did not come willingly are being kept in the larders for the ones who did. They will be kept on leashes and placed at the front. These beasts will serve their purpose for as long we are within this dismal swamp. Entry Ten Put book away.
Day 70, 290: The troops need to see action. They have already slaughtered one third of the trolls in their frustrations. This will not be tolerated. Were we not so close to Gukta, I would give the troops a lesson in obedience. I understand them, however. We will all feel much better once we are wading in the blood of the Frogloks instead of this brackish water. Close book
Books
"1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS". It is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire. Entry One Put book away.
Day 3, 290: We have met our first Frogs today. The battle did not last long. It has been too long since we last slaughtered any one. Praise Rallos that there are more where these ones came from. Entry Two Put book away.
Day 74, 290: We are being harassed on all ends. These Frogs don't understand that we are Rallosians. We will not be defeated. It is not possible. Let them skirmish all they like. It will make no difference in the end. Entry Three Put book away.
Day 102, 290: The first wave has passed. They are now sending the next wave. Riding upon the backs of lizard creatures, they believe they will beat us. Let them come. They have only seen our trolls, not the true Rallosians. Entry Four Put book away.
Day 141, 290: We are running out of our beasts. The trolls are no match for cooperation of the Frogloks. I have played my hand by showing the Frogs one troop unit. We are now the proud owners of thousands of Froglok knights. Our food supplies will last for years. Entry Five Put book away.
Day 159, 290: I have sent a Froglok back to his home. He will send the message to their people. Our terms are this - Open the gates and we will slaughter them quickly. Hold out, and we will take our time. I took the messenger's eyes as a receipt that he will deliver the message. Entry Six Put book away.
Day 163, 290: A messenger has arrived from Rallos. We are to stay where we are and fortify the area. This spot we stand at will be our base of operations during the push into Gukta. The siege will continue once the General has arrived. Entry Seven Put book away.
Day 390, 290: The messages come more regularly now. The General is close. He, with the Avatar of War, has visited with some foreigners. I do not understand, but he is my General. I trust his wisdom as long as I am part of the slaughter. Entry Eight Put book away.
Day 90, 291: The Frogloks have mistaken our patience for weakness. I must inform them that we are Rallosians. We are not weak like they are. I have opened the gates to our fort. I invite them inside to lay waste to our camp. Entry Nine Put book away.
Day 188, 290: The impaled corpses fill the swamp as far as I can see. Nowhere can one look and not see Froglok corpses rotting from spears. This message should be loud enough for the Frogloks. Hopefully, it will be loud enough for the world. Entry Ten Put book away.
Day 307, 290: Have they no sense? They still keep coming. And we still keep slaughtering them. I hope their numbers have not dwindled. I will be sorely disappointed when it comes time to destroy their city if they do not put up a fight. Close book
Books
"1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS". It is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire. Entry One Put book away.
Day 307, 290: The General has joined us. The cheers of the soldiers are deafening. The General allows this slip in obedience to slide. I will not. Let them roar like beasts today. Tomorrow I will hang one hundred. Entry Two Put book away.
Day 339, 290: The General explained to me my order. I am to take three divisions into the eastern regions of the Innothule and rouse the remaining Frogloks. This will cause them to react in accordance with his plans. I do not question. I only obey. Entry Three Put book away.
Day 402, 290: The Frogs have been given too much time to prepare for the invasion. Their defenses have been underestimated. This does not matter. Our numbers will crush down the walls of Gukta. Their magic means nothing to us. Entry Four Put book away.
Day 443, 290: We have lost ten score in the past month to the Frogs. They have laid the area with traps. Is this what has happened to their precious honor? Honor will not bring them victory. Only blind obedience will. They will not last long. Entry Five Put book away.
Day 470, 290: Their forces have come from the side. We were not prepared. We have lost one score to the frogs. Their numbers have dwindled. The General says this was their last raid. He can tell by watching their desperation. They have now seen both of the Tallon and the Vallon legions. Their desperation will turn to hopelessness. Entry Six Put book away.
Day 45, 291: The Trolls have broken their leashes. The dogs call out to their dead god, Cazic-Thule. He will not hear them. No one will hear them. They are of no concern to us any more. They have served their purpose. We will hunt down the rest later and put them out of their misery. Entry Seven Put book away.
Day 173, 291: The walls of Gukta stand before us. The Frogloks will have the honor of being the first to fall to the might of the Rallosian Empire. The smell of their impending doom fills the air. The smell of their fear thickens it. It is a good day for them to die. Entry Eight Put book away.
Day 202, 291: The walls have toppled. The Frogloks lie at our feet. They have taken from our numbers. We have taken from their future. The fighting continues as I record this. It will not last for long. I will step forward into the fray and claim my trophies. Lieutenant Danarg will stay behind and see that not one Frog escapes. They will all die. Entry Nine Put book away.
Day 245, 291: There are no more Frogs within Gukta. The Rallosian Empire has brought to them the pain and destruction they deserved. Their numbers were far less than the General expected. There were no eggs to smash in front of the mothers and fathers. I believe something may not be right. Entry Ten Put book away.
Day 331, 291: I have sent word to Lieutenant Danarg that Gukta has been taken and the destruction has begun. He is to tell the General that our first battle is done. He is to tell the General that I will give my debriefing. Gukta is in ruins. Gukta is no more. The Frogloks have been wiped from the face of Norrath. Close book
Books
"3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled, "3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook." It is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire. Entry One Put book away.
Entry 14: We march through the Feerott. It is a good march. It is a quiet march. Nothing lives within the Feerrott since we have last passed through. The General personally leads us. The Arm of Vallon marches behind us. The Rathetear Mountains is our destination. We will stomp on the bones of the gods we once defeated. This time they cannot stop us. Entry Two Put book away.
Entry 17: We have changed course in the march. The forgotten temple of Cazic-Thule is within sight. The General tells us in command that the Amygdalans will join our ranks or they will be destroyed. I pray to Rallos that they refuse to join us. Entry Three Put book away.
Entry 32: We have entered the foothills of the Mountains of the fallen Rathe. The Amygdalans have refused to add their numbers to our ranks. Let them hide in the temple for as long as they wish. It will be their tomb. For now, we will take the land of our forefather's defeat and turn it into victory. Entry Four Put book away.
Entry 40: The General has detached us from the Arm of Vallon. The Arm, hundreds of scores in number, will continue marching north. They are to cross the Lake of Tears. Then they are to annihilate the gnolls. The Arm of Vallon will conquer the Karana plains. There is no question this will be done. Entry Five Put book away.
Entry 57: My command, led by the General himself, have easily taken the Rathetear Mountains. The Hill Giants recognized our superiority and bowed to our will. The lizardmen have been eradicated. If I listen closely, I can still hear the sound of the dead gods of the earth weeping. The Rallosians are conquering Norrath. Their curse has failed. Entry Six Put book away.
Entry 61: Taking the Hill Giants with us, the General will no longer tolerate the insolence of the Amygdalans. Their claims of counsel received from the Avatar of Fear are worthless lies. Their Avatar would never have allowed us to capture the Gate leading to their dead god's plane. The only true Avatar is the one that inspires us - the Avatar of War. Entry Seven Put book away.
Entry 67: When I was a runtling, my mother's mother told me of the temple of Fear. She claimed it was filled with unimaginable nightmares waiting to destroy the world. She was wrong. NOW it is filled with nightmares. Us. The Rallosians. Entry Eight Put book away.
Entry 79: The final Amygdalan has fallen to the black blade of the General. The ones we have captured have been forced to watch as we begin to tear down their precious temple. They incessantly chant prayers to the god of green mist. If their god cannot stop us from tearing down their place of worship, what makes them believe their god will save their worthless hides? Entry Nine Put book away.
Entry 83: This great temple lies in ruins. All that stands is the sacred tomb the Amydalans pray to at the center of this temple. We received word that Guk is being scourged as we speak. The split-pawed gnolls have been exterminated. The Plains are ours. Freeport is about to fall. The General is about to enter the heart of the temple and personally defile the tentacled one's most holy of all relics - the Forbidden Sarcophagus. When he has done so, the Rallosian Empire will know that we have conquered one half of the world. The other half will follow. Entry Ten Put book away.
Entry 84: Bring this journal to your commanding officer, Rallosian. They must know of the fate of General Urduuk. When the box was opened, a green mist oozed out, crawling into the General's nostrils. He barely had time to grasp his throat before falling over dead. One by one, thousands of Rallosians suffered the same fate. I sealed myself away inside a nearby stone coffin before the vapors reached me. It will not be long before I run out of air, for neither air or Green Mist can enter this casket. I will die as a Rallosian inside this tomb. I will not die as a forever-cured ogre outside to the Green Mist. Close book
Books
"Adventures of Jorbo and Mappy" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Adventures of Jorbo and Mappy ". It is the story of two halfling boys and how they happened upon some exciting adventures. Entry One Put book away.
One day, Jorbo and Mappy decided to have an exciting adventure and visit far off lands. Packing their bags, they told their moms what they were about to do. With a kiss to their forehead, both mothers gave the two boys their blessing. Entry Two Put book away.
It wasn't too long after they began their journey that they were accosted by an orc. The orc told the two boys that they could not cross the bridge until they both told him a joke. If the joke wasn't funny, he would throw them off of the bridge into the water below. Entry Three Put book away.
Below their feet was a lake filled with the deadliest fish ever seen in all of Norrath. The lake boiled and bubbled with the fish anticipating their next meal. Jorbo started with a joke about why the duck crossed the lake. When he got to the punchline, the orc said he heard that one before, and took another drink from his jum-jum mug. Entry Four Put book away.
Mappy knew if they were going to escape from this wild predicament, he would have to make up a joke no one ever heard before. He looked at the orc and said, "What does the farmer say when he can't find his rake?" The orc looked confused and said he didn't know. When Mappy gave the punchline, "Where's my rake?", the orc started laughing so hard he fell over into the lake. Entry Five Put book away.
Then the orc splashed into the lake, all the fish swam away from him. Behind them, they two friends could hear the sound of other orcs running to see what happened, so they left. Knowing they would be taken prisoner in a big castle if they were seen, they ran for the biggest tree they could find and climbed it as fast as they could. Entry Six Put book away.
When they were up in the tree, Jorbo and Mappy started getting hungry. They pulled out the food they brought with them and ate it all. Still hungry, they saw a beehive hanging from one of the branches. Digging inside they dug out a handful of honey and had that for desert. That's when little bumblebee bixies swarmed out and started scolding them. Entry Seven Put book away.
Knowing they would get in trouble if the bixies told their mothers about taking things without asking, they jumped out of the tree and started running. A short while later, they had escaped both the bixies and the orcs inside a crude shelter buried beneath a hillside. What they didn't know was that the little house wasn't empty. Entry Eight Put book away.
Inside the house was a wicked old witch who called out to them. This witch had evil magical powers, for she knew their names. She then began asking them mysterious questions about what they were doing, and many questions about their mothers. Soon enough, the two friends realized that she was going to use this information in some horrible spell. Entry Nine Put book away.
Entry Ten Put book away.
Jorbo and Mappy became very quiet, politely refusing to answer any more questions. At that moment, the witch tried used her magical powers and made a strawberry cake appear in her oven. She offered it to the two boys, and being fully under her spell, they ate half of the cake. Coming to their senses when they were finished eating, they said "thank you" and left to explore even further. Close Book.The two friends, barely escaping a horrible fate, realized they needed to be more careful, for the world was very dangerous. Behind them a voice told them that they were quite right. Turning around, they saw that the speaker was an adult halfling. The interesting thing about him was that he had scales like a lizard covering his entire body. Who was this mysterious halfling? Well, that's a tale for another day.
Books
"Alliz Evol Ew" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Alliz Evol Ew". It is a folktale concerning the lizard people of the Feerrott. Entry One Put book away.
This is a story that tremors in the earth like the worm of below. It splits the tail as it does the tongue. This is a truth that can become a lie if it is spoken too much so beware. Listen to the tale and you will know. Choose your Ew and you shall know. Know the Alliz Evol Ew. Entry Two Put book away.
The many worlds wrap around us like the smell of the swamp on our tongue. The world with the five moons and the two moons are only real. The worlds that are not real do not exist until they do. The world of the shattered moon and the world of no moons and all moons do not exist. The Alliz Evol Ew know this. And we know they are real. Entry Three Put book away.
The fourth secret is not known to the Tae Ew. This is what fills our heart with the slowness of night. Ew can be felt by all. Ew is where the hunger is filled. When we walk the world of Ew as one mind, we no longer have the consuming within our guts. The Tae feed their hunger upon Evol. This will no longer be when we are all within Ew. Entry Four Put book away.
We are one within the Ew. All that is and all that can be is within the Ew. As the warmth of the sun leaves our body, we make a new one within the Ew. All are now within the Ew. All that are Evol. None that are Tae. Entry Five Put book away.
In the Ew we thrive as one. In the world of the two moons that will not be, we are taken to the false secret of the Tae. Within the eggshell, we gaze upon the lie of the Tae. It does not frighten us for we know of the true Ew. We are given to false secret and we are consumed by the hunger of the Tae. The Evol become smaller within the two moon world, but we become bigger within the Ew. Entry Six Put book away.
We Evol are no longer Onu. The Onu will be as one. In the Ew, we are greater than all alone. If we are not dead enough for life, are we not alive enough for death? We are two and we are one and we are two. The Evol are two, for the worlds can become as one. The Alliz Evol Ew walk in the waking world as the Evol. The Alliz Evol Ew walk in the sleeping world as Alliz Ew Saur. They are the same. We are Onu. Entry Seven Put book away.
The soft land with the water is no more than the water with the soft land. They are barriers between worlds, just like the Ew and the Here. Two that cross at the same time, these world. Alliz are two. Evol are two. We Alliz Evol Ew are in the Here. We Alliz Ew Saur are in the Here. We are many and we are one. Entry Eight Put book away.
Our numbers are given to the false secret of the Tae. Our numbers are given to the ogres and the trolls and the furry worms. We grow smaller as the Alliz Evol Ew. We grow larger as the Alliz Ew Saur. We Evol stand within our home of water and bog. We Saur move between the earth and wind and will be with we Evol. Entry Nine Put book away.
We Evol no longer live within the Ew. We live only within the Here. The secret given to use by the multi-color lizard stand before us. We are not Alliz Onu. We are Alliz Evol Ew. We are not Alliz Tae Ew. We are Alliz Ew Saur. Our fourth secret will be shown to the false fourth secret of the Tae. Then we will be Alliz Onu. Entry Ten Put book away.
We are the Alliz Ew Saur and we are the Alliz Evol Ew. The Tae see us at the same time. We do not see their secret. Their eggshell is empty of yolk. They have no Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel. Their truth has been spoken too much and now becomes a lie. Close Book.
Books
"Alliz Onu" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Alliz Onu". It is a folktale concerning the lizard people of the Feerrott. It looks as if it was translated from another language. Entry One Put book away.
This is a story made from wind and earth. This is a truth that can become a lie if it is spoken too much, so beware. Listen to the tale and you will know. Listen with your tongue and you shall see. See how we have been one but are now two. Know the Alliz Onu. Entry Two Put book away.
In the land of the five moons, the stars still spoke with us. They taught us the secrets of the marsh. They taught us the secrets of fire. But the stars did not teach us the secrets of our heart. We could not feed until this secret was known. Entry Three Put book away.
Onu is who we were. Onu was what we felt. And this was how we lived. Many times the wings of the root flies would be used to wipe away our smells. Without the smell of the Onu, we could find the secret of the heart of the Onu. One must always remember this. Entry Four Put book away.
We could not hear the screams, but we knew they were there. We could smell them coming from the great stones that grew with edges. The Onu knew that within the eggshell of these stones held a secret. We had been given three by the stars, but we could not feed until we owned the fourth. Entry Five Put book away.
The Onu with no scent would steal the fourth secret. The egg would be cracked and the mystery revealed. We Onu with the scent would remain to tend to the clutch. During this time, we would not feed until the fourth secret was known. Entry Six Put book away.
We Onu who had opened a hole within the great edged stones would hold our bravery. This is why there was no scent. We Onu who would hold the clutch could feel the hunger and this we held too. Entry Seven Put book away.
The horned lizard with four legs and two more above spoke for the stars. The light of the north sky would follow this great lizard and the lizard would follow it. The white lizard was there when the night would come and was not there when the day warmed our skin. The hooved lizard would show us the fourth secret. We now knew the secret of the Onu's heart. The secret was Ew. Entry Eight Put book away.
We Onu would return from the inside of the stone egg. We Onu would say that we knew the fourth secret. We Onu knew the secret of the Onu's heart. Now we knew the fourth secret and we knew the fourth secret. There were two that could only be one. And this is why we Onu are now two. Entry Nine Put book away.
We Onu knew that the fourth secret could only be known when the day was gone. The secret to our hearts was between our eyes. And if we could open our heart, we Onu could make the world command our bidding. When we were one being within the world that is not, we feed and we are Evol. When we are within the world that is, we are Alliz Evol Ew. Entry Ten Put book away.
We Onu knew that the fourth secret was not for us. The fourth secret is Ew. The secret will now be Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel. We are the Alliz Onu. We will now be the Alliz Tae Ew. Now that the secret is known, the secret will be given to and it will give unto us. We can give more if we feed. We feed only on those that do not know Ew and what Ew is now. Close Book.
Books
"Alliz Tae Ew" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Alliz Tae Ew". It is a folktale concerning the lizard people of the Feerrott. It looks as if it was translated from another language. Entry OnePut book away.
This is a story made from salt whispers so one must check for the scent. This is a truth that can become a lie if it is spoken too much so beware. Listen to the tale and you will know. Choose your Ew and you shall know. Know the Alliz Tae Ew. Entry TwoPut book away.
The Evol do not know the secret as we do. We must give this secret with our teeth and our gizzards. This is the only way, for the secret has shown us. The Evol resist us giving them the secret. There is no other way. Entry ThreePut book away.
The Evol do as we tell them. We tell them to leave the warmth of the holy site of the fourth secret. They will walk the lands of flowing sap and running blood and the fanged flies. They must chew the acrid air and have the cold of the night wash over them. This makes the feeding better. Entry FourPut book away.
Not the Tae, not the knowers of the secret, not the givers to the Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel. They are Evol and we are not. The secret promises that when we are on Onu again, the fourth shall tell us the fifth. This is us being slow. This is us tasting the air. This is us preparing to feed. Entry FivePut book away.
We Alliz Tae Ew know the secret within our heart, but for some the secret is known deeper in their hearts. And the secret has given a tap-tap-tap to their hearts and their tail holds more water. There are Alliz Tae Ew that must be listened to, for they know the fourth secret. They know the Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel. They will bring forth the cold night with their gift, we will bring the meat with our sharpened sticks of wood. Entry SixPut book away.
We Tae give to the secret and it gives to us. This is known. The secret tells us that we do not need five moons to guide us. The two full moons will be the honesty that is given to us. The moons that become two from five can only happen if the Tae and Evol slide through the holse that is not there. And it will. Entry SevenPut book away.
The five moons are only two and the blood pools are clear. The evershifting land stays as one place. Warmth is in the air. The fouth secret has given us the truth. The fourth secret must be given to. We must not give only the teeth and the gizzard. There must be more. Entry EightPut book away.
The fourth secret is lost to us is the place that once was. Evol children speak that their false fourth secret cannot leave them. We will birth an eggshell made from sharp edged stones just as it was. The yolk will then fill with the fourth secret and the Evol will know theirs is a lie. Entry NinePut book away.
The house of the fourth secret now stands upon the true world. The Tae and the Evol have built the shell. Now we wait for the yolk to fill. Evol do not know. Our hunger does know. They will stand and we shall show them what we feel. We will gain from their meat as the secret has shown us. Entry TenPut book away.
It is the Temple. It is the home to the secret. The aspects of the secret fill the stones. We need not chew and smack upon the bones of only the Evol. The secret that stands within the heart has shown us softer meat. We will suck the marrow from ogres and trolls. We will give the secret to the Evol or we will feed on them. We are Onu. We are Tae. We are the bringers of the Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel Eggshell. Close Book.
Books
"Bestest Orc Emperors" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Bestest Orc Emperors". It briefly highlights several important leaders from orcish history. Unfortunately it is told from the perspective of an orc. Entry One Put book away.
I am the person who tells stories for the Emperor because I tell the best stories ever. I was told to write a story down on this so in case I get killed by the Emperor he won't forget all my old stories. Emperor Fyst told me to write all the stories about the bestest Emperors ever so I will write them down now. Entry Two Put book away.
The first of the greatest orc emperors was Emperor Crush. He was the smartest orc and the most powerfullest orc that ever lived. He lived in this far off place where there were all these trees and stupid elves and stuff. Emperor Crush built this huge castle with his own hands and let other orcs live inside it with him. Entry Three Put book away.
He would go ahead and make everyone of his orcs do all kinds of exercises everyday until they died. Not all of them died, but a lot of them did! That is how good he was! He made a really good army out of his orcs and then called them names like Centurion and things like that which meant "Really Good Fighter". Entry Four Put book away.
Emperor Crush would be the greatest Emperor any of the orcs would have for a long time. He would smash all of the elves and he even chopped down all of those stupid trees of theirs. One day he would fall on a dagger that a dark elf was holding and would die, though. That would make all of the orcs really mad, so they killed even more stupid elves. Entry Five Put book away.
There was no bigger and better Emperor than Crush until Emperor Gash took over a lot of the orcs. I don't know if he was in the same place that Emperor Crush was, but he had to be because the orcs have always been together. Emperor Gash would make lots of different armies work together and do some really sneaky things to all the humans. Entry Six Put book away.
Emperor Gash didn't just make the orcs do things, he also made all the big dumb ogres do things too. He said stuff like "Do this or I kill you" and they did, because the ogres are not as good as orcs are. He also made some big Averturd thing some stuff too, because he was the greatest orc Emperor there ever was. Entry Seven Put book away.
Emperor Gash was the best Emperor because he had sneakiness and did it on all the stupid other humans. They gave him lots of money to leave them alone and then he went into the desert. No other orc could come up with something like that. He made us wait there and said we orcs would go back to the humans when they had more money and take it one day. Entry Eight Put book away.
Emperor Fyst is our Emperor today and he is the best one to ever lead any orcs. He was the bestest gladiator in all of the rings. I even made a lot of money off of him when he was fighting. When he became Emperor I gave him all of my money back and he made me the history person to tell about him. Entry Nine Put book away.
We used to have another Emperor who was really stupid and did nothing really good. The old dumb Emperor used to make gladiators fight in front of him whenever he ate dinner. He make Emperor Fyst fight one day and the Emperor killed all of the other orcs. He then call the stupid emperor mean names and then killed all of the other guards who were told to kill him. Entry Ten Put book away.
Emperor Fyst then jumped out of the fighting pit and started to fight the dumb emperor. We all laughed because the dumb emperor didn't even know how to fight. All the dumb emperor knew what do was to take orders. Emperor Fyst doesn't do that stuff. He is the best fighter ever! Close Book.
Books
"Bird Watching - The Beast of the Enchanted Lands, Part I" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Bird Watching - The Beast of the Enchanted Lands, Part I". It is the story of the author's fateful encounter with the Great White Hummingbird. Entry One Put book away.
Welcome, reader, to another exciting chapter in my Bird Watching series. Many of you have asked me, "Artemisio III, what caused you to take up bird watching?" Well, in this special edition, I"ll tell you how it all began. Entry Two Put book away.
Many years ago, when I was a wee lad, I would traipse around the countryside, exploring all the great mysteries of the world. I was so overjoyed at all the interesting things I found, I never really paid attention to where I was going. Entry Three Put book away.
My life drastically changed when I ran afoul of what would later become my arch-nemesis. As I collected posies to give to dear Mum, I saw an odd sight floating above a patch of flowers. Curious, I stepped forward to investigate. Entry Four Put book away.
There before me was a hummingbird. But reader, make no mistake, it was no ordinary hummingbird. No, this hummingbird would send shivers down your spine. Hovering before me was one of the deadliest creatures known to Norrath - The Great White Hummingbird. Entry Five Put book away.
Now, I know you're saying, "But Artemisio III, isn't the Great White Hummingbird just a myth?" and I say to you, reader, "Listen to the stories, for they are true!" A simple sighting of such a magnificent beast would not have normally been enough to change my life were it not for what happened next. Entry Six Put book away.
Hearing my approach with its supersonic powers of hearing, the Great White slowly looked up at me. I'll never forget the look in its eyes as it spotted me! It was like looking into pools of darkness, and from its eyes it oozed an ichor of filth that penetrated deep into your soul. Entry Seven Put book away.
As the Great White smelled my fear, it began to laugh in that low, mocking cackle all of the stories claim it possesses. It began to rise over the flower patch, knowing that I had nowhere to run. This is when my life began to flash before me. Entry Eight Put book away.
The Great White began to hover around in a pattern that began to lull my senses. As I watched it, I was hypnotized by its beauty, all but forgetting the mortal peril I was in. That's when it opened its gaping maw, showing me its jagged teeth. The Great White was about to go for the kill. As I turned to run, I tripped over a rock, knocking myself to the ground. That was when I knew it was all over. Entry Nine Put book away.
But you see, that was what saved me! The special helmet my mother always made me wear fell off my head as I tripped. It flew straight into the sky, and as it plummeted to the ground, it fell right on top of the Great White Hummingbird. Underneath my helmet was trapped all 2 inches of seething evil! Fortunately, I had my wits about me, and I left the helmet where it was. Entry Ten Put book away.
I ran home to tell my Mum of the events, but she was more concerned about what happened to my helmet. Instead of making up some story about giving it to a nomad in exchange for some magical beans, I chose to tell her the truth, no matter how much it frightened her. This is only the beginning, however. In the next volume, I shall detail how someone unleashed the Great White back into the world, and how I began my search to save Norrath from utter destruction. Close Book.
Books
"Bird Watching - The Beast of the Enchanted Lands, Part II" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Bird Watching - The Beast of the Enchanted Lands, Part II". It is a guide to bird watching in the Enchanted Lands and the great danger that flies across the land. Entry One Put book away.
Welcome, reader, to the exciting conclusion of the story I began in Part I of the Beast of the Enchanted Lands. As you may remember, I told you the harrowing tale of my first encounter with the Great White Hummingbird. The following tale covers how I risked my life to track down that evil fiend and stop it from wreaking destruction upon innocent travelers. Entry Two Put book away.
Ever since that day I narrowly escaped death at the maw of the Great White Hummingbird, the memory of that encounter haunted my sleep for years. The reader will be surprised to learn that I began bird watching not for the sheer pleasure of it, but rather to follow the old adage -- know your enemy. Entry Three Put book away.
When my dearest Father found my special helmet in the hands of a wandering nomad, I knew that the Great White had been unleashed upon the land again. I vowed that I would find it and put an end to its existence once and for all. You can read all about my various adventures in my other books, which I know you are sure to buy. Entry Four Put book away.
For many years I studied my elusive prey. And elusive it was! No one claimed to know anything about it, and after much questioning I came to the conclusion that Great White Hummingbird had frightened everyone into silence. My clue to its whereabouts came from the ramblings of a drunken dwarf. He would be the one to give a name to my archenemy - Zibbly Blip. Entry Five Put book away.
Now that I knew the True Name of my enemy, I sought out the greatest mages of the land. In time, I found him hiding down by the docks in Freeport. Through much coercing in the way of platinum coins, he used the True Name to reveal where I would find my prey -- The Enchanted Lands. Entry Six Put book away.
I set sail at once for these so-called Enchanted Lands, intent on engaging in mortal combat with the foul beast. Captain Grok'Zar, a burly man that looked a little bit like an orc, had assured me that I would arrive safely upon the shores in no time at all. Were it not for the sneaky attack by pirates in the middle of the night, I surely would have made it there safe and sound. Entry Seven Put book away.
Having been blindfolded by pirates and tossed overboard, I would have thought my journey at an end. I managed to secure a piece of flotsam to hang onto, and over the course of several months, I managed to collect enough to build a small raft. Food and water were no problem, for the sea is swimming with fish and filled with, well, water (a bit on the salty side, yes, but beggars can't be choosers). Entry Eight Put book away.
I am not sure how much time passed, for when adrift on the ocean, there are other things to concern oneself with. After several weeks, for instance, I started seeing the most beautiful birds you could possibly imagine flying past the sun. The amount that I saw could fill whole volumes, but I am here to tell of the Great White Hummingbird. Fear not, reader, for in the end I finally found the lands I sought. Entry Nine Put book away.
When I arrived on shore, it took a few moments for my sealegs to become accustomed to solid land. No sooner than I adjusted, I spied my prey floating right in front of me. In the time since I had last seen the Great White Hummingbird, it had learned the magical arts of illusion. For you see, rather than appear as the threatening monster it truthfully was, it had taken the form of a smiling, waving halfling. Entry Ten Put book away.
Not falling for its insidious tricks, I grabbed my harpoon I fashioned from the barnacles floating under my raft and I launched it through the air with all my might. Rest assured, gentle reader, it hit its mark square in the chest. Falling to the ground, it did not have time to cast its spell to turn back into its true hummingbird form. I buried the false halfling that day, saying a small prayer for a fallen enemy, and wound up doing my part to save Norrath from the horrid predations of the Great White Hummingbird. Close Book.
Books
"Bronsin" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Bronsin." It is the tale of a man named Bronsin, how he came to lose his village, and what he's done with his life since then. Entry One Put book away.
There hasn't been one tavern I've been to that you can't find someone willing to part with their life's story in exchange for a free ale. Add in a lost love to that story, and it may not cost you an ale at all. Finally, mix in a personal nemesis of some type and you can be assured that it won't cost you a copper to hear it. I've been told I'm a good listener, too. But this story? This one's mine. Entry Two Put book away.
The name's Bronsin. I grew up in a village far away from here. So far away, as a matter of fact, its name probably means nothing to you. My village ain't too important to the story, though. What happened to it is. For you see, the place don't exist anymore thanks to the Drakota. Entry Three Put book away.
What's a Drakota, you ask? Well, they're the things I've been hunting for years now. But I'll get back to that later - we were talking about my village. Well, it goes like this. We had this visitor who showed up one night, claimed he had something really important that he needed to keep hidden. Wound up telling my Pa what it was. After he did, well, my Pa told him he could live there for as long as he liked. Entry Four Put book away.
Everything was all hunky-dory for a number of years, and that fellow always kept to himself. So much so that we never even found out what his name was. Never got a chance to find out what it was that he had on him, either. Maybe things could've been much different if we did. Doesn't really matter now, since the Drakota came from the skies and killed him in the end. Entry Five Put book away.
It was a nice lazy day. Everyone was enjoying some watermelon juice, being as hot as it was. That's when we all heard what sounded like old Margera beating her carpet. Soon enough, we saw it was those lizards. About twenty of them swooped down from the sky in perfect formation and started breathing fire all over the surrounding houses. I may sound matter of fact about it, but that's just because I've seen much worse since then. Entry Six Put book away.
Looking back now, I see what these things were doing. They were rounding us up just like cattle for the slaughter. Once we were all in a big circle, we heard even more beating of wings. That's when we saw that it was much, much bigger than the flying lizards. Been told this one is what they call a Dragon. me? I call him my nemesis. Entry Seven Put book away.
So this golden dragon comes flying down and tells everyone that he knows the Keeper is in the village. Says he wants the Keeper and the Orb. I spoke up first, stupid me. I tell him we won't know what he's talking about and that we just want to be left alone. Well, it was good luck and bad luck I said that. Good because I'm still here today, bad because I got a 'punishment' I've never forgotten. Entry Eight Put book away.
So as the Drakota are busy teaching me a lesson for opening my big mouth, this big Dragon tells the villagers that if the Keeper isn't handed over, half of the people will be killed. Just as everybody starts screaming and hollering, a magical explosion goes off in the hut the nameless guy was living in. At once, all the Drakota forget all about me and check out the destroyed hut. Entry Nine Put book away.
They come out holding the already dead body of the nameless guy and say the Orb was nowhere to be found. This dragon tells the Drakota to kill everyone and flies off. Well, those Drakota sure know how to do their job! With their fiery breath, they went and killed my neighbors. They killed my family. They killed my wife. They killed my children. But they made a big mistake, they forgot to kill me. Entry Ten Put book away.
Since then, I've been hunting down these beasts. Already killed about twenty of them, and plan on killing every last one of them. Makes it hard to track them, being they cut out my tongue that day. But all I have to do is look for signs of terror in the eyes of people talking to me. That tells me if the Drakota are close. And if the Drakota are close, then that Dragon is too. And I'm saving him for last. Close Book.
Books
"Destroyer's Folly" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Destroyer's Folly". It is an old song transcribed onto the pages. Its structure is familiar with elven poetry, so it wouldn't be too much to assume that this song goes back thousands of years. Entry One Put book away.
The following song was taught to me by my grandmother. She tells me that was sung to her by her own grandmother. I am recording it here for my own granddaughter. Entry Two Put book away.
"When the sun was high in the sky, And the winds blew gently in the wind, The Destroyer would come to the land, And spread his hatred and sin." Entry Three Put book away.
"From high in the mountains he would fly, And rain unholy fire from the sky, Taking his copper bride, And letting loose his pride" Entry Four Put book away.
"His set forth his name on a plate and a prayer, And ordered his flock to sow despair. Seeking the heat of the heart and the cold of the fair, His children were to seek out their lair." Entry Five Put book away.
"Destroyer, Destroyer, you came for blood, Destroyer, Destroyer, your mind did flood, Betrayer, Betrayer, you removed your ring, Betrayer, Betrayer, your heat did sing." Entry Six Put book away.
"The broodlings of carnage and lust, They sang your name as Terrinax. The broodlings of pain and untrust, They sang your name as Master." Entry Seven Put book away.
"Wielding his leash and letting them loose, The Destroyer sent forward his brood, To open their hearts and to set them free, The two lovers of Fire and Ice reunited." Entry Eight Put book away.
"But a hero would come from the light of day, To save our forests and towns. Wielding a blade to strike down the Drakota, The hero would say the Destroyer." Entry Nine Put book away.
"The broodlings, bereft of their Harness, Ravaged the lands, winds, and sea. Death and destruction from their unholy mouths, We prayed for salvation to set us free." Entry Ten Put book away.
"The unbroken Ring came to offer us solace, reigning in the maddened broodlings. Taking the Drakota back to the desolate lands of their birth, they calmed the wildfire with cooling ice." Close Book.
Books
"Dragoon Zytl - Black Rank" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This old book is titled "Dragoon Zytl - Black Rank". It is the account of a dark elven soldier that appears to have lived hundreds of years ago. Its chronicle tells of the Dragoons adventures throughout Norrath during the Time of Turmoil. Through much work, most of the missing pages have been found. Read entry one. Put book away.
The Outpost serves no purpose. Why do we Teir'Dal, rightful owners of Norrath, insist on working "with" these mindless Trolls and Ogres? They need to be whipped into submission, not worked along side with. Were it not for these degenerate lizard-men, the King would never stand for this! Read entry two. Put book away.
I have been called back to my home. Though I will not say it aloud, I miss Neriak like one misses a lover. I have suffered the dishonor of briefing the General on the route I took each night on my patrol. Whereas I was able to take the path myself, exterminating anything that dared walk upon it, the General has plans on bringing a whole contingent of Dragoons with him. Knowing him, he'll get them all killed. Read entry three. Put book away.
We have convinced the captain of this abomination of a ship to remain quiet about our presence. We too will visit this frozen land just as our degenerate cousins have done. There must be something here that draws them so. We will find what it is and report it to our glorious King. Read entry four. Put book away.
We have found her home. The one they call their mother, Tunare. She feels it with every death. With every one of these creatures felled, it is like a slash to her face. We can hear her cries of pain echo from the trees themselves. And the way our brethren stand in horror as we slaughter the children of their Mother. I have never known a joy so much as I know now. Read entry five. Put book away.
I have been honored by both my King and my Prince for leading the squad to the Plane of Growth. I was judged worthy enough to be told that our discovery has caused the King and Queen to come upon a stroke of inspiration. I know nothing more than that, but it is enough to swell my chest with pride. Read entry six. Put book away.
I have been personally selected by my King to extract the secrets of the Spires from the Scions. I do not trust these mysterious individuals. They seem to contain much power, or how else could they have unlocked the secrets of the Spires. I will bring with me a whole contingent of Dragoons to be on the safe side. Read entry seven. Put book away.
I have been given one last chance to atone for losing the contingent of Dragoons to the Scions spells. I personally will travel, alone, to the rumored city rumored to exist upon the moon. If the rumor is true, and I find those of Teir'Dal blood living in harmony with all of the other races within that city of Katta Castellum... then I will report back to the King. I must keep my vow not to kill them. Read entry eight. Put book away.
The moon of Luclin is like no other place I have ever seen. Not only does Luclin contain creatures that are unlike anything upon or below Norrath, there is a deeper secret hidden with the Grey. Since this is a solo mission, I do not have one of the weak spellcasters with me to allow us to breathe in that dead place. It's mysteries will remain just that. Read entry nine. Put book away.
The Queen has directly ordered me to venture to the Plane of Knowledge and see if there may be some way for the Teir'Dal to gain the upperhand. I have been assured that this order has come from the King, but he is incapacitated at the time. I am to report back to her in five years time. Read entry ten. Put book away.
The Queen is very pleased by the information that I have garnered about the gateways into the planes. She has assured me that the King will be most pleased to hear this information. By her decree, which she has assured me was from the King, I have been raised into the Blood Rank. I am one of the Six. I am DRAGOON. Close Book.
Books
"Dragoon Zytl - Blood Rank" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This old book is titled "Dragoon Zytl - Blood Rank". It is the account of a dark elven soldier that appears to have lived hundreds of years ago. Its chronicle tells of the his involvement in events that led up to the invasion of Faydwyr. Through much work, most of the missing pages have been found. Read entry one Put book away.
My subordinates have displeased me. Today I had to discipline a whole contingent of Dragoons for daring to question the King's orders. They do not need to know why the First Gate is being built. All they have to do is defend it. To question the Kings orders is to question why you are allowed to breathe. Read entry two. Put book away.
The First Gate has neared completion. No longer will these disgusting Trolls be allowed to walk so close to the Third Gate. It is bad enough that we must continue to suffer their presence. The Queen has assured me personally that all will be understood in the future. Read entry three. Put book away.
First Gate is a testament to the superiority of the Teir'Dal. It is now complete and the lesser races that we allow to enter will only interact with the low-borns - merchants and simple guards, alike. The monuments glorifying the wisdom of our past rulers will show the lessers where their place in the world is. Read entry four. Put book away.
All heretics will suffer the same fate as the band suffered today. No one will walk within Neriak and dare to utter blasphemy as they did today. Innoruuk has not grown silent, as they claim. He is in our very hearts and guides our hands in all of our actions. I am sure the Queen's necromancers will bring upon them a more deserving fate even in undeath. Read entry five. Put book away.
My troops will be the most prepared for when the day comes. I drill them twenty hours a day. I will not suffer the indignity of seeing Gmiz's command reign victorious. Mine will be the first to go see the glory. And take it all. In several more years, my men will see what I've done for them. Read entry six. Put book away.
We have won every last one of the contests. My men will be the first. Gmiz came to congratulate me for my victory. I ran my blade through his gut before his hand had fully lifted his assassin's dagger. Now, not only are his men without a leader, they will remain behind as the invasion begins. Read entry seven. Put book away.
The Overlord's ragtag group of undisciplined ruffians has attempted a failed push into the forest. It was close to four hundred years ago that I last stood at that bridge and defended it. I still brandish the scar given to me by my Prince to this day, having refused all healing. Slaughtering those Militiamen brings me back to my youth. But I have no time for that now. I must see to it that the ships are completed. Read entry eight. Put book away.
The armada has finally been constructed. Our spellcasters have done much to keep the armada hidden from prying eyes. Now it is time to stand aside and let the true warriors take over. Soon, our oh-so-beloved brethren will pay for their millennia of insolence. In their contemptuous state, they will never know what happened. Read entry nine. Put book away.
Today King Naythox Thex, in all his resplendent glory, sailed out on the first ship. I am honored to follow tomorrow. My Queen informs me that she has a message that I must personally deliver to the King. As I depart, she will give me the message. Tomorrow we shall fell their precious trees. We shall raze their cities to the ground. We shall let loose the dogs of war. Read entry ten. Put book away.
Five hundred years ago, I passed the nine trials. I defeated my enblooded brothers in mortal combat. I drank from the Chalice of Hate. I bent my knee to MY King. I will NOT take her offer. I will not leave my King's side at the moment of our greatest triumph. I will not betray my king with an assassin's blade. I will die for him before I betray him. I am Zytl. I am, always have been, and always will be - DRAGOON. Close Book.
Books
"Dragoon Zytl - Green Rank" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This old book is titled "Dragoon Zytl - Green Rank". It is the account of a dark elven soldier that appears to have lived hundreds of years ago. Its chronicle tells of this dark elf's rise through the ranks of the Dragoons. Through much work, most of the missing pages have been found. Entry One Put book away.
I have passed the nine trials. I have defeated my enblooded brothers in mortal combat. I have drunk from the Chalice of Hate. I have bended the knee to our glorious King. I have torn away the chains of my home. I have stripped away the ties to my family name. I am no longer T'Xerd. I am now Zytl. I am now Dragoon. Read Entry Two. Put book away.
The commander has assigned our company to watch over the bridge for the following decade. I am proud to guard the bridge, for I am a Dragoon. I saw some halflings enter the forest today. Our forest. They were curious. They are now dead. Entry Three Put book away.
I have now mastered the Three-Singing-Skulls technique today with my blade. In recognition of my skill, my blade will be blessed by the priests of hate. No longer will those balls of light gleam with smug defiance as my steel passes through them. Not one wisp will escape my vigilance. Entry Four Put book away.
I have received an honor today. We spied some dervish cutthroats approaching the bridge and stopped them. Much fighting ensued, and in the end they had slain all but myself. The bandits were in truth my Prince and his entourage disguised as commoners. I was commended for lasting as long as I did from his very mouth. I will wear these scars with pride. Entry Five Put book away.
The Dragoons will no longer guard the bridge, leaving it to the lower births to do so. This is the decree from my glorious King. Some say that the Queen has made this decree, not the King. The next one to say this will also have his tongue severed from his mouth. Entry Six Put book away.
I am to escort our prestigious necromancers to the Innothule swamp. We will waylay some of the lowly Trolls and bring them back with us. It will test my discipline to not kill them as the animals they are. I pray to Innoruuk that he will give me an opportunity to vent elsewhere. Entry Seven Put book away.
Innoruuk is testing me. I have been assigned to watch over the Foreign Quarter. To watch over all of the Lessers... and not to slaughter them. I must not question my King's orders, but I do not understand why they should be allowed to walk among us. I must find some way to hurt these inferior beings, whilst maintaining my vows. Entry Eight Put book away.
It has been two hundred years, and I have risen amongst the ranks. I am now free to choose my assigned duties. I have placed my request to join the strike teams that roam the West Commonlands. After all of these years watching the lessers walk in safety within our city... now they will pay for their assumptions of equality. Entry Nine Put book away.
Innoruuk is with me. The larger that Freeport becomes, the more it expels travelers from its' sickening walls. The more that travel the Western Commonlands, the more that learn the mistakes of their ancestors. The Teir'Dal are the masters, and the rest are the chattel to do with as we please. Entry Ten Put book away.
I have been raised to the Black Ranks due to my unswerving vigilance. I now wear the full armor of the Dragoon. My blade, soaked with the blood of many a traveler, will be reforged and I will be given another honor. I shall escort D'Vinn to the lands of our worthless cousins. I shall witness the beginning of their downfall. Close Book.
Books
"Even More Adventures of Jorbo and Mappy" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Even More Adventures of Jorbo and Mappy ". It is the story of two halfling boys and how they happened upon some exciting adventures. Entry One Put book away.
Jorbo and Mappy had many exciting adventures ever since the moment they left their mothers behind and left the kitchen. Having narrowly escaped an orc, an old witch, and seeing a dragon-like halfling, they knew there was so much more out there to find. With a little help from the Drafling, they intended to do just that - find more adventure. Entry Two Put book away.
Following the directions given to them by the Drafling, they trekked through many hills and valleys, through farms and past homes until they found what the mysterious man had mentioned. Hidden away, they stood before a mighty troll, frozen in time. With large spindly legs and gangly arms outstretched, the troll was made entirely of wood. Entry Three Put book away.
Having never seen a troll before, the halfling friends didn't know what it would do. They were assured by the Drafling that it was perfectly safe, however, so they began to climb up to his head to get a better look. It took a long time, for the troll was as tall as a tree, but they eventually made it to the top. That's when the troll's eyes opened and it began to move. Entry Four Put book away.
Slowly moving across the land, the troll took very steady and deliberate steps. The two boys, rather than being scared, had a great time seeing the world in motion! That was until the passed an orc who spotted them riding atop the trolls' head. The orc called out its other fellows and began grunting at the troll to give them the children. Entry Five Put book away.
The troll at first didn't seem to pay any attention to the orcs, but when a number of them had gathered around the wooden troll, it stopped in place. One of the orcs stepped forward and started speaking in a strange tongue. Having spoken to the goblin with three tongues, they paid attention to what the orc was saying, but to the boys it only sounded a tree bending with the wind. Entry Six Put book away.
The wooden troll then began to move its arms and quickly plucked the boys from the top of its head. Lowering it to the ground, the boys came to the conclusion that the Drafling had lied to them, for they were now in the clutches of the orcs. With nowhere to escape this time, the two boys knew that their adventure was finally over. Entry Seven Put book away.
Paraded through the orc town as prisoners, the two boys knew they were in store for a cruel fate at the hands of these evil villains. Looking around, they realized that the orcs had not just captured the boys, but all of RIVERVALE! Just when everything looked hopeless, they were given a glimmer of hope. It seemed that the orcs were taking the kids straight to their houses. Entry Eight Put book away.
As the orcs approached the houses, Jorbo and Mappy could see their mothers waiting on the front doorsteps, tapping their feet impatiently, arms crossed. That was when the two boys knew that all hope was indeed lost. They could tell at once that their mother had been taken over by the wicked witch they encountered earlier. For you see, the crone was standing right beside them. Entry Nine Put book away.
The mothers started off by asking why they pushed Deputy Dopkin into the pond? Not knowing what they were talking about, the kids remained silent. That's when one of the orcs called out and said that he saw Deputy Dopkin drinking jumjum by the bridge that day. By saying nothing more than those words, the magic spell wore off of all the orcs and they were turned back into halflings again! Entry Ten Put book away.
The children then began to tell their mothers and everyone else about the great adventure they had that day around Rivervale. When the boys asked what was for dinner, they realized that their mothers were still under the control of the wicked witch. For you see, when they asked about dessert, they were told that there would be none... since they already ate some strawberry cake earlier that day. THE END Close Book.
Books
"Fauna of the Enchanted Lands A-K" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Fauna of the Enchanted Lands A-K". It is a guide to some of the animals that roam the wilds of the Enchanted Lands. Entry One Put book away.
Badgers: The badgers of the Enchanted Lands are rather similar to those found throughout the rest of Norrath. Growing as tall as a halfling, the badger is known for its foul mood. Extremely territorial, it is not uncommon for this animal to charge at anyone who approaches it in a threatening manner. Entry Two Put book away.
If one is charged by a badger, climb up a tree as fast as possible. Although quite sharp, their claws are not strong enough to allow them to follow you up the tree. When the badger has finally given up, make sure you jump down rather than climbing, for it may have rubbed its poisonous fur against the trunk of the tree. Entry Three Put book away.
Briarpaw: The briarpaw is a sub-species of the average brown bear found throughout Norrath. Ranging in size from a cub to a full grown adult, the Briarpaw is a force to be reckoned with just due to its sheer size. Fortunately, the bear has a habit of hibernating during the winter, allowing for safe travels during that frozen season. Entry Four Put book away.
Easily spotted, it is well advised to stay away from these great beasts. The Briarpaw's diet primarily consists of rotting flesh, but if none can be found, they are not adverse to devouring a living being. Taking into consideration the size of the claws on the bear, it doesn't take too long for them to take down their prey Entry Five Put book away.
Creeper: Truthfully a form of vegetation, the Creeper shares many traits of fauna over flora. A carnivorous plant, the Creeper will store the bodies of its prey inside the tangle of branches that make up it's "body". Able to uproot and move at a slow pace, the Creeper is one of the more dangerous animals within the Enchanted Lands. Entry Six Put book away.
A Creeper is usually smelled far before it is sighted, due to all of the rotting flesh it stores for the winter. This can work to one's advantage, however. Epic battles between Briarpaws and Creeper are not an uncommon sight. It's generally wise to not stick around to see how the battle ends. Entry Seven Put book away.
Grimmins: Do not confuse the grimmins for the average goblin. Though they share similar traits, they are worlds apart. Whereas the goblin is a cunning creature, the grimmin appears to have replaced that with pure viciousness. Do not be caught unawares by these creatures, for no matter how cute they may appear to be, for this is how they lure their prey. Entry Eight Put book away.
Always be sure to keep your distance from these creatures. If one spots you, it may begin to approach you with a curious look. It is highly advised that you run at this point, for if it gets too close, it will attempt to leap at your head. Opening it's maw as wide as possible, the grimmin then proceeds to gnaw at your face until you quit struggling. Entry Nine Put book away.
Klakroks: One of the larger species of beetle in Norrath, the Klakrok gather in large numbers. Through some unknown means of communication, the Klakrok appear to assume various roles and functions in their society. Although many of them are nothing more than simple drones, there are some that act as a type of enforcer among their collective. Entry Ten Put book away.
Though no one has ever seen a Queen Klakrok, it is assumed they have one which may be source of all their directions. This is evidenced by the peculiar means in which the Klakroks will overcome a victim many times their size. Gathering together, they begin to pile on top of each other until they are taller than their victim. By some unheard signal, they fall over all at once, toppling the opponent. They then proceed to stomp all over the victim until the victim is nothing more than a puddle of red goo. Close Book.
Books
"Fauna of the Enchanted Lands L-Z" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Fauna of the Enchanted Lands L-Z". It is a guide to some of the animals that roam the wilds of the Enchanted Lands. Entry One Put book away.
Lasher: The native lasher of the Enchanted Lands is a rather dangerous creature that is best avoided. Possessing a nasty disposition, it does not take much to cause it to act. Unlike a typical rodent, the lasher will not run if approached, but rather it will engage its attacker at once with a violent fury. Entry Two Put book away.
Though it is a natural assumption to keep away from its scorpion-like tail, this is not where the true threat lies. The lasher will try to bite its victim, hoping to infect it with its disease-ridden teeth. Keeping rotting meat in between the gums and teeth, the lasher's mouth is more poisonous than its tail could ever be. Entry Three Put book away.
Salt Snappers: The Salt Snapper is a rather unassuming creature, looking like nothing more than a turtle. Walking with a slow gait, it is easy to assume that it is an easy choice for that day's meal. It doesn't take long before a lazy predator soon comes across the turtle's hidden defenses. Entry Four Put book away.
Rather than hide within its' shell as most other turtles would, the Salt Snapper lash out with its venomous fangs. Containing a very deadly poison within it's teeth, it will attempt to render it's victim incapacitated before feasting on it's food of choice - a still-beating heart. Entry Five Put book away.
Seed of Darkness: Not much is known about this odd creature. Floating in the air, yet not possessing any noticeable wings, the Seed of Darkness travels the Enchanted Lands unmolested. It's diet is as much a mystery as it's species, as well. It seems to feed on animals of all types through some means of osmosis. Entry Six Put book away.
Emitting an oddly colored light that is reminiscent of the color of dried blood, the seed of darkness will coat its victim in that luminescence. A few moments later, the "food" will then drop to the ground, looking emaciated and possibly even older than a few moments before. Whatever it is that the Seed feeds off of, it is never enough, for it is always in search of more sustenance. Entry Seven Put book away.
Void Bats: A variant of the average bat, the Void Shrillers and Shriekers get their name from the loud, ear-splitting howl they emit in order to stun their victims. Not necessarily heard with the ears, it is regularly argued that the sound is heard within a person's head. The sound of its wail is usually followed by a flock descending upon their chosen victims. Entry Eight Put book away.
Being knocked unconscious is only the beginning, however. It is reported that the wailing will build in crescendo until it reaches dangerous levels. The magnitude of the sound is enough to cause the victims' head to explode, allowing the shriekers and shrillers to feed without any disturbance. Entry Nine Put book away.
Wasps: As is seen elsewhere in the world, the Lancer wasps grow to an alarming size. Though it is good advice to stay away from wasps of any size, it is especially important to stay away from the ones that roam the Enchanted Lands. It's not a rare sight to see corpses of animals with large stingers jutting from their bodies. Entry Ten Put book away.
Were it not enough that the Lancer variety of wasp is notorious for it's suicidal attacks on people, the Impaler wasp is even more vicious. When attacking, it seems to know where to strike, aiming straight for a major blood vessel on a body. The stinger will then elongate, following the vein straight into the heart. It doesn't take longer than two or three seconds for the victim to at that point fall over dead. Close Book.
Books
"Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree". It is the journal kept by an orc by the name of Garz'gog, and chronicles the time he spent constructing a great bridge within the land known as Zek. Entry One Put book away.
Day 1 - Me the biggest foreman on making the big bridge. Me tell every other orc what to do. If they don't, I throw them into the water and kick them in the head if they try to get out. Entry Two Put book away.
Day 3 - Me send out party to find some stupid droods. They think they hiding, but I know where they is. Me needs to have a droods blood mixed into the mortar for the foundation of the bridge, or it might fall down. Come on! Everyone knows that! Entry Three Put book away.
Day 5 - Have to send centurions out to get the droods now, cause they putting up a good fight. This no make me happy, because the centurions gonna kill all of them. When they all gone, now I have to use orc blood in the mortar. Me then start running out of workers! AARG! Entry Four Put book away.
Day 20 - Bridge is coming along pretty good. I kicked five orcs in the head today for not making the bridge long enough. I tell other orcs that the bridge needs to reach the other side for it to work right. Entry Five Put book away.
Day 25 - Emperor Fist came to see the bridge today. He say make it even bigger! That makes me happy! I like making big bridges, but I really like making even bigger bridges. The Emperor say he will come back later and see if it is big enough. Entry Six Put book away.
Day 29 - Had to kick more workers in the head for not doing the job right. Throwing in the water and kicking in the head is only reserved for biggest punishment. Me go outta way to find reasons to give it. Entry Seven Put book away.
Day 40 - The Emperor liked how big I made it. He say it might be too big, but then I show him all the tricks I put on it. That's when he made a big smile and patted me on the back in front of all the other orcs! Now everyone know how important I am! Entry Eight Put book away.
Day 50 - Bridge just about done. Haven't had to kick people in head lately, because they know how important I am. Sending messenger to tell Emperor that bridge is just like he wanted, and to show all the other tricks I put on the bridge. Entry Nine Put book away.
Day 55 - Emperor Fist say he wants demonstration of how good bridge is. Me getting all the archers together to hide them in the small boxes for the demonstration. Me also getting the oil boiled up to show off how that works, too. The Emperor will think it's the greatest thing ever! Entry Ten Put book away.
Day 60 - Emperor has put me in the prison for making bridge too good. The demonstration wiped out 200 centurions and 60 elite guard in five minutes! Me am very happy, because me thought it would take seven minutes! Close Book.
Books
"History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. I" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. I". It chronicles the history of the goblins from their creation to the exodus from their homelands. Entry One Put book away.
1 GE - The creations of Rallos and The-Brell-That-Is-Not, the goblins were brought into the world. Gathering together as the One Clan, the goblins would create a society that would flourish within their cavernous world. Entry Two Put book away.
200 GE - The form of an enormous goblin would appear before the Enlightened Council and present itself as the Avatar of War. The Avatar would demand of the goblins an oath that would bind every following generation. In return for the oath, the goblins would be allowed continued existence. Entry Three Put book away.
900 GE - The first schism among goblin society would happen at the death of the Great Chief. His twin sons would fight for succession over the throne, dividing the goblins into two separate camps. Many glorious battles would be fought during what would be called the The Two Chiefs. Entry Four Put book away.
930 GE- The Two Chiefs would end during a duel to the death between the twins. The victor emerged from the duel and proclaimed himself as both himself and his twin. The warring camps, not being able to tell the difference between the two, followed the new Great Chief as if he were their victorious leader. Entry Five Put book away.
215 RGE- The Crumbling would cause the goblins to leave their home behind. Many goblins would perish during the Crumbling and those that survived would begin the Long Journey. Many years of hardship would pass as the Mass Exodus would search for a new home. Entry Six Put book away.
30 PC -The One Clan would see its first separation caused by the Long Journey. While passing through a system of lava channels, a group of goblins would express that they wished to settle down where it was warm. The remaining clan did not agree, leaving this group to live among the fire. Entry Seven Put book away.
32 PC - The next group of goblins to leave the clan would come several years later. Finding an archipelago of islands, a group insisted on living upon those rock outcroppings. Again, the remainder of the clan did not agree, leaving behind that group to their aquatic existence. Entry Eight Put book away.
34 PC - Having found a land that was never visited by the warmth of day, a group of goblins would insist that the Long Journey must stop, for they had reached the end of the world. The remainder, still resolute on finding a home, refused. As before, they left the group behind, traveling beyond that cold and icy environment. Entry Nine Put book away.
35 PC - With more than half their numbers lost during the Long Journey, the goblins began to feel despair that they would never find a suitable home. Many arguments would arise, debating whether or not to return to their original home. With much regret, the remaining members of the One Clan would split one last time. One half would continue looking for a home, and the other half would return to their ancestral home. Entry Ten Put book away.
36 PC - The One Clan, reduced down to nothing more than a small tribe, continued the Long Journey. After an endless travel, they would step foot upon the soil of a strange new land. Little did they know they would soon find a new home. Close Book.
Books
"History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. II" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. II". It chronicles the history of the goblins from when they settled in Norrath to the horrible curse that befell them. Entry One Put book away.
40 PC - The One Clan would spend the next several years scouting the newfound land for a place to settle. The surrounding land was filled with a bounty of food, but they wanted something to remind them of their old home. Entry Two Put book away.
1 MC - Carving out an intricate cave system within a mountainside, the One Clan would change their name to the Mountain Clan in honor of their new home. All would be fine for the next several decades until their continued tunneling would cause them to meet their unknown neighbors. Entry Three Put book away.
37 MC - The goblins would eventually be introduced to a race of short people who lived within the same mountain. For no reason other than lack of being able to communicate, the two races would wind up going to war with each other. Territorial battles would be waged for the next several years. Entry Four Put book away.
43 MC - Using the gifts given to them by their creators, the goblins would craft a magical device that allowed them to actually speak the high pitched tongue of their enemies. Once they realized what these little men were saying, the war stopped at once. Both of these two people shared a love for the same thing... invention! Entry Five Put book away.
100 MC - The partnership between the two races would continue for many years to come. As the years went by, however, the two races would come to disagreements on the methods of creation. These disagreements would escalate to full arguments. The King of the little people and the Great Chief would meet to discuss how to prevent another war. Entry Six Put book away.
100 MC - Both races came to the decision that the only way to prevent a new war was for both peoples to leave for new lands. Agreeing to do so, they left every last one of their marvelous devices within their homes, sealed the mountain and left. Entry Seven Put book away.
1 RE - Seeking a new home once again, the Mountain Clan would be visited by the Avatar of War and told that the oath of their forefathers had come due. They were told to travel to a land where they were to meet other children of Rallos. With that, the Mountain Clan would find themselves soon enlisted in army of the Rallosian Empire. Entry Eight Put book away.
1 - ? RE - The goblins would serve the Rallosian Empire for many years to come. Not fully enslaved by their gigantic counterparts, they were not as free as they had been in the past. Their role would be the part of supplier. Creating their magical devices for use by the soldiers on the front lines of the Empire, the goblins would finally come to know their true role in the world. Entry Nine Put book away.
? RE - During the course of the campaigns across the world of Norrath, the goblins would begin to invent devices of untold beauty and destruction. The blend of technology and magic would reach its height on the day the Rallosian Empire would defeat the gods of the earth themselves. Entry Ten Put book away.
? RE - The mighty gods of the earth would ultimately take their vengeance upon all of those that joined the Rallosian Empire. Soon after the final battle, the goblins would find they were no longer able to construct the most simple of devices. Several generations would pass as more of that knowledge began slipping away until, finally, the goblins could only survive if they stole the tools and weapons from other lesser races. Close Book.
Books
"History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. III" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. III". It chronicles the history of the goblins from when they made a new home in the Bog Mountain to the present. Entry One Put book away.
1 NR - Many uncounted years would pass as the goblins would aimlessly wander throughout the world. Not possessing any powers of creation, they could no longer "make" a home and had to find something that already existed and could support their numbers. Eventually they would find a new home deep inside a cavern. Entry Two Put book away.
4 NR - Soon after they settled, the goblins would be assaulted by monstrous bull-men. Having neither the size or the weapons to stop them, the goblins would retaliate with suicidal charges against the minotaur's villages. After many of these death squads would run to their deaths, enough minotaur axes were secured by the goblins to allow them to fight on even terms. Entry Three Put book away.
20 NR- The wars between the minotaurs and the goblins would continue until a third party would appear. A large eyeball, much larger than a goblin, began communicating with the goblins. It asked to speak with the Big King, and when the meeting was over with, the Big King announced to his people that they would be called "Runnyeye". Entry Four Put book away.
21 NR - With the help of the Great Eyes, the goblins would overpower the minotaurs and put an end to the war. The subjugated minotaurs were then brought before the Great Eyes and made to bow their knees to their new masters. The now mentally controlled minotaurs took no time in conquering the unassuming goblins. Entry Five Put book away.
21 - 600 NR - The goblins, under the mental domination of the Great Eyes, would spend many years in a cruel form of captivity. Acting as the menial labor for the Great Eyes, the goblins would be forced to perform all manner of evil actions. This would continue for many centuries to come. Entry Six Put book away.
600 NR - The Rending would change the face of Norrath, causing the lands to shift. No longer attached to the rest of the world, the Runnyeye goblins would find that their Great Eye masters would spend much of their time away from their minions. This would be the beginning of the end for the Great Eyes. Entry Seven Put book away.
600 NR - While the Great Eyes would turn their attention away from the goblins to discuss their future endeavors, their control would lessen over their mental slaves. A goblin only known as Gribble would bring about a change in the way things were done in Bog Mountain. Entry Eight Put book away.
600-650 NR - Gribble would show the other goblins the manner in which to break the chains of mental slavery. This would cause what is called the Great Purge. The goblins would begin to slaughter what they now referred to as Evil Eyes. When the numbers were reduced to such a small amount, the goblins stopped and came up with an even crueler fate. They would enslave the Evil Eyes! Entry Nine Put book away.
650 - Now - The goblins would proceed to subjugate not only the Evil Eyes, but the minotaurs and boarfiends as well. In addition to their reverse of fate, they seemed to be able to do something they had not done in quite a long time. One of them managed to construct a crude weapon with no assistance from the Evil Eyes. Entry Ten Put book away.
Now - To this day, the Runnyeye goblins are free of their cruel masters. It will take many years before they manage to rebuild all of their lost knowledge. For now, however, the Runnyeye goblins are free to think for themselves and pursue all manner of interests. No longer will they be forced to have thoughts not their own. They are free to rule their own lives. Yes, they are completely free. Close Book.
Books
"Horguz" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Horguz". It seems to be a journal kept by someone called Horguz the Hoarder where wildly rambles about many of the items he's collected over the years. Entry One Put book away.
Me know how to rite in ledders so me is putting dem in dis book. Me is Horguz but dey say I am duh Hoarder. Its because I have duh best hord in all of dis gobelin house. Horguz kicks skulls of goblins and meenotores who take any of Horguz stuff. Me is gonna rite down sum of his stuff he has. Entry Two Put book away.
Me has one of duh things dat is made from metal. Horguz can bend metal with his hands, but dis one bends very fast even with his pinkies. Me thinks it is made from tin. Me is hoping so because me doesn't have dat many things made from tin! Not enuff things is bad! Entry Three Put book away.
Me has all of duh swords and duh axes and duh biggie hammers. Me has one of dem dat is all cracked with pretty glass of all kinds of colors on duh bottom. Horguz likes duh pretty glass, so he keep it. Horguz would keep it even if it didn't have glass. Entry Four Put book away.
I have small little swords, too, even smaller dan duh ones dat duh gobelins use. I have counted dem and counted dem and counted dem because I have so many of dem. Sometime I have twelve of dem and sometimes I have two hundred of dem. Dey are really tricky like dat. Entry Five Put book away.
My favorite thing dat I have is reely small and yellow. It looks like a little bird and it is so funny to look at. When I leave all my treasures behind to go get some water from duh pool, I take dis with me. Sometimes duh little bird will fall in duh water and float around and it makes me laugh and laugh! I WANT MORE OF DESE! Entry Six Put book away.
Me have dis thing that is really interesting. It is small and round and made from metal. It kinda looked like a little rock at first. When I put it in a fire to see if it would glow, it began to melt, so I took it out and kept it! Dis is duh neetest thing ever! Entry Seven Put book away.
Me is having big problem right now keeping all of my stuff. Gobelins see how much stuff I have and dey want it, so dey make meenotores and oduhr wierdo peoples come in and try to take it. Horguz is now losing his stuff, so he puts out all of his silver hoops so people take dem first. Me makes sure to bend dem first so people think dey are valuable first, though. Entry Eight Put book away.
Me started getting all of my stuff when me was a small meenotaur and found dis skeleton of some fishy-man thingie. From duh top it looked like it was a person but duh bottom looked like a fish. I found two more of dem and took dem home. My papa bull beat me up and said I was stupid. That's when I knew he was jealous, so I kept looking for more stuff from den on. Entry Nine Put book away.
I keeps getting all of duh gobelins underwheres. I don't want dese! When I go to get duh food to eat from duh troughs I come back and I always get more. Dey are all stinky and I have no more room for dem! I know dose gobelins are putting dem in my hord and I DON'T WANT DEM! Entry Ten Put book away.
My super special thing that I have is dis body of a beastie that I've never seen before. I can put duh body on me and I look like a monster! I have gray skin and dis one big horn that's all straight on my forehead! I like to walk around a scare little gobelins. Den I push dem off duh bridge! HARHAR! Close Book.
Books
"Jerb Northstar's Journal" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Jerb Northstar's Journal". It appears to be a chronicle of how a druid investigated some new visitors that came to live within his forest. Entry One Put book away.
Entry Thirty-Eight - I have spoken with Left Paw and he told me that there are visitor within the Pines. Though he was too interested in the salmon, in between mouthfuls he told me that I would find them down by the shore. I may wish to see who these guests are, and what intentions they have. Entry Two Put book away.
Entry Forty-Three - I have seen our visitors from afar. I cannot tell for certain what they have planned, but it looks as if our guests may be staying for a while to come. I believe I shall introduce myself to these women so that they know the Glade and the Pines are already being looked after. Entry Three Put book away.
Entry Forty-Six - I am very uncertain about why these women have come to our trees. Though they claim they are refugees, I could tell there was something unspoken between them whenever they would talk. The most mysterious was what appeared to be their leader. I will record my findings and bring this to the Circle. Perhaps their wisdom may better know what to do. Entry Four Put book away.
Arialla Clearsong appears to be the leader of this group of women. She is the one who introduced each of her fellows and explained why they were here in the Jaggedpine. She said they would take refuge on the small island for the time being and leave it as it was when they were done. She refused to say what it was that they were "doing", however. Entry Five Put book away.
Andria introduced herself as a templar. I was unfamiliar with the term, but she assured me it was just a word her people used to describe those who held faith within their hearts. I was unable to get her to tell me what god she worshipped, which draws my suspicion. Entry Six Put book away.
Abella claimed to be a sorcerer. She explained that she drew energies from the surrounding air and crafted them into other forms. I am unfamiliar with the workings of magic that comes not from nature, so much of what she said meant nothing to me. Entry Seven Put book away.
Alexis described herself as a sooth. When I asked her what that meant, she told me that I would surely find out one day. I took her for being one of the rudest of the group. Entry Eight Put book away.
Anessa called herself a thaumaturge. She started to explain what it was that a thaumaturge did, but was interrupted by Arialla who had questions for me. When I answered and asked Anessa to continue, she told me I would not find it interesting. I am no fool, however. I know Arialla gave Anessa a signal to hold her silence. Entry Nine Put book away.
Abigail said that she was a mystic. She told me how she could see those who were trapped between the worlds of life and death. Telling her that I did not believe in such nonsense, I felt the wind kick up around my hair. I am sure it was nothing more than mere coincidence. Entry Ten Put book away.
Anathema was the last one I spoke with, and she in turn aroused my suspicion the most. She told me she was a protector, but when I asked of what, she just looked to Arialla. I stood between the two, blocking visual contact, and that was when I could see the tears begin to well up in her eyes. I am certain there is more going on than meets the eye to these women. Close Book.
Books
"Karath Smoothmane - The Breaking of the Pact" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Karath Smoothmane - Breaking of the Pact ". It is a complete volume chronicling the events of a centaur chieftain and how the tribe managed to co-exist with the giants of the Thundering Steppes. Entry One Put book away.
The following is the account of my travels with Karath Smoothmane, chief of the Baelazern tribe of centaurs in the Commonlands. Throughout the time I spent with him, I came to know him as a good friend. Not only did I learn his customs, I learned much about his life, as well. One of the most important tales I learned from him is transcribed in the following pages - The Breaking of the Pact. Entry Two Put book away.
It was late in the summer when Karath told me why the centaurs would attack only the groups of giants that had six or more in them. Instead of singling out the easier targets, such as the old or the occasional wandering giant, the herd would attack those that could easily defend themselves. He said that this was due to the Breaking of the Pact. Entry Three Put book away.
Karath's sire's sire was the chieftain of the Baelazern tribe at the time when the Pact was broken. It seems that both the giants and the centaurs had a generations-long truce to share the land, staying out of each other's way. Both races lived in harmony, even throughout the time of the Rending. Not only would the Shattering destroy the moon of Luclin, it would also break apart the Pact the two peoples held. Entry Four Put book away.
As the very moon began to barrage the land, both of the two peoples decided that they must work together in order to survive. Both leaders of the races agreed to meet so that they could work out an alliance, not just a truce. Much ceremony was prepared for when the two would meet. Entry Five Put book away.
As both parties met and exchanged their welcoming customs, tragedy struck. In a blazing ball of fire, an enormous boulder from the moon struck the ground where both leaders were, killing them instantly. Only a few people survived the impact, and they went back to describe the treachery of the other side, blaming each other for what happened. Entry Six Put book away.
For the next several years, open warfare broke out among both the giants and the centaurs. Finally, when Kararth's sire came of breeding age, he rose up and united the clan once again. With his eloquent words, he stopped the centaurs from raiding the giants by emphasizing honor. He told them he had a plan. Entry Seven Put book away.
The plan that Karath had in mind would involve showing the giants that they were nothing more than beasts. They could not defeat their enemies by lowering themselves down to their level. If the centaurs were to survive the Shattering, they must not come out of it as barbaric as a human. Or so, these were the words that Karath had said to his people. Entry Eight Put book away.
And so the Baelazern clan proceeded to agree to rules of engagement, asking for council from their new chief. As the years went on they, refined their tactics to the point that they would only attack those that could defend themselves. Karath said that since that day, the centaurs have succeeded at his sire's vision. I asked Karath how many foes they have defeated since then, and he responded with one word, "None". Entry Nine Put book away.
I was wondering how not killing a single giant, the centaur's sworn enemy for close to a hundred years, could be considered successful. Seeing my confusion, Karath chuckled and told me the why. As his sire grew up, waiting for the day when he would rule his people, he would run and play with his only friend... the giant chieftain's son. Entry Ten Put book away.
While they played, they both came up with a plan on how to get their people to work together, yet to also keep their pride. When both chieftains were old enough to lead their people, the plan went into effect. Both people would only attack those that could defend themselves. In the end, even though they war with each other, both peoples have not lost one warrior, woman, or child to the other side for the past two generations. Close Book.
Books
"Karath Smoothmane - Winter Comes" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Karath Smoothmane - Winter Comes". It is a complete volume chronicling the events of a centaur chieftain and the decline of his tribe. Entry One Put book away.
The following is the account of my travels with Karath Smoothmane, chief of the Baelazern tribe of centaurs in the Commonlands. Throughout the time I spent with him, I came to know him as a good friend. Not only did I learn his customs, I learned much about his life, as well. This tale is my last memory of this proud centaur. Entry Two Put book away.
At this point, it had already been close to ten winters that I had been traveling with Karath's tribe, the Baelazern. Karath was already beginning to show some silver in his mane by now, and the two sons the High mare had given him were growing to look just like him. This is when Karath asked of me what would be his last request. Entry Three Put book away.
Karath asked me to follow him to the great crater, site of the doomed alliance ceremony between the giants and the centaurs. We left at dawn and spent the next several days trekking across the Steppes. Being that it was during the mid-season, the heat was beginning to take a toll on me. When I could take it no more, I looked over and saw that he was worse for wear than even I. Entry Four Put book away.
The sweat glistening off his fur had an unhealthy sheen to it, but it did not compare to the look of consternation on his face. I asked him if he was alright, and he insisted that we continue, for we didn't have much further to go. Not an hour later, we arrived at our destination and spied that is was overrun by gnolls. Karath then told me that we needed to speak, for he was dying. Entry Five Put book away.
Karath told me that he had a sickness in his lungs that the tribal medicine man could not cure. Much had been done to heal him of this wasting illness, but to no avail. I yelled at him and demanded to know why he did not tell me. He said that no one knew - just him and the medicine man. I asked him why there was so much secrecy and he told me that when he dies, the Baelazern clan will die with him. Entry Six Put book away.
Karath then told me the secret to the centaurs surviving upon the Steppes where everyone else either emigrated or was extinguished. Many, many years ago, a man approached Karath's sire and offered a deal. He offered to keep the tribe safe from the gnolls and surrounding humans, all in exchange for one small favor. Entry Seven Put book away.
The man, who called himself Varsoon, only asked for Karath's sire's firstborn son in return for his assistance. Karath's sire refused and demanded the man leave at once. Karath was safe, and the tribe struggled to survive. When Karath was made chief, the man came again. And Karath made a choice he now regrets. Entry Eight Put book away.
Karath agree to the deal, and handed over his firstborn son. Though everyone thinks he died in a hunting accident, the truth is far worse. The prosperity of the Baelazern tribe was all due to his son's unwilling sacrifice. Karath believed the fate of one outweighed the fate of dozens. That was until Varsoon came to him again and demanded another son. Karath drove him away this time, but not without a terrible price. Entry Nine Put book away.
Varsoon issued a curse upon the tribe from afar. Karath now realizes what he has done. With his bloodline in the hands of Varsoon, the tribe would never be free of Varsoon. However, if Karath died without blessing his son, then the tribe would be free to join up with other herds. The Baelazern would be done, but it's people would live on. With that, he thanked me for being his friend, and proceeded to gallop down into the crater, full of ravenous gnolls. Entry Ten Put book away.
That was the last time I ever saw Karath. Since then, his clan broke apart and merged with other surrounding clans. The giants and the centaurs would eventually go to war again with each other, nearly decimating each other. Though he does not know I am there, I still spy his grandson, Zair, from time to time. In my heart, I hope that his grandson will have the strength to reunite the Baelazern once again. If not, I do not expect the two peoples, giants and centaurs, to last another century on Norrath. Close Book.
Books
"Leatherfoot Brigade Field Training Guide" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Leatherfoot Brigade Field Training Guide". It is a field guide for a military platoon the halflings had at one point assembled. Entry One Put book away.
So you want to be a Leatherfoot? Good! We want you to be one, too! We all know how hard it is to leave home and do our part to help the other races in the world. Just think of it this way - when you come back home a hero, your family will be so proud of you! So proud that they might bake you cakes and pies all the time to thank you for what you did. See, everyone wins! Entry Two Put book away.
Ranks: A number of different ranks exist within the Leatherfoot Brigade. New recruits will be referred to as Private. After a while, everyone will stop calling you Private and you'll be like all the rest of your fellow soldiers. Finally, your Sergeant will be the one giving you orders. Please be polite and don't give the Sarge any grief. Thank you. Entry Three Put book away.
Salutes: Sergeants and other officers are to be given the triple hand to the head salute. Soldiers and others of equal rank are to be given the double elbow salute. Dark Elves and other minions of darkness are to be given any salute you feel is the most appropriate. Entry Four Put book away.
Boots: Ever Leatherfoot will be given a pair of standard field boots. It will have all manner of pockets for holding interesting things in. If you plan on wearing the boots, please inform your sergeant at once, for you will be one of the first to do so. Entry Five Put book away.
Field Pack: In addition to the field boots, you will also be issued a field pack to carry your gear. Most of the room in your field pack will be reserved for your daily rations, therefore expect your pack to be twice your size. Entry Six Put book away.
Issuing of rations: Every day, a soldier will be issued their daily rations. These rations will include all the necessary foods for the following meals - breakfast, more breakfast, pre-brunch, brunch, lunch, post-lunch, afternoon snack, dinner, after-dinner, supper, and late night dessert. Entry Seven Put book away.
Cleaning of Weapons: When cleaning your issued shortbow, always remember to keep it pointed away from your face. If you think you're a little smarty and insist on horsing around, you may want to ask Deadeye Jebby what happens when a joke goes too far. Entry Eight Put book away.
Wargames: We Leatherfoots will regularly engage in field training, re-enacting famous battles between us and those dark elves. One side will be chosen to be us, and the other side will be the dark elves. When it's your turn to be a dark elf, do not go home and hide under your bed - this is not a tactic the enemy uses. Entry Nine Put book away.
Drilling Songs: While marching in formation, your sergeants may begin singing the "Leatherfoot Forever" song. As a proud Leatherfoot, you must sing along unless you have a sore throat. If so, make sure you have either your wife or your mother send you to training with a note that day. Entry Ten Put book away.
Leatherfoot Forever Words: Sarge - "I don't know but you've been told, but I like my jum-jum nice and cold!" You - "Drink up, Chow down!" Sarge - "I don't know, but it's been said, I'd much rather be home in bed." You - "Drink Up, Chow Down!" Close Book.
Books
"More Adventures of Jorbo and Mappy" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "More Adventures of Jorbo and Mappy ". It is the story of two halfling boys and how they happened upon some exciting adventures. Entry One Put book away.
Jorbo and Mappy, two friends who left for an exciting journey one day, happened across a very interesting person. Looking just like a halfling, the man had lizard scales covering his entire body, and two small little horns sprouting from the top of his head. He was chewing on a small wooden stick, and would puff smoke between words. Interested at their discovery, the friends asked him if the man knew where to find adventure. Entry Two Put book away.
Laughing and puffing smoke, the odd halfling introduced himself as the Drafling. He said he knew many different places where to find adventure, and offered to show the two boys where to find it. Taking him up on his invitation, both Jorbo and Mappy followed him to adventures they never would have found on their own. Entry Three Put book away.
The first interesting thing the Drafling showed the two boys was a goblin who could speak three languages. The two boys asked the goblin how he was able to do it, and the goblin pointed out that he had three tongues. When they asked where they could find more tongues, the goblin told them that tongues always hid away inside books. Entry Four Put book away.
The goblin then offered to trade tongues with the boys. They boys had become rather accustomed to their own tongues, so they declined. The goblin nodded his head and told them that if anyone ever asks them for their names, they should never give it away. He said that if you give a person your name, you won't have one anymore, and you won't know what to call yourself. They knew this was wise advice. Entry Five Put book away.
The Drafling patted the boys on the shoulders and said it was time to go. He had already finished eating the stick he was chewing on and was now chewing on another. The Drafling told them that he would now show them other exciting sights. They told the goblin "thank you", asked him his name, and the goblin said "I don't know anymore". Entry Six Put book away.
The Drafling would then take the boys to a grove of trees and told them to watch for what was about to happen. In front of them, there were really small people walking around. One group was a bunch of girls, and the other group was a bunch of boys. Every now and then one of the boys would run over and pull one the girls hair, then run back to his friends. Entry Seven Put book away.
The two friends began to laugh at the sight before them. The Drafling popped them on the back of the head and told them to keep watching. After several more girls were made to cry after having their hair pulled, the little boys started laughing so hard that they didn't notice a cat had crept up behind them. Entry Eight Put book away.
As the cat crept closer and closer, the little girls refused to say anything, for they had their hair pulled by those mean boys. Soon enough, the cat pounced on all of the little boys, causing them all to scream for their mothers. Right at the moment it's mouth was about to gobble up all the boys, the Drafling waved his had, and the cat disappeared. Entry Nine Put book away.
The two friends asked the Drafling what had just happened. The Drafling smacked his head and sighed, then told them that he showed them what happens when people are mean. He looked at them, chomped on the stick for a moment, and said not to pull the girls hair or maybe they might find a big cat standing behind them. The boys quickly nodded their heads, for they understood that. Entry Ten Put book away.
The Drafling then told the boys that they would need to find their own adventures, for it was time that he went home. He brought them back to where he found them and said goodbye. Before he left, however, he told them of a few places where they could find some interesting things, gave them a wink, and was gone. Jorbo and Mappy immediately started running for the place where the mysterious halfling had pointed out. Close Book.
Books
"Quotes of General Urduuk" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled, "Quotes of General Urduuk." It is a very old copy of thoughts purported to have been written by a mighty ogrish General. Entry One Put book away.
To take your revenge is to make yourself even with your enemy. To take their life makes you their better. Entry Two Put book away.
We will show no mercy, nor will we ask of it. Entry Three Put book away.
The weak and cowardly threaten others with death. The strong just do it. Entry Four Put book away.
One's anger must be fed, just as one feeds their stomach. If one starves either of the two, one will die. Entry Five Put book away.
Obedience is Freedom. Happiness is Destruction. Entry Six Put book away.
Choose to be strong of body and not strong of soul. Entry Seven Put book away.
Humility is an affront to Rallos. Bow to no one. Entry Eight Put book away.
Victory belongs to the most deserving. The Rallosian Empire shall be victorious. Entry Nine Put book away.
Anger is the truth of our birthright. Entry Ten Put book away.
A single death is a tragedy. A million deaths is a victory. Close Book.
Books
"Remembrances - Berrox" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This tome bears the title of "Remembrances - Berrox." When first looking at the text, it appears as if it is written in another language, but after careful examination it most assuredly is written in your native tongue. It appears to be a fantastical tale as told by a bard. Entry One Put book away.
The obelisk appeared in the center of the marketplace on Jallows Day. A great black structure, it spindled higher into the sky than any of the surrounding buildings. At first the citizens of our capital, Darrow's Hollow, had believed it to be some sort of elaborate magical prank. We couldn't have been more wrong. Entry Two Put book away.
At first King Adan summoned all of the wise men of magical learning. They came from far and near - from the desert lands or Naragin to the floating jungles of the Desolation. Not one of these great wizards could explain what it was or how it came to be. Entry Three Put book away.
Then King Adan summoned forth all of the bards and jongleurs to see if they had any tales of this forbidding structure. Listening to endless hours of tales of boldness and courage, the King came to the conclusion that they knew as much as the wizards. Entry Four Put book away.
Finally King Adan called upon all of priests of the Heavenly Pantheon to ask their frightening gods for some insight. After hearing gruesome threats of death and destruction, the King remembered why his ancestors drove the holy men into the wilds. It would seem as if no one could answer the mystery of the obelisk. Entry Five Put book away.
Messages would come from the marketplace of frightening creatures lurking near the stalls at night. Being described as creatures straight out of nightmares, the good King feared for his people and began sending adventurers to do combat with these horrors. This would continue until the day that Ultor Szanvon would appear before the court, proclaiming he knew the secrets of the obelisk. Entry Six Put book away.
Ultor explained to King Adan that the answer lay not with magic or gods or stories, but rather with his ancestors. He claimed to know how to speak with the dead and offered to show the King how to do the same. Both intrigued and at his wit's end, the King agreed to listen to this stranger. Entry Seven Put book away.
For then next month, the king would watch as Ultor would speak with the spirits and would reveal their secrets to the ruler. Ultor would rise to the position of Chancellor, both due to his wisdom and also coincidental deaths among the king's advisors. In the end, Ultor told the king that it was time for the regent to learn the answers of increasingly menacing obelisk. Entry Eight Put book away.
Chancellor Ultor advised King Adan that his forefathers, kings of times gone by, would know about the truth of the obelisk. Knowing the answers were close at hand, the King ordered his squires to bring him the oaken box from within his sleeping chambers. Inside held the key to the burial crypts of the noble line of the Adan Kings - King's Rest. Entry Nine Put book away.
Preparing for a long journey to the mausoleum of the ancient kings, the Chancellor advised that it should be only the King and himself who went. Claiming that the spirits of the fallen regents would be offended at being disturbed by anyone other than nobility, Ultor and King Adan were the only ones to enter the Crypts of King's Rest. Entry Ten Put book away.
And thus is the tale of how the people of Berrox would lose their king in these dark days. The obelisk still stands within the center of the twisted ruins of Darrow's Hollow, having never changed. Just as we lost our king in his search for answers to the obelisk, so too would we lose armies great and small in their own search. Countless parties of adventurers have ventured into that now opened doorway on the side of that blackened obelisk... but none have yet to return. Close Book.
Books
"Remembrances - DyzAz" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This tome bears the title of "Remembrances - DyzAz". When first looking at the text, it appears as if it is written in another language, but after careful examination it most assuredly is written in your native tongue. It's very hard to understand what is being said in this tome. It's possible it was written by a bard that was struck mad (or had one too many glasses of wine). Entry One Put book away.
Log A9-Green: Several more fluctuals were enhanced after the rise of the third sun. I can feel my dizals quiver in alarm. This is definitely out of place. Entry Two Put book away.
Log Ce8: The placement of the spindles are out of alignment. This cannot be the case, for I adjusted them earlier between the ninth sun's setting. I am rather disturbed. Entry Three Put book away.
Log 99L: GxvveR and Cvxlx are delayed in their daily transference. This is unheard of. I am debating whether or not I should float over to the structure myself. If I catch them careening circles from that spire, they will get no hearth-light before sleep. Entry Four Put book away.
Log AA3-Blue: My budded pair concerns me. I have observed them and they appear to be different. Their glow has faded, which is a sign of the Grizzer virus. But Grizzer virus only comes about during the Lain Cycle, which is three cycles from now. Entry Five Put book away.
Log Reeg4: The Holy Overlord has quarantined the western house-bowl. My budded pair has become even more sick and it spreads to the other Dyzalar. Their beautiful blue glow is now light-absent, and they no longer recognize me. I fear they are dying. Entry Six Put book away.
Log Ff63: I have prayed to all nine of the suns for a blessing, but nothing has changed. My budded pair have now lost their healthy spherical shape. If I get too close, I can feel my glow... weakening. It is as if they are drawing my life into them. They have not even named me as their bud-source for six turns now. Entry Seven Put book away.
Log 93: I would have never thought it to be possible, but I too have been forced to break the Tymoth Law. My budded pair deceived me into believing they had their round form again. As I was about to spread my glow around them, they changed into limbed horrors and attempted to consume me. I had no choice but to sever their lines. Entry Eight Put book away.
Log KRV: My simulacrum showed a patch of absent light growing on my upper hemisphere. I have rubbed electrical powder onto that spot, for I do not want the others to know that I have been afflicted. It should not matter, for I see many Dyzalar with light-absent patches these turns. I have even seen the Holy Overlord trying to bandage the limb that is growing from his upper hemisphere. Entry Nine Put book away.
Log BlueGreenBlue: The Holy Overlord has lifted the quarantine from all house-bowls. We are free to walk upon the ground as we please. It is no longer difficult to approach the others, for we will take the form of the Dyzalar. When they approach, we can offer them the gift of light-absence. Entry Ten Put book away.
Log 42hg: The true-limbed ones are pleased by our efficiency. The Dyzalar have been deceased. We are the transcended now. All life, all existence, all being. It is all ours to decease. They have told us where to find more existence to consume. We leave this husk behind. Close Book.
Books
"Remembrances - Norrath" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This tome bears the title of "Remembrances - Norrath". When first looking at the text, it appears as if it is written in another language, but after careful examination it most assuredly is written in your native tongue. It appears to be some type of journal kept by a farmer. Entry One Put book away.
Darkday 17th - Woke up this morning. Fed the chickens. Milked the cows. Chased off some goblins who were trying to get to the chickens. Saw something glowing off in the distance. Gathered some hay. Ate dinner and went to bed. Entry Two Put book away.
Burnday 18th - Woke up this morning. Fed the goats. Fed the chickens. Saw that glow again. Gonna check it out tomorrow if it's still there. Found a rusty sword in the ground like all the rest. Tossed it out my way. Ate dinner and went to bed. Entry Three Put book away.
Soulday 19th - Woke up this morning. Fed the chickens. Got my pitchfork and bundled up some food. Walked out to the woods in the direction of the glow. Stopped glowing halfway there. Getting dark early today. Don't know why. Gonna sleep here for now. Entry Four Put book away.
Windday 20th - Woke up this morning. Not really feeling hungry. Ate some of my food I bundled. Glow is still glowing, but it's kinda dark somehow. Gonna keep walking and see what this is. Don't want it to spook the cows, you know. Entry Five Put book away.
Windday 20th - Finally found the thing. It's a doggone tower. I don't know why I've never seen nothing like this before. Could have sworn I would have seen something like this out in these woods on my land. The blasted thing is all black, too. Entry Six Put book away.
Windday 20th - Been walking around this huge tower, but I couldn't see a way in at first. Walked around it one more time, and this dang thing had some kind door opened. I knew that door wasn't there before, cause I just walked by it. It's all dark inside, too. Gonna head home and get some supplies before walking in there. Entry Seven Put book away.
Steelday 21st - Woke up this morning. Fed the goats, cows, and chickens. Grabbed my pitchfork, a torch, and some food. Gonna go into the tower today and see what it's all about. Maybe there's some gold hidden away from that Combine Empire old Gartho keeps talking about. If so, I'm gonna buy me some new cows. Entry Eight Put book away.
Steelday 21st - Getting near the tower and seeing lots of things out of place. All kinds of shadows being cast by the trees, but it's not time for the shadows to be stretching. I think it just might be my eyes. Gonna go into town and see if a cleric can check me out. Entry Nine Put book away.
Steelday 21st - Dagnabbit. I knew I was seeing some strange things. Got to the front of that tower thing and I could've swore I saw some big ole bull walking in his two feet. Walked toward the direction of the tower. Now I know no bull is gonna go walking on his two feet, and I know there ain't no minotaurs for leagues around. Dagnabbit! I'm gonna get to the bottom of this. Entry Ten Put book away.
Steelday 21st - Must've been much further away than I thought it was going to be. It's nighttime now, but I don't remember walking that far. Don't matter, though, cause I'm going in that tower. Just lit my torch and I'm walking in that door. I'm gonna wish me luck, 'cause when I step inside there I'm gonna be rich! Close Book.
Books
"Remembrances - Nyalla-Phon" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This odd tome appears to be a chronicle of some sorts. You're not sure who, what, or where it's about, however. At first it appeared as if it was written in a different language, but the more you look at it, the more you realize it actually was transcribed in your native tongue this whole time. Unfortunately, most of the pages have been ripped out of the book. The two words on the cover of the book are "Remembrances - Nyalla-Phon." Entry One Put book away.
Aggregate Gathering, Hour 1: In attendance - Arisain, Biddledobbles, Dreggas, Grathok, Grij Menkols, Llylleaneans, The Mennoth, Night Tabards, Ondranicains, Ozradicains, Qiv, Tintintoran, Tygars, Wixlefathers, Vuls. In absentia - Crentooks, Thears, Zennic Horde. Entry Two Put book away.
Aggregate Gathering, Hour 2: Tiva (The Mennoth) to host Grand Bazaar for next decade - two consent, twelve dissent, one abstain. Earthen Flow (Wixlefathers) to host Grand Bazaar - two consent, twelve dissent, one abstain. Silver Citadel (Arisain) to host Grand Bazaar - twelve consent, two dissent, one abstain. Entry Three Put book away.
Aggregate Gathering, Hour 3: The Grathok insist on disrupting the peace again! Loudly clacking their claws will not speed this up, as the Chancellor keeps telling them. But will they listen? No! It's always about them, isn't it? Sheesh. Whose bright idea was it to let them join the Aggregate, anyways? Entry Four Put book away.
Aggregate Gathering, Hour 4: Farmlands will no longer encroach upon the shores of the Tintintoran's home - nine consent, two dissent, three abstain. Bronze can be used for weapons only during the bi-annual rise of the Zennic Horde - four consent, three dissent, eight abstain. The Arisain shall continue to guide the Aggregate for the next decade - fourteen consent, zero dissent, one abstain. Entry Five Put book away.
Aggregate Gathering, Hour 5: Here they go again! Clack-clack-clack! Stubborn to the core, I tell you! How can I keep the minutes of the gathering with all that racket! I am right about to stuff my trunk in my ears if they don't quiet down! Well, it's about time! The Arisain themselves have finally soothed those lobster-headed fools. Hopefully we can get back to business. Entry Six Put book away.
Aggregate Gathering, Hour 6: Decay magic to be outlawed - nine consent, five dissent, zero abstain. Death magic to be outlawed - twelve consent, two dissent, zero abstain. All magic to be outlawed - one consent, thirteen dissent, one abstain. Entry Seven Put book away.
Aggregate Gathering, Hour 7: This is something to tell my grandchildren about. Never do you see the Arisain vote on anything. They just hover there by gently flapping their feathered wings, making sure everyone's voice is heard during the Gathering. You know, I've heard those ethereal women hated Death and Decay magic, but I didn't realize how much! Wow... to see them actually cast a vote. Amazing! Entry Eight Put book away.
Aggregate Gathering, Hour 8: Lengthening the Lower Wall (Grij Menkols) - twelve consent, two dissent, one abstain. Excavating the Western Spires (Dreggas) - seven consent, seven dissent, one abstain (No Accord - 12th Casting). Full Aggregate investigation of the Shadowed Tower - one consent, thirteen dissent, one abstain. Entry Nine Put book away.
Aggregate Gathering, Hour 9: They're at it again!!! That incessant clacking! Just because their Shadowed Tower resolution didn't pass (again, mind you), they think they can annoy us into doing it? Look! Even the Vuls are upset, and that takes one heck of a lot of effort. Oh. Great. Now the Arisain are going to let them speak. Wonderful. Now we'll be here for hours listening to their tall tales about that tower. Entry Ten Put book away.
Aggregate Gathering, Hour 10: Meeting Adjourned. The next Gathering will commence in seven years time. I must add that I am... well, worried. After hearing the latest tale by the Grathok, they've agreed to investigate the tower themselves. This is unprecedented. What concerns me the most was the look of fear on their faces. I sure hope those ladies have some good news the next time the Aggregate gathers. Close Book.
Books
"Remembrances - Prime" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This tome bears the title of "Remembrances - Prime." When first looking at the text, it appears as if it is written in another language, but after careful examination it most assuredly is written in your native tongue. It seems to be some type of record transcribed by a bard. Entry One Put book away.
Reports have been coming in from as far away as the Great Forest and the Cherry Blossom Archipelagos of people contracting a mysterious illness. For the past several months, this virus was nothing more than a rumor, but it has been finally confirmed by various mayors that people have been falling down sick everywhere. Entry Two Put book away.
As odd as it is that someone could even get sick in our day and age, what makes this story even more unsettling are the physical deformations associated with this sickness. Though specifics on the situation are unconfirmed, it seems as if the ill are suffering from what can only be described as changes to the body, including rapid weight gain and odd growth spurts. Entry Three Put book away.
We got in touch with the world renowned Dr. Rodger Effin, founder of the White Palm Hospitalers and inventor of the Panacea Cure, and asked him what he had to say about the situation. "This sickness is unlike anything I've seen before," he said. "The protrusions from the skull are the most unsettling of all of this. It's as if the bone is growing at a rapid pace, affecting the growth of hair as well." Entry Four Put book away.
Dr. Effin did leave us with a positive note. "I want the public to know that I will not rest until I find a cure," Effin said. "No matter how far I have to travel, I will see to it that the people of Prime can sleep comfortably at night." Entry Five Put book away.
Dr. Bartholomew Oculus, chairman of the Association of Entropio-Atrophic Studies, disagrees with the findings, however. "I have told the people of Prime for many years that something like this would happen one day, but no one will listen. My findings show that the Panacea Cure will one day break down and corrupt the body." Entry Six Put book away.
Oculus went on to say, "This illness is nothing more than another one of the lies that Rodger has been telling the public for years. If the public would have listened to me and started taking MY serum, this illness wouldn't have spread as far as it has already". With that, Dr. Oculus stormed out the room, ending our interview. Entry Seven Put book away.
In other news, we have been able to get an exclusive interview with the leader of the Shadeways Harbingers. Calling himself only the Shadow Father, his group claims responsibility for the unauthorized construction of the black Obelisks throughout Prime. Entry Eight Put book away.
Before conducting our interview, we did our own research on this mysterious Shadow Father. Our sources show that the Shadeways Harbingers only came together as group six years ago in the Great Cold Lands, whereas the first Obelisk was spotted in the Death Desert nearly 14 years back. Entry Nine Put book away.
Since then, several more Obelisks have been constructed in some of the most hard to reach places such as the Cloudy Plateaus, Sarim Savannahs, and New Exetarin. All of the surrounding populations near these structures have coincidentally left. We have been unable to track down any of these emigrants for an interview, unfortunately. Entry Ten Put book away.
During our interview, all the Shadow Father had to say was the following, "We have closed our minds for too long. Secrets from long ago are being revealed. Come to us and we will show you. Those who wish to know the lost knowledge will be taught and become like us. Those who reject it will regret their decision. But not for too long..." Close Book.
Books
"Remembrances - Tel'riia'mil'an'ane'ie" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This odd tome appears to be a chronicle of some sorts. You're not sure who, what, or where it's about, however. At first it appeared as if it was written in a different language, but the more you look at it, the more you realize it actually was transcribed in your native tongue this whole time. Unfortunately, most of the pages have been ripped out of the book. Entry One Put book away.
Trirain 30:127 - "And the air will fill with the eyes of storms, and the crystal crops will begin to shatter. When the gathering of the hail-lines begin to fall, the time will be nigh." Entry Two Put book away.
Trirain 30:128 - "The beautiful will congregate beneath the one true Cynarian Crystal and sing the blessed hymn. They will be bathed in cleansing cinnamon and marked for freedom." Entry Three Put book away.
Trirain 30:129 - "Rewarded will be those who follow the Cynarian Crystal, and damned will be those who follow the Black Tower." Entry Four Put book away.
Septrain 9:72 - "And the Ice Taylenes will come collapsing down upon the heads of the deceivers, leaving no merchants or farmers or tam housers. The songs of the many will now become the songs of the few." Entry Five Put book away.
Septrain 9:73 - "The Man of Talzaron will then be the next to fall. No longer will the crystals hum in his presence, leaving the shadows to walk free among the people." Entry Six Put book away.
Septrain 9:74 - "The triple moon will darken and haze, causing all those who see with eyes to know of the impending doom. They will seek solace within the Black Tower, knowing this to be their false salvation." Entry Seven Put book away.
Septrain 9:75 - "And as the Last Night comes, the ruby oceans will vomit forth the Pillar of Shadow. The true believers who have been washed with the blessing of freedom will now be released of their tenure. All that will remain will be those who did not choose." Entry Eight Put book away.
Septrain 9:76 - "The division of light and dark will come to those who embraced the shadows. Those who did not choose during these dark times will be consumed by the light that is not, for so it shall be." Entry Nine Put book away.
Septrain 9:77 - "The men of shadows shall show their face and it will be a gaping maw of victory. The last horn shall sound from the Obelisk of Despair and all will know the cycle has ended. Darkness shall wash over the land and all will know nothing." Entry Ten Put book away.
Septrain 9:78 - "And the ground will move and the sky will quake. The darkness that is the world will pull into itself. All that is. All that was. All that will never be." Close Book.
Books
"Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension". It details how the orcs would organize into armies the likes of which had not been seen on Norrath for millennia. Entry One Put book away.
The following historical account details what stories would describe as the main turning point in the rise of the orcs. No longer primal savages, the orcs would organize into armies the like that hadn't been seen on Norrath for millennia. Several accounts of thus time period still exist in varying forms, which have been condensed together within this volume. Entry Two Put book away.
Snow Orcs: Launching a surprise attack on both Surefall Glade and Qeynos at the same time, the Snow Orcs would attempt to divide the two cities. Sending wave after wave of gnoll suicide squads against the two people, the orcs directed the attack against the humans. Employing frighteningly effective tactics, the destruction caused by the orcs would seem to be amplified by the man leading them - a being engulfed in fire. Entry Three Put book away.
As the invasion would wear on, the gnoll's numbers would be decimated - leaving behind only women and children in Blackburrow. The Avatar of Flame would ultimately send the signal that would spell the doom for Qeynos. Having suffered major losses to the gnolls, the human city would stand no chance against the orcish hordes marching straight for them. Were it not for a miracle that happened that day, Qeynos would not be standing. Entry Four Put book away.
As the Snow Orc horde began their charge, a great rumbling was felt in the earth. It intensified to the point of toppling many of the nearby towers. When the dust settled, the armies of Qeynos gazed upon a huge hole in the land where the hordes once stood. Slowly they realized that the very earth had swallowed the entire orc army. They watched in amazement as the ground began to reform, leaving no trace that there was ever a rift in the earth. Even with this turn of events, the war was far from over. Entry Five Put book away.
The Avatar of Flame, somehow avoiding the great sinkhole, still stood with only a few remaining orcish troops. The Qeynosians, having suffered severe losses from the invasion, would then see their second miracle that day. Approaching from the north, the combined forces of the Knights of Thunder and the Druids of Surefall were riding to join the ranks of Qeynos - being led by the Avatar of Storms. Unbeknownst to the human forces, however, was that the Avatar of Flame had reinforcements of his own. And they, too, had just arrived. Entry Six Put book away.
Deathfist Orcs: Though they had just traveled many leagues to join with their Rallosian brethren, the Deathfist orcs would find that the war in the south had changed since they were called. Already controlling the Innothule swamp, the Rallosian Army had now set their sights on new targets. Splitting the forces into two armies, one would sweep to the west being led by the Rallosian Warlord. The other, being led by Emperor Gash and the Avatar of War, would return to the north. Rather than being upset by the change in direction, the orcs were looking forward to what was to come. Entry Seven Put book away.
Traveling back through the desert wasteland the orcs had just devastated, the Rallosians would remark upon the efficiency of the orcs' work. Sometime during the march, Emperor Gash would send several platoons towards the hills, but not offering to explain why. When questioned, he would reply that the ogres needn't worry about having enough troops when they reached their destination. Entry Eight Put book away.
Though working together as allies, the orcs and the ogres would maintain wide berths during the march. This would prove a stroke of luck for the Rallosians, but not for the Deathfists. As they the armies passed into an open stretch of desert, the Rallosians would watch as tens of thousands of orcs would instantly be swallowed by the sand in one fell swoop. Though a devastating loss to the Deathfist Empire, Emperor Gash informed the Rallosians and the Avatar of War that all was not lost. For, he claimed, the orcs he brought with him were only one half of the Empire. The other half were already waiting at their destination. Entry Nine Put book away.
Finally reaching their destination, the remaining orcs and the Rallosians joined with the other half of the Deathfist Empire. Employing the tactics of the orcs and the unstoppable might of the Rallosians, the Avatar of War began preparing for battle against their target - the great city of Freeport. When the assault was set to begin, the Avatar of War gazed upon Freeport and watched as thousands of Militia gathered to defend the walls. The battle was about to begin. Entry Ten Put book away.
The orcs, once viewed as a petty annoyance, would rise from primitive savagery to tactical genius. Ancient tales that told of their former greatness were oft overlooked as being nothing more than fairy tales. Norrath would come to know that the stories were actually true, and were more attention paid to them, they would have known that the orcs had "returned" to Norrath. And their "return" would be forever burned into the memory by the part they played in the War of Defiance. Close Book.
Books
"Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime". It details the histories of several orcish tribes when they were nothing more than savage beasts. Entry One Put book away.
The following historical account details the early years of the orcish people. Not much is known about these savages, for most that has been written about them speak only of their predations rather than their personal histories. The following facts have been taken from many different sources ranging from fragments of parchment to tales told by elderly elves. Entry Two Put book away.
The Deathfist Orcs - Before the Rending, Antonica was much larger than it is today. Many orcs would roam this once great continent, banding together in tribes. One of these tribes called themselves the Deathfist orcs. Making their home near the city of Freeport, they were a deadly threat to travelers. Entry Three Put book away.
Preying upon merchant caravans traveling to the nearby fortress of Highhold, the Deathfist orcs would acquire goods of all types, ranging from foodstuffs to finely crafted weapons. Attracting the attention of nearby brigands, they would ultimately come to an unspoken agreement to not get in each other's ways, sometimes even joining forces with each other. Entry Four Put book away.
Working alongside their Dervish Cutthroat partners, the Deathfists would become enough of a threat to Freeport that the city started issuing bounties for proof of their deaths. This would continue for many years to come, but the city was never able to fully exterminate these ruthless savages. Entry Five Put book away.
Snow Orcs - One of several tribes of orcs living on the great continent of Antonica, the Snow Orcs had managed to thrive by choosing to migrate to a desolate, frozen wasteland. Living in the land that was once called Everfrost, the Snow Orcs had only one major enemy to contend within upon those frozen plains - the barbarians of Halas. Entry Six Put book away.
An uneasy peace would exist between their barbarian neighbors and themselves. Due to this truce, The Snow Orcs were able to devote more time to worshipping their god than their other tribal counterparts in other lands. One of the few tribes known to have shown signs of having more than just animal-level thought, the Snow Orcs would create small temples to perform primitive rituals and ceremonies to Rallos Zek. Entry Seven Put book away.
The barbarian clans would eventually unite, causing the shaky truce to come to and end. Destroying every temple they could find, the barbarians would wage war upon the Snow Orcs for the coming centuries. During this time, the Snow Orcs would revert to savagery, all but forgetting their shamanistic qualities. Entry Eight Put book away.
The Crushbone Orcs - Another tribe that would by migrating far away were the Crushbone Orcs. In a weird chapter of orcish history, the Crushbone tribe would build a great fleet of crude boats and rafts and sail off to the former continent of Faydwer. Never before had anyone seen a level of ingenuity evidenced by these primal savages. Many of the orcs would survive the crossing of the ocean, which is the most astounding part of this tale. Entry Nine Put book away.
Wasting no time in making new enemies upon this new continent, the Crushbone orcs would begin warring with the native dwarves and soon after, the elves. Being overwhelmed by the cooperation of the dwarves and elves, the orcs would be routed battle after battle. Were it not for finding an abandoned outpost in a secluded vale, the Crushbone tribe's history would have ended there. Entry Ten Put book away.
Using the fort as a base of operations, the Crushbone orcs would soon begin to turn the table on the elves and dwarves. Launching surprisingly organized raids upon the tree city of Kelethin, the Crushbone orcs would become a force of destruction rather than annoyance. Eventually seeking aid from adventuring types, the elves would find that the Crushbone orcs had organized into a haphazard army, but one that could not easily be put down even with the combined might of the elven and dwarven nations. In hindsight, this would be the first warning of what was to come. Close Book.
Books
"Rise of the Orcs - The Fall" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining". It details how the orcs would nearly succeed at toppling the two most powerful cities on Norrath. Entry One Put book away.
The following historical account details the orc's involvement during the short, yet devastating, War of Defiance. Simultaneously laying siege to the two largest cities on Norrath, the orcs would come close to achieving greatness, only to be crushed in the final moments. Several accounts of this time period still exist in varying forms, which have been condensed together within this volume. Entry Two Put book away.
Snow Orcs: Numbering only in the hundreds, the Snow Orcs would have their numbers reinforced by the Avatar of Flame's hidden army. Coming from the Plains of Karana, hundreds of goblins and giants would join their ranks to do battle with combined forces of the humans. The resulting clash between forces would echo halfway across the world. Entry Three Put book away.
For eight days, the battle would rage. Giants would smash the Qeynosian Guard, druids would kill orcs, but neither side was winning. Ultimately, the Qeynosians would make a valiant charge that would end the war. The Knights of Thunder would land a killing blow against the Orcish horde by severing the head from the Avatar of Flame's shoulders. Entry Four Put book away.
Losing the guidance from their divine leader, the giants, goblins, and orcs would finally fall to the Qeynosians. Not having enough troops to hunt down the stragglers, so the fallen army would scatter to the four winds. The few remaining Snow Orcs would be routed back through Blackburrow, and that is where history would last see these people. It is not known how many Snow Orcs survived the journey through their former slaves' den, but it is known that orc bones would be seen in the gnoll's rubbish pits for months to come. Entry Five Put book away.
Deathfist Orcs: The siege of Freeport would not bode well for the Militia. Not expecting the combined might of the orcs and the ogres, the Militia did all they could just to keep the walls standing. Soon enough, the humans would realize that the orcish and ogrish armies were doing nothing more than taunting them. When it was noticeable in the faces of every one of the guards that all hope was lost, something unexpected happened. A greenish mist began covering the land for as far as the eye could see. Filling the lungs of everyone, it seemed nothing more than an odd weather phenomenon. Nothing could be further from the truth. Entry Six Put book away.
The orcs would look in horror as they watched as all of the ogres began to cough up clouds of green colored mist from their lungs. These spasms would become more and more violent until the ogres would collapse dead from asphyxiation. Looking all around them, the Deathfist army would see every last one of their Rallosian brethren lying dead on the battlefield, with nary a scratch on them. To make matters worse for the orcs, the battle would be joined by two other armies, intent on finishing what the green mist had started. Entry Seven Put book away.
Though their numbers were unimaginable, the Deathfists were not able to withstand an army on three fronts - The Freeport Militia on one side, the Ashen Order on another, and the Knights of Truth on the last. The orcs would not go down without a fight, however. It would take the death of the Avatar of War before the Deathfist would be routed. With their numbers reduced to the mere hundreds, the Deathfist orcs fled past the Ashen Order monks towards the Desert of Ro, where they were never seen again. Entry Eight Put book away.
The orcs would neither be heard nor seen for the next several decades. Aside from isolated clans that remained out of the War of Defiance, Norrath believed the threat was forever gone. With the coming of the Rending and later the Shattering, the endless hordes of the orcs would begin to become nothing more than stories again. This would prove to be folly once again. Entry Nine Put book away.
The re-emergence of the orcs would first be seen in the Commonlands. A clan calling themselves the Bloodskulls would begin to become a new threat to Freeport. Using siege engines, Freeport has managed to keep these orcs at bay, but they must remain ever vigilant. Coupled with this clan that emerged overnight, those foolish enough to ply their trade on the sea lanes claim to have seen great armadas of ships roaming the water. Those that have survived these encounters claim that the people crewing these ships are not just people, but rather, orcs. Entry Ten Put book away.
Some unfounded reports claim that that the Deathfist Empire had managed to survive their defeat during the War of Defiance. These stories claim that the phantom armadas exist and it's nothing more than the naval branch of the Deathfist Empire. Even wilder stories claim there is a land filled with these orcs, and not only have they rebuilt their Empire, they're preparing for another attack on Norrath. Fortunately, these stories have no proof to validate these foolish claims. Close Book.
Books
"Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining". It details how the orcs would organize into armies the likes of which had not been seen on Norrath for millennia. Entry One Put book away.
The following historical account details what stories would describe as the main turning point in the rise of the orcs. No longer primal savages, the orcs would organize into armies the like that hadn't been seen on Norrath for millenia. Several accounts of thus time period still exist in varying forms, which have been condensed together within this volume. Entry Two Put book away.
The Deathfist: Having defeated the Freeport Militia on several occassions, the Deathfist orcs would cause the city's armies to rethink their strategies. During this time, the Emperor of the Deathfist orcs would be visited by a being of immense power. This visitor would cause the Deathfist to send out a call to all of the minor tribes that made up the entire empire. Entry Three Put book away.
The Snow Orcs: Efficiently using many ancient artifacts acquired from the Dragon Vox, the Snow Orcs would begin to push back against the barbarians. Eventually laying siege to Halas, they would signal the death-knell for the rugged barbarians. The Snow Orcs would immediately change direction, however, after meeting with a strange visitor. Leaving Halas behind, they began marching to the south with a determined pace. Entry Four Put book away.
The Crushbone: Not much is known about the Crushbone orcs during this time period. Having taken part in a great war that ravaged the continent of Faydwer, these orcs would fade into obscurity. All that is known is that a small group of Crushbones would sail across the ocean on great ships they built, intent on joining up with the Deathfist on the main continent. They claim their motivation for doing so would be due to a directive given to them by a mysterious visitor. Entry Five Put book away.
Snow Orcs: Marching through the frozen tundra of Everfrost Peaks, the Snow Orcs would gather every tribe along their way, eventually forming into a great army. They would continue this march, annihilating everything in their path. Rather than raiding and capturing small villages along their way, they would simply kill everyone and raze the buildings to the ground. This march would eventually end when they reached the homeland of the gnolls, Blackburrow. Entry Six Put book away.
Having evidenced the wanton slaughter they had caused on their way to the gnoll's home, one would expect the orcs to have done the same to the dog-men. Instead, however, the gnolls were waiting for them and invited the orcs inside their den. No battle took place that day, and the orcs passed into the winding caves without harm. Making camp at sites prepared for them, it become evident the orcs and the gnolls were working together. Entry Seven Put book away.
The residents of the nearby Qeynos received word of the plight of Halas and would send forces to help the barbarians. None of thier forces could reach the frozen tundra due to pact between the gnolls and the orcs, however. All that would be learned during this time was the orcs now residing within Blackburrow were no longer guests, but instead dominators. By now, the Snow Orcs of Blackburrow had enslaved every last gnoll and were using them to mine or for their war efforts. Entry Eight Put book away.
Deathfist Orcs: Not long after their visit by the mysterious stranger, Emperor Gash would begin to mobilize every member of his tribe into a great army. Spanning from the southern Rujarkian orcs to the western Kithicorian orcs of the Deathfist Empire, they all were given orders to arm themselves and collapse their nomadic camps. The stranger's message was then delivered to every orcish soldier - War. Entry Nine Put book away.
Amassing their mighty armies within the Desert of Ro, their ancestral homeland, the orcs began to march south. Just like the Snow Orcs, they would decimate anyone and everything within their path. From gypsies to desert madmen, there was nothing left alive in the Desert of Ro after they had crossed its endless dunes. They would continue their march until they finally reached the southernmost Innothule swamp. This was where their forces were joined to an even larger army. Entry Ten Put book away.
The Second Rallosian Empire, comprised of ogres who regained their long-lost intelligence, welcomed the orcs into their ranks. Joining together into one great army, the Deathfist orcs watched as their Emperor bowed one knee and swore fealty to the leader of this titanic army - The Avatar of War. When the Avatar stated that the Deathfist armies were larger than he had expected, Emperor Gash smiled enigmatically and told him, "If this is the case, then we have already won, your Divineness." Close Book.
Books
"Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing". It highlights the turning point when the orcs would start to become a force to be reckoned with. Entry One Put book away.
The following historical account details what some stories describe as the "return" of the orcs. Once primal savages, the orcs would become frightening masters of tactics and strategy not seen on Norrath for nearly a thousand years. The following facts have been taken from many different sources ranging from fragments of parchment to tales told by elderly elves. Entry Two Put book away.
The Deathfist Orcs: By the Age of Turmoil, the Deathfist orcs would become a formidable threat to the city of Freeport. Having grown in size, the Deathfist orcs would absorb all of the surrounding tribes, making them the largest tribe on Norrath. Their numbers would prompt the Overlord of Freeport to send his armies against these savages from time to time in an attempt to keep them from destroying all commerce. This would change one day, however. Entry Three Put book away.
When one of the Freeport Militia raiding parties failed to return one day, several search parties were sent after them. When none of them returned either, one third of the Militia was sent to find the cause of their disappearance. Of the twelve hundred soldiers that left to search for the patrols, only seventeen would return to describe what happened to the legion. Their tale would change the way people viewed the orcs the world over. Entry Four Put book away.
As the legion reached the last known site of the troops, they spotted several orcs fleeing into a narrow ravine. Following them into the ravine, they spotted the mangled bodies of their fallen comrades. At that same moment, a wave of boulders fell from the surrounding cliffs, closing off their escape. That was when the hundreds of enraged, trained elephants were let loose by the Deathfist orcs. At full speed, they began to stampede through the ravine... straight for the doomed Militia. Entry Five Put book away.
The Snow Orcs: During this time, the Snow Orc's numbers would be reduced drastically. Having been driven to the eastern half of Everfrost Peaks, the Snow Orcs were wedged between the lair of a mighty dragon on one side and the ever-expanding mammoth-tusk trade on the other. Were it not for a change in the way they used their weapons, the snow orcs would count this time period as their last on Norrath. Entry Six Put book away.
The shamans of the Snow Orc tribes would at times raise the bodies of the fallen, friend or foe alike. These icy boned skeletons would then be sent loose to wander the frozen wastelands, attacking anything it would find. The Snow Orcs hoped that the skeletons would one day find a barbarian or adventurer and kill them. By some unknown means, the Snow Orcs would change tactics and start using their undead minions with surprising efficiency. Entry Seven Put book away.
Cleverly hiding their actions from everyone, the orcs would begin to bury many lines of skeletons beneath the snow outside the entrance to the great dragon's lair. As great heroes would come running out of her lair holding some stolen artifact, a group of orc shamans would be waiting. At the precise moment, all of the shamans would raise the skeletons to life, trapping the raiding party inside a circle of hundreds of skeletons. It wouldn't take long for the undead to overwhelm the heroes. The Snow orcs would then take the artifacts from the dead adventurers, flay the flesh from their bones, and add them to their army of undead. Entry Eight Put book away.
The Crushbone Orcs : No one knows for sure where they acquired them, but by this time in history the Crushbone orcs would be seen carrying weapons of dark elf make. Rumors tell of a dark elf ambassador being seen in the highest tower of the orc's castle, so it can only be assumed the orcs had brokered a deal with their people. Considering the less than philanthropic nature of the dark elves, it is still a mystery as to what the orcs were providing in return. Entry Nine Put book away.
The Crushbone orcs would claim a stunning victory against the elves of Kelethin one fateful day. Amassing their highly trained armies, they launched an attack against both the dwarven city of Kaladim and the high elven city of Felwithe. The residents of the tree city of Kelethin split their forces to help defend their allies' cities and were able to stop the orcish legionnaires with only minimal causalities. Entry Ten Put book away.
Little did they know, the true target of the orcish assault was the city of Kelethin. Attacking with their real army, the Crushbone orcs would succeed at chopping down two of the ancient trees supporting the wood elf city. By the time the wood elves would return home and put a stop to the orcs, half of Kelethin would be destroyed. Close Book.
Books
"Ship's Log - Bountiful Mane" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Ship's Log - Bountiful Mane." It is a log kept by a ship's captain and details how he came to lose his ship. Entry One Put book away.
Captain's Log 27: The seas have been calm for the past several days. I'm glad I thought of bringing along extra water. I can't say I've seen the ocean this calm in the past several years I've been plying the seas. If the winds don't pick up soon, I won't be able to get this shipment to the Far Seas HQ in time. Blasted wind! Entry Two Put book away.
Captain's Log 34: Passed by a small island today. Looked like there were some people still living there. Must have been living there forever, because the seas haven't been this calm in hundreds of years. Or so the bards say. Entry Three Put book away.
Captain's Log 39: Got another shipment the Far Seas wants me to pass along. I don't know what it is these guys are up to, but they pay well enough that I'm not going to ask any questions. Got an odd warning from one of the Taskmasters, too. Said to watch the skies and sail away from anything flying in the air. Must've been dipping into their own rum. Entry Four Put book away.
Captain's Log 42: I don't know what the heck that thing was, but I sure as heck saw it on the horizon. If I knew that I hadn't taken a swig from Cookie's special brew since two days ago, I'd say I was seeing things. It was huge and sure wasn't no bird. Were I drunk, I'd almost say it looked like one of the dragons in those stories the bards tell. Entry Five Put book away.
Captain's Log 44: Spotted it again. I'm positive it was one of those dragons them bards talk about, but it was a lot smaller than they say those things are. I'm having the navigator turn the opposite direction to be sure it doesn't spot us. I'm beginning to get spooked. Entry Six Put book away.
Captain's Log 46: It was no use. The thing was like something straight out of my nightmares! No matter how much the bards exaggerated about how big they were, they got one thing right! It flew right over the ship and breathed fire right down onto the sails. We were able to put out the fire, but we don't have enough canvas to make any new sails. I fear we will be dead in the waters for as long as we have water. Then we'll just be dead. Entry Seven Put book away.
Captain's Log 48: I think I'm going to start believing in that Prexus god again, because it could only be called a miracle as to what happened. Another merchant ship came sailing by and responded to our signals of help. We're now on board the Beautiful Lady, captained by Draik Varlos. To make matters better, he's lookin' for some work! I've offered to show him where the Far Seas HQ is in exchange for bringing us there. Entry Eight Put book away.
(Former) Captain's Log 50: We should be there in a manner of days. Draik Varlos has told me about the beast that destroyed my ship. Says it was called a Drakota and that it wasn't a Dragon. Says they're a bit common from where he comes from and knows how to avoid the things. Gave me a few tips on what shipping lanes aren't safe, so I can always avoid the monstrosities. Entry Nine Put book away.
(Former) Captain's Log 58: Introduced Captain Varlos to the Duke. Both him and the Duke hit it off right from the start. Varlos and his crew are now going to sail exclusively for the Far Seas. Since I don't have a ship, I've offered my services to Draik, but he turned me down saying that he has more than enough people to look after. I guess I can understand. Entry Ten Put book away.
Captain's Log 290: Been assigned to a new ship, this one ferrying refugees from the Isle of to that grand city. On my first voyage out, I was giving passage to a refugee who says they were saved by Draik Varlos! That captain sure has a string of bad luck, I tell you! Should've listened to his own advice, like me, or else he wouldn't keep running into those Drakota all the time! Close Book.
Books
"Telanius Menonius Ledger - Warmstill" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Telanius Menonius Ledger - Warmstill." It is the logbook of a merchant, containing what he bought and sold. Entry One Put book away.
DAY: Feastday - 9 bales of hay, 6 slabs of salted pork, 2 stuffed goblin heads, 1 bronze shortsword, 4 tin cups - 9 silver, 40 copper ; SOLD - Finely-crafted tabard, 4 Travel Rations, 3 Bottles of Purified Water - 11 silver, 9 copper ; MISSING - nothing Entry Two Put book away.
DAY: Darkday- 16 spools of twine, 49 heads of cabbage, 1 odd book (sell it as something from before the Shattering), 4 brass shields - 2 gold, 3 silver, 78 copper ; SOLD - 1 Purity belt, 1 slab salted pork - 1 gold, 2 silver, 9 copper ; MISSING - nothing Entry Three Put book away.
DAY: Burnday - 1 Silver Helmet (dented), 120 bottles of purified water, 1 metal chest (odd black metal, locked, hire a rogue to open it) - 1 gold, 43 silver, 12 copper ; SOLD - 6 heads of cabbage, 4 quills, 1 leather wristguard - 3 gold, 5 silver, 15 copper ; MISSING - 2 goblin ears (blasted cats) Entry Four Put book away.
DAY: Soulday - 6 pairs of breeches (dyed green), 20 bat wings (sell to gnomes at double cost), 12 sanded boards of oak (keep away from druids), 12 full haunches of beef - 57 silver, 13 copper ; SOLD - 12 malachite chunks, 20 woodchips, 2 slabs salted pork - 1 gold, 45 silver, 12 copper ; MISSING - 6 bat wings (gonna kill those cats) Entry Five Put book away.
DAY: Windday - 2 expensive tapestries, Rogue services (couldn't open the chest, didn't pay her), 23 dried goblin ears (sell before they go bad), chainmail tunic - 3 gold, 78 silver, 92 copper ; SOLD - 1 Leather helm (halfling sized), 40 bottles of purified water, 1 silver ingot - 2 gold, 92 silver, 13 copper ; MISSING - 1 slab of salted pork (going to hire exterminator tomorrow) Entry Six Put book away.
DAY: Steelday - 1 crate of steel spikes, 2 wolf tongues, 1 tin dagger, Exterminator services, 4 unidentified potions (sell as healing potions) - 1 gold, 45 silver, 77 copper ; SOLD - 1 stuffed goblin head, 1 brass shield, 2 pairs of breeches, 9 travel rations - 1 gold, 44 silver, 12 copper ; MISSING - 1 haunch of beef (Exterminator better not have ripped me off) Entry Seven Put book away.
DAY: Spryday - Expert Rogue service (couldn't break the lock, refused to pay), 1 bronze polearm, 12 doubly-woven bags - 3 gold, 87 silver, 23 copper ; SOLD - 1 fine steel leggings - 14 gold, 12 silver, 23 copper; MISSING - 3 haunches of beef (gonna find that Exterminator and beat him to a pulp) Entry Eight Put book away.
DAY: Moorday - 1 chipped sapphire, 12 slabs of salted pork, 1 bag of tinkered parts - 4 gold, 23 silver, 33 copper ; SOLD - 1 brass shield, 20 bottles of purified water, 2 sheets of steel - 5 gold, 48 silver, 12 copper ; MISSING - All my blasted haunches of beef! (can't find that exterminator, either) Entry Nine Put book away.
DAY: Brewday- Master Rogue service (broke the lock, will open the chest after recording the daily takes), 60 bottles of purified water, 12 goblin ears - 4 gold, 88 silver, 21 copper ; SOLD - 1 chainmail tunic, 1 sanded board, 2 quills - 5 gold, 2 silver, 65 copper ; MISSING - Nothing from inventory, but all the cats in the area are missing. Must be why. Entry Ten Put book away.
DAY: Mirthday - Nothing ; SOLD - Merchant Stall (getting out of this place now!) - 0 gold, 0 silver, 1 copper ; MISSING - My life if I don't leave soon! That thing inside the chest was made from shadows! I swear to it! I'm GONE! Close Book.
Books
"Termble Clankerbang Findings Vol. 98" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Termble Clankerbang Findings Vol. 98." It is the journal of a gnome and how he came across an odd tower made from black stone. Entry One Put book away.
Entry One: This log will chronicle the recorded findings of an interesting structure I have found today. Having spent much time analyzing the rocks of this dark forest, I came across a construction that I am pretty sure wasn't there yesterday. I must admit I was engrossed with a marvelous formation of limestone in the surrounding area, so I must write it off to being preoccupied. Entry Two Put book away.
Entry Two: I have brought all of my equipment to the surrounding area so that I can run experiments in a far more efficient manner. From my visual inspection of this obelisk-like structure, I'd say I'll need to start with a strata-bifurcating dowel to acquire a sample. Yes, yes... a strata-bifurcating dowel indeed. Entry Three Put book away.
Entry Three: I have found that the stone that was used to create this building is unlike anything I've ever seen before in my years of geology. Having resisted all attempts at the strata-bifurcating dowel, I have been unable to acquire even the most meager of samples from the facade. I will now tinker up a means to add some type of added force to the dowel. I am certain this will do the job. Entry Four Put book away.
Entry Four: Having devised a small corkscrew to add an automated means of hammering at the obelisk, I was certain I would chip away a piece of rock in no time. Unfortunately, I still haven't even scratched this blackened stone. I now must resort to increasing the power on this pump to a drastic level. I will continue my log of recorded events when I have tinkered a new way of increasing the force of my dowel. Entry Five Put book away.
Entry Five: After much tinkering, including adding hastily devised gyroscopes, cylindrical valves, and an external power source comprised of a wheel being turned by the surrounding falls, I have done it! This rock sample is far heavier than it would initially appear. Being no bigger than a large pebble, it weighs about as much as a small elephant. I fear that I will now have to devise a cart to bring this back to my camp. Entry Six Put book away.
Entry Six: By boiling the water from the mouth of the waterfall and forcing it through several pipes, I have been able to make a cart that will both move on its own and also support the weight of this odd rock. Fortunately I only have to move the rock two-hundred cogs back to my camp. Any farther and I fear my contraption might not be able to hold out. Entry Seven Put book away.
Entry Seven: Blast it! I was so close, too! My automatical-cart-traveler was unable to make it the full way. I have spent the better part of today moving my makeshift laboratory to where the cart broke down, five cogs away. I am nearly done, so I should be able to analyze this curious rock. I believe I shall see what levels of conductivity this rock is capable of. Entry Eight Put book away.
Entry Eight: Important note - do not artificially supply forms of electricity to this rock, which I am now calling obeliscore. Using a jury-rigged Akanon's Ladder, I introduced some portable lightning to the rock. At first I believed it had suffused the lightning. I was shocked to see that it not only absorbed it, but apparently could not contain it for long. A moment later it released the charge in the direction of my valuable equipment. I must now see what can be salvaged. Entry Nine Put book away.
Entry Nine: I was unable to recover much of my equipment. Fortunately, I was able to get my portable Keg-er-ator back online, but to my misfortune, one of the hoses burst. I was unaware that it was blowing heat-absent air directly on the stone for quite a while. When I stopped it from doing so, the cold discharged in such an intensity that it froze everything within a hundred cogs. I write this with great difficulty, now missing several fingers, a few toes, and the tip of my nose due to that horrible release of arctic air. Entry Ten Put book away.
Entry Ten: Though I have already lost several digits, and even more importantly, my equipment to this pebble, I cannot leave it behind without recording the full effects of the stone's properties. Chopping down a number of trees, I am about to light a very large bonfire on top of the stone. I am quite curious to see how much heat will be discharged after it has had time to absorb several hours worth of fire. I'm looking forward to recording my findings in this journal once I have returned from the bonfire. Close Book.
Books
"The Age of Cataclysms" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Age of Cataclysms". It is a chronicle of history as told by the Sage of Ages. Entry One Put book away.
Forward: This volume is a copy of one the more recent tomes within our library. This was a chronicle of the several times the Sage of Ages spoke to us of his infinite knowledge. It is only now that we can understand what his visions can teach us. The Sage of Ages, or Sages as the case may be, has observed Norrath for time immemorial. This story is a glimpse into just one of the many viewpoints of unrecorded history. Entry Two Put book away.
As the Age of Cataclysms came, the Dragons would watch as their world would change drastically. Their jewel, their present from the great Mother, was being ripped apart before their very eyes. The gods had come and gone, and in their wake devastation followed. Entry Three Put book away.
Having followed the great wars of the lesser races for much of the last Age, they were not convinced that the heroes were stable enough to use as tools. This is because they did not understand that the lessers were as important as those that were not draconic. This is something the Dragons would come to know in time. Entry Four Put book away.
For the time being, they would continue observing from a far as the world broke apart. The turbulence of the seas was what began to alarm them at first. They could tell this was something greater than they were capable of. With the absence of the gods, they could not blame it on divine interference. But what it was, they could not say. Entry Five Put book away.
When the rumblings beneath the earth began, they asked all of their agents within Sub-Tunaria if there was a cause that was simply mundane. Not hearing an answer from their eyes and ears, they became alarmed. Ultimately, one of the Ring spoke first. One spoke the name of the Exiled Ones. Entry Six Put book away.
During the Age of Turmoil, the invading heroes would undo all that the Ring of old had seeked to contain. The blatant disregard toward the Laws on part of the King of Fire and the Queen of Ice is what was contained within the deepest tomb. When it was released, destruction unlike anything the Dragons had seen in any Age was wreaked across the land. Perhaps Nagafen and Vox had been freed from their prison after all these Ages. Entry Seven Put book away.
The Ring convened as it had done so in the past. One group wanted to move their prison to their homeland to watch over them. One group wanted to seal their prisons forever. And one individual suggested the using of the Drakota. After many ages, they gave in and allowed the Drakota to be used once again. Entry Eight Put book away.
The Truthspeaker, the Dragon who was in control of the Drakota, traveled to the prison of the King of Fire and saw that the worst come to pass. The destruction of the world was being caused by the joining of the two. At once, he took his faithful Drakota to the ice prison that entombed Vox. His worst fears were true, for within the Ice Queen's prison was the Fire King. Entry Nine Put book away.
The Truthspeaker waited for the Fire King to leave, knowing that he could not suffer the freezing temperatures of the prison for too long. As Nagafen left, the Truthspeaker unleashed the Drakota upon Vox. Where the Destroyer of past ages was seduced by the foolish lies of the fiends and failed, the Truthspeaker was successful. Vox was destroyed. Entry Ten Put book away.
Not letting the victory pass, the Truthspeaker assaulted the King of Fire before he could reach the safety of his lair - his former prison. The Truthspeaker would suffer only half a victory during this age, for the King of Fire had drawn from powers not his own to defeat the Drakota. The Age would end, but the Truthspeaker would vow that in the next Age, the bane of the Ring would cease once and for all. Close Book.
Books
"The Age of Destiny" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Age of Destiny." it is a chronicle of history as told by the Sage of Ages. Entry One Put book away.
Forward: This volume is a copy of the most recent tome in the library. It is unprecedented to for the Sage of Ages to speak of an Age before it has closed, yet this volume is exactly that. We cannot yet understand what the meaning of these words are. In time they will become clear. Entry Two Put book away.
The Sage of Ages, or Sages as the case may be, has observed Norrath for time immemorial. Entry Three Put book away.
This story is a glimpse into just one of the many viewpoints of unrecorded history. Entry Four Put book away.
The Age of Destiny is upon us. The Ages have come and gone like the passing of a river. The Dragons remain watching their world as they always have done. And now they see sights that alarm them. Many Ages ago, a Law was broken. This was the most sacred of Laws there ever was. And the repercussions of this broken Law are felt to this day. Entry Five Put book away.
It is known the Vox and Nagafen had been part of the Ring and they were severed. This has been told before. It is known that they are the Exiled Ones who created a force of destruction that could barely be contained. It is known that they live within their forever prisons to suffer for what they have done. It is known that they are now free. Entry Six Put book away.
One was freed from this mortal coil. The Queen of Ice. The Frozen Wyrm. The Lady Vox. She is known by many names, but now she is known only as one - Dead. The faithful Drakota of the Truthbringer felled her within her lair. And this is good. Entry Seven Put book away.
One was freed from his prison, able to walk this world with ease. The King of Fire. The Enflamed One. Nagafen. He is known by many names, but he is missing the most important - Dead. The faithful Drakota were stopped from completing their task by the use of deceptive magics. But this will not stop the Drakota entirely, for their numbers are many. Entry Eight Put book away.
But even now, in the Age of Destiny, the Exiled Ones still wish to cause havok and destruction. Entry Nine Put book away.
For when they broke the first Law, they had a blatant disregard for what they were doing. And now, it is seen that they have broken the Law again. The cost of the first Law being broken was the moon in the sky. Look to it and know the truth. The two of Fire and Ice brought this destruction and must be stopped. Entry Ten Put book away.
Many Ages ago, the Dragons knew that the Drakota were a very important tool. A tool that could be used to keep order within the world. What they disregarded were the heroes from the lesser races. Even when they looked and saw the possibility, they still did not pay attention. But one Dragon did. The Truthbringer. Close Book.
Books
"The Age of Monuments" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Age of Monuments." it is a chronicle of history as told by the Sage of Ages. Entry One Put book away.
Forward: This volume is a copy of one of our older tomes within our library. This was a chronicle of the several times the Sage of Ages spoke to us of his infinite knowledge. It is only now that we can understand what his visions can teach us. The Sage of Ages, or Sages as the case may be, has observed Norrath for time immemorial. This story is a glimpse into just one of the many viewpoints of unrecorded history. Entry Two Put book away.
The Ring of Scale has nestled deep within their kingdom lairs, ignoring the rest of the world during the Age of Monuments. They still agonized over losses within the Ring - not just on one occasion, but several more times as well. The rest of the world would continue to grow out of hand during their time of withdrawal. Entry Three Put book away.
The Elven-kind would build a great haven to house themselves within the shelter of the First Trees. Promoting art and harmony, the Elven-kind prospered beneath and atop the boughs of their solace. Calling their realm Takish'Hiz, they foresaw an eternity of harmony. Their lifespan was but a sliver compared to the Dragons, their dreams of eternal harmony were insignificant. Entry Four Put book away.
The Ogres would begin to build their empire as well. It was hard for the Dragons to understand the thoughts of these creatures, for they lived and died within a day. But yet, they still rose to power somehow, and built mighty citadels all over the world to mark their territory. The Dragons viewed these mayflies to be even more insignificant than their Elven neighbors. Entry Five Put book away.
And many more races would continue to sprout, blend, merge, and shed throughout the great gift of the Dragons. From the Kedge to the Dwarves, and the Halfling and Trolls, and the Dark Elves and the Gnomes, the races would mark the world to show they were there. And when these monuments of existence grew large enough, the Dragons feared they would find the Exiled Ones. Entry Six Put book away.
Convening the Ring into one, the Dragons chose to act outwardly upon the world once again. The lesser beings posed a great risk to the Ring, for if they came too close to the exiled Fire and Ice, the first law may be broken again. It had taken all the effort of the Ring to contain the damage done by the breaking of the first law. They would not do it again, therefore they made their presence known. Entry Seven Put book away.
Detaching one of their own, they sent him into the exiled lands to remove the threat of a law being broken once again. So that the hand of the Ring was not bloodied, the Destroyer brought with him the petulant children - the Drakota. The children had now learned that the wishes of the Ring were greater than theirs, so the children were now safe. Entry Eight Put book away.
The Destroyer journeyed to the exiled lands and began seeking the prisons of the King of Fire and the Queen of Ice. With the Drakota, he would destroy them once and for all. No longer would the laws be broken when the two were destroyed. And so he went unto them, to explain to them why they had to die. And to show them how they would. Entry Nine Put book away.
But this was his folly, for the Destroyer knew only how to bring upon the end of things. He was not familiar with creating, such as the lies that were told to him by the pair of regents. Seduced by the beguiling words of Vox and Nagafen, the Destroyer severed himself from the Ring. Entry Ten Put book away.
Striving to do what he could to unite the pair so that they could break the laws once again, he sent forth the Drakota to tear down the prisons of Fire and Ice. The Destroyer would nearly succeed at his perfidy were it not for an unnamed hero that would rise from the races and stop him. With his death, this would be the end of the Age of Monuments. Close Book.
Books
"The Age of Scale" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Age of Scale." it is a chronicle of history as told by the Sage of Ages. Entry One Put book away.
Forward: This volume is a copy of the oldest tome within our library. This was a chronicle of the first visit of the Sage of Ages, when our order was founded. As time has passed, we now know the full significance of his words during these visits. The Sage of Ages, or Sages as the case may be, has observed Norrath for time immemorial. This story is a glimpse into just one of the many viewpoints of unrecorded history. Entry Two Put book away.
There were no ages before the Ages of Scale. Norrath was, but it was not as it is known now. It was fresh and pristine. It was untouched by thoughts or life, turmoil or war. Time passed but nothing existed to note its passage. It is hard to explain how everything was but was not at the same moment. The clear separation would only become evident when the Marking was placed. Entry Three Put book away.
A manifestation of all that is physical would place the Marking. The Marking would be the divider of all things. It divided time from non-time. It divided being from non-being. The claw of Veeshan scraped across the world and this is when all things began. With the Marking, she who is Veeshan would place her children upon Norrath, beginning the Age of Scale. Entry Four Put book away.
The Dragons, as she would name her children, were not only given life but were granted an even greater gift - Norrath. This world would be theirs. She would mark the world a second time, creating smaller companions so that the Dragons did not grow restless or lonely. These small dragons, Drakota, would exist to remind the Dragons of the Mother's gift to the kings of the world. With that, the Mother would leave, vowing to return one day. Entry Five Put book away.
Dragons were gifted with a touch of the powers of creation that Veeshan had used to bring them into being. With this power, they created magic. Seeing that this was a good creation and the Mother would be pleased, they next created society. This was even greater than magic. Enthralled with the perfection of their second creation, they stopped creating anything more from there, never making the third. Entry Six Put book away.
The Drakota, trying to imitate their betters, began to create as well. They created fury and liked it. Then they created rampage, and this they liked too. But before they could create a third time, the Dragons looked at the small ones and chose to stop them. Using their two creations, Magic and Society, they created once again. They created the Ring. Entry Seven Put book away.
The Ring merged both magic and society together into one. All Dragons were of the Ring for they were one and the same. And as the Ring of Scale, they became even greater than they already were. And as the Ring they chastised the Drakota as a parent would an unruly child. And as good parents, they sent the Drakota to their "rooms" for a long, long time. Entry Eight Put book away.
The Dragons would then begin instituting laws, for the society could not remain stable if there were no laws. As the laws were laid down, there were two within the Ring that did not like these laws. For these two, the King of Fire and the Queen of Ice, they believed themselves to be better than the Ring. The Ring would eye these two, but not see what was in their minds. But the Dragons had all the time in the world. Entry Nine Put book away.
As the laws and the rules would begin to pile upon each other, the Ring would not notice that their world had been invaded by lesser, pathetic beings. By the time they would see the infestation, it was already too late. These new lives spread like wildfire, and it took much to contain them. In the end, the Ring chose the opposite route. Withdrawing from the world they owned, they beheld a great surprise. Entry Ten Put book away.
Believing themselves to be more than the Ring, thinking themselves to be above all laws, the King of Fire and the Queen of Ice disregarded the first and most important of all the laws. And with this law broken, the Ring would create one last law. The King and the Queen were severed from the Ring. And with this ended the Age of Scale. Close Book.
Books
"The Age of Turmoil" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Age of Turmoil". It is a chronicle of history as told by the Sage of Ages. Entry One Put book away.
Forward: This volume is a copy of one of our older tomes within our library. This was a chronicle of the several times the Sage of Ages spoke to us of his infinite knowledge. It is only now that we can understand what his visions can teach us. The Sage of Ages, or Sages as the case may be, has observed Norrath for time immemorial. This story is a glimpse into just one of the many viewpoints of unrecorded history. Entry Two Put book away.
As the Ages would come to pass, the Dragons by know had realized the threat of the lesser beings. Actively involving themselves in the matters of the small mortals, they began keeping eyes and ears open all around them. Learning from the harsh lessons of the Destroyer, a new strategy had come about through a heavy cost. Entry Three Put book away.
Great arguments among the Ring would rage for days, even weeks. One side wanted to change the Laws whereas another wanted to make even more. One ignored side wanted to reintroduce the Drakota to the world, giving them to the mortals as a punishment for their audacity. These arguments would reforge the Ring, making it stronger than ever. Entry Four Put book away.
The Ring would see more changes as time went on, but to a Dragon time is meaningless. The leaders of the mortals would come and go, just as their empires of the past did so many times already. Of these changes, however, one was the most pleasing. For the memory of the Destroyer still lingered within the minds and stories of the lesser races. And when they would finally breach the prisons of the Exiled Ones, the mortals were already prepared for what they would see. Entry Five Put book away.
Never once did the lies and promises of power sway the hearts of these adventurers. No matter how cruel and black their insides were, these heroes knew the lies spoken by the King of Fire and the Queen of Ice. The heroes would attempt to carry out the original instructions of the Destroyer from ages past, but would sadly fail time and time again. Entry Six Put book away.
Bemused by the incessant attempts to destroy Vox and Nagafen, the Ring kept watch over their attempts. As their eyes were turned, they did not see that the old enemy's land would become known again to the mortals. This would only be the beginning of further atrocities, for these heroes would soon find the first land. The land of the Dragons. Entry Seven Put book away.
Having had their own lands breached by these mortals, the Ring was forced to act upon before thinking. Many of the Ring would actively seek out the mortals who roamed the frozen wastes. From the dense jungles to the highest peaks, the mortals would soon learn that their trespasses were not to be tolerated. Entry Eight Put book away.
Gathering once again, the Ring considered what was to be done about the mortals. Some chose to close off the lands and use the Magic to prevent them from ever getting to their sanctum again. Others chose to launch a counter assault against the mortals as they had once done with the old enemy. And the other ignored one suggested the Drakota could be controlled again. Entry Nine Put book away.
In the end, the Ring chose to remove the intruders from their lands. Once they had been defeated, they would count their losses, for the Ring would need to be reforged once again. Then, they would decide what to do. What was certain however, was that they would no longer view these heroes as insignificant creatures. Entry Ten Put book away.
The Age ended with the Ring being reforged one last time. This time, they would be resolute and treat these heroes with as much respect as the Drakota. They needed to be leashed like the dogs they were. Just like the Drakota. Close Book.
Books
"The Book of Days Past" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A book on minor cataclysms. This book can be placed in your house and read.
And so it came to pass that the world was shattered a second time by forces unforeseen and unknown. The bearer of this book survived the great cataclysm that befell Norrath on this, the twelfth month, day seventeen, of the year two millennia past and four. Close Book.
Books
"The Contentment" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is a creation myth as told by the Valkyrie. Entry One Put book away.
When the world was still young, all things were clean. The elements worked in harmony and the Urges of Heaven were calm. This was the time known as the Contentment. All things were good and all things were at peace. This would soon change with the coming of the mortals. As life would begin, the Contentment would end. Entry Two Put book away.
As the Urges of Heaven would lay their seeds in the earth, they would blossom into beings great and small. Running out of room to grow, these children of the Urges would eventually struggle against each other for dominance. Seeing this, the Urge of Ice bore her children and hid them deep away within her own home, one of never-ending Ice. Entry Three Put book away.
The children of Ice would be named Valkyries, and old word in their Mother Urge's hidden tongue. Free from the predations of the other children, the Valkyries were free to create a society unhampered by warfare. As their numbers multiplied, they would eventually create a mighty kingdom that prospered in peace. Entry Four Put book away.
Building huge spires that floated in the sky, the Valkyries would exist in pure harmony. The Urge of Ice would smile upon them, for she had created the only children that amongst all the Urges that would see this bliss. Choosing one of these women as her emissary, she would leave them to their eternal rapture as the Urge attended to other matters. Entry Five Put book away.
Their ruler, Frikka, was the most beautiful of all the Valkyries. Her wings were as black as a calm dream and her crimson hair was as vibrant as her heart. Soaring among her sisters and daughters and mothers, all the Valkyries admired her for what she was - a symbol of complete perfection. Entry Six Put book away.
Frikka would take the Mother Urge's blessing and spread it out to her people. Promoting the arts, ballads and paintings and sculptures would be made to honor the concept of perfection and harmony. This would continue for many ages and the Valkyries would enjoy a life free of pain and hurt. Just as the Contentment would end, so would the perfect world of the Valkyries. Entry Seven Put book away.
As Frikka sat upon her throne, she would think of things that she could give to her people to make them even happier. As she would delve deeper into contemplation she began to think of things she had never thought of before. One of these things was the nature of Happiness itself. She knew what being happy was, but she did not understand what it was NOT. So she continued to think on this. Entry Eight Put book away.
Telling her people that she was contemplating a new gift that the Valkyries were to be given, Frikka shut herself away for a long time. Locked away in a room by herself, she thought not just about Happiness, but of Peace and Harmony. If she was to make these concepts even greater, she must understand where they came from. Entry Nine Put book away.
After a great deal of time had passed, she gained understanding of what it was to be happy. She understood the nature of peace. She knew how harmony came into being. And with this understanding, she now knew how to increase this among her people. Frikka stood upon her balcony and gazed down at her people as they gently floated through the sky. Unfurling her exquisite black wings, she flew out to join them. Entry Ten Put book away.
Frikka was the greatest Queen of the Valkyries, for not only did she create the greatest age of the Valkyries, she would also be the one to tear it apart. For in her contemplation on the nature of Happiness, Peace, and Harmony she found what the Mother Urge had hidden from her children - Despair, War, and Strife. Close Book.
Books
"The Dying" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Dying ". It appears to be a creation myth as told by a Valkyrie. Entry One Put book away.
When the world would enter its twilight years, the memories of youth would become bittersweet. The elements would clash against each other and the Urges would withdraw. This time was known as the Dying. Things were only good or bad, there was no inbetween. And the world would be introduced to people they had never seen before. Entry Two Put book away.
The Mother Urge had watched what had happened to her children during her absence. The "gifts" that the queen of the Valkyries, Frikka, had given to her beautiful children had destroyed them. In a scream of both anguish and anger, a wave of force washed over everyone of the Valkyries. Entry Three Put book away.
As the divine force spread into the bodies of the Valkyries, they felt gut-wrenching pain course through their bodies. All around them, they felt something they had never felt before - Disappointment. Then they felt another feeling - Horror. For one by one, the Valkyries began to watch as they changed. Entry Four Put book away.
Their hair was the first to change. The Valkyries watched as their color from their black hair began to drain, dripping down their backs. When the draining was done, it had no color. The worst was to come next. After their hair drained, they stood in shock as their wings would do the same. When the draining was complete, they would be as full of color as the ice they lived within. Entry Five Put book away.
Not understanding what was happening, they looked around at each other. Ceasing their warfare for a moment, they spied something from way up high. Above them, there was a small black speck that was becoming larger and larger. As it got closer, they realized it for what it was - their queen, Frikka. Entry Six Put book away.
Plummeting to the ground, Frikka still possessed the beautiful color of the Valkyries. But another color, red, covered her entire body. As they watched, she made no attempt to stop her descent. Finally, after what would seem an eternity, Frikka would hit the ground with an impact that left enormous crater many miles below. And for the first time ever, the Valkyries learned another concept - Death. Entry Seven Put book away.
The houses and temples that floated in the air were soon to follow their queen. One by one, the structures plummeted to the ground below, leaving only the Valkyries that hovered in the air. And soon, they too would be moved. The Mother Urge showed her face to her children, and in one fell swoop exiled them from her home forever. Entry Eight Put book away.
Foreigners in a new land, the Valkyries would quickly come to terms with their newfound mortality. Losing many of their numbers to the creatures that already existed upon this world, they would eventually build a new home. Having been exiled from their original home, the Valkyries would need to learn to survive in this brave new land. Entry Nine Put book away.
Encountering beasts with great horns was only the first of many obstacles the Valkyries would have to overcome. Creatures very much like themselves, yet with no wings, would harass them from time to time. Gathering together, they would divert their War from among themselves and direct it toward these enemies. Entry Ten Put book away.
To this day, these proud people remain within the icy reaches of the cold northlands. Keeping to themselves, not much is known about them. What is known, though, is that they claim to want three things - they want an end to war, and an end to strife, and an end to their eternal despair. Close Book.
Books
"The First Battle" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is a creation myth as told by the Minotaurs Entry One Put book away.
When it began, there was but Earth and Sky. Nothing else existed, for nothing had to. They were not friends, nor were they enemies. And this is the way it would be countless ages, for there was no such thing as time. But all things must come to an end, as did the wholeness of Earth and Sky. Entry Two Put book away.
Sky was loud and Earth was quiet. Sky was quick to anger and would scream when upset, which would happen much of the time. Earth was slow to anger, but when provoked would rumble louder and groan with its displeasure. Not understanding Sky, Earth took a piece of its partner and created companions that had some of its own qualities. And thus, the Kings were made. Entry Three Put book away.
Seeing the companions Earth had made, Sky took a piece of its partner and made a companion of its own. Placing a piece of itself into the piece of Earth, it floated in the space that was Sky. And since Sky only did this out of jealousy, Sky told its new companion that it should be seen by all of the Kings and Earth to let them know that Sky's companion was better. And this, the Sun was made. Entry Four Put book away.
Soon enough, both Earth and the Kings would see the greatness of the Sky Sun. Earth wanted the Sky Sun as a companion as well and asked the Kings to spread their great wings and fly upwards to snatch it from Sky. Sky, remaining ever jealous, told Sky Sun to go away whenever the Kings flew too close. Thus, Night and Day were made. Entry Five Put book away.
Sky, being insecure, was lonely whenever the Sky Sun would leave her alone. So Sky, in her jealousy, reached down again and took another piece from Earth and made two more companions. Having taken a large piece, Sky cut it in half and made two companions. Though not as bright as the Sky Sun, both of these new companions would entertain Sky when the Sky Sun was away. And thus, the Two Moons were made. Entry Six Put book away.
Earth watched as Sky created more companions and after much consideration, chose to make more companions than Sky ever could. He reached up and grabbed many pieces of Sky and made companion after companion after companion. Soon enough, there were more companions than could be counted. And thus, Life was created. Entry Seven Put book away.
Sky soon noticed that it only had three companions and Earth had many. Barely able to contain its anger Sky screamed like a bawling child. The screaming continued for so much time that when it finally calmed, Sky looked down and saw that it had scattered Life to many different corners of Earth. And thus, the Races were made. Entry Eight Put book away.
Feeling anger for what Sky had done to Life, Earth had erupted into anger. Lashing out personally at Sky, it hurled itself up towards its partner. Fiery violence flew high towards Sky, cutting her and scraping her. Every blow landed against Sky would create a small little hole to mark the damage, and all of the fists would fall back to Earth. And thus, the Stars and the Mountains were made. Entry Nine Put book away.
From every cut that punctured its body, Sky would bleed. And since there were hundreds of punches, there was much blood. Sky would bleed and bleed, not stopping for many ages. Covering Earth in its blood, it would take many ages before Sky would staunch the flow, though never healing the wounds. And thus, the Oceans were made. Entry Ten Put book away.
This would be known as the First Battle. It would mark the beginning of the endless battle between Earth and Sky. The fight would last for many eternities, for both sides were no longer partners but now enemies. This would continue until the Last Battle would come one day. Close Book.
Books
"The Growing" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is a creation myth as told by the Valkyrie Entry One Put book away.
As the world aged, the innocence of youth would begin to fade. As the elements would rebuff one another, so too would the Urges bristle in the presence of another. This was the time known as the Growing. Things were neither good nor were they bad, for the mortals would be the ones to make the ultimate choice. However, this was not the case everywhere. In another world, in a world of never-ending Ice, there would be a place where the Contentment never ended. Entry Two Put book away.
The Valkyries soared throughout their kingdom city known as the Cloister of Euphoria. Being led by their queen, Frikka, they would know only Happiness, Peace, and Harmony. After ages of contemplation, the queen would understand how this came to be. For you see, Frikka was the first Valkyrie to think of the opposite. Entry Three Put book away.
Knowing that Happiness came from the absence of Despair, that Peace came about from the end War, and Harmony was known only when Strife was overcome. Seeing that her people did not know this, they could never appreciate what it was that they had. And that was what she would give to the Valkyries - appreciation of the gifts given to them by the Mother Urge. Entry Four Put book away.
Gathering her people together, she gave a grand speech about what it was that she had found. She explained to them what they were missing in their lives, but her speech was only met with blank stares. As she continued, she saw that she would have to give a demonstration of what she meant. Entry Five Put book away.
In order for her people to understand Happiness she must show them Despair. Selecting from the crowd the greatest ballad singer within the Cloister of Euphoria, the queen banished her to a life in exile. For the first time ever, a cry of anguish was heard within the Cloister. Frikka explained that only when the singer would return to the Cloister, would Despair end and Happiness resume. Entry Six Put book away.
In order for her people to understand Peace, she would have to show them what War was. She divided the Cloister of Euphoria into two peoples and set them against each other. Initially not knowing what to do, they stood there. After some time, however, the Valkyries got the hang of it and aggressively attacked each other. Frikka explained that once everyone could learn to get along with each other, War would end and Peace would begin. Entry Seven Put book away.
In order for her people to understand Harmony, she would have to show them what Strife was. To demonstrate this she began to destroy all of the art, all of the songs, and all of the sculpture within the Cloister of Euphoria. As the Valkyries looked at their spartan surroundings, they felt strife deep in their hearts. Frikka explained that when the art, and with it comfort, would return is when Strife would end and Harmony would begin again. Entry Eight Put book away.
Frikka concluded her speech to the Valkyries by telling them that when all Happiness, Peace, and Harmony would return, the people would truly appreciate it all the more. Leaving her people with her greatest gift, she returned to her chambers to think upon what more she could give her people. Entry Nine Put book away.
As she sat in her chamber knowing that her people were no longer living in ignorance, Frikka felt as if she had granted her people a new life. She stood upon her balcony and watched as the maiden after maiden would fight against each other, struggling to survive, and many wallowing in the depths of anguish. And she knew this would be all for the better one day. Entry Ten Put book away.
As she contemplated what she saw in the now ruined city of the Cloister, she was approached by the Urge of Ice. The Mother Urge asked Frikka what had happened in her absence and Frikka explained everything she had done for the Valkyries. The Mother Urge exploded in a fury never before seen by the Valkyries and its wake washed over them all. Close Book.
Books
"The Last Battle" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Last Battle ". It appears to be a creation myth as told by a Minotaur. Entry One Put book away.
When it is to end, Sky and Earth would wage endless war against each other. As one side gained the advantage, the other side would steal it away from the other. This would continue until both agreed to one Final Battle. Sky made its champions to fight against Earth, and Earth made its champions to fight against Sky. Entry Two Put book away.
Earth thought long and hard and created its champion. Taking only from Earth and placing no Sky within its creation, Earth breathed its own essence into its warriors. Sky watched Earth, and being ever jealous, stole some of Earth to put in its champions. Earth was smarter, for there was not much room for Sky's essence in its creations. And thus, the Minotaurs and the Valkyries were created. Entry Three Put book away.
As the Final Battle would begin, the Minotaurs would win every battle. Soon enough Sky realized it was about to lose, the great act of treachery was performed. Sky hid away its champions to stall the battle. Earth seeing this, stole a piece of Sky when it wasn't looking and showed the Minotaurs how to use Sky against its champions when the battle would resume. And thus, Magic was made. Entry Four Put book away.
The Kings would watch as the Minotaurs were given everything and they, Earth's first companions, were given nothing. Having a piece of Sky within them, they felt jealousy just as she did. The Kings reached out and stole most of the Minotaur's Magic, upon which Earth banished the Kings into a circle of hidden places. And thus, the Evil Ring was made. Entry Five Put book away.
Thinking this was a sign of weakness on Earth's part, Sky brought forth the Valkyries once again. Continuing to cheat during the Final Battle, Sky summoned forth all of its strength and blew away all of the Earth's many, many companions. All that remained on Earth's body were the Minotaurs and the Valkyries. And thus, the Last Two were made. Entry Six Put book away.
As the two champions fought, so would Earth and Sky. Watching as both champions were about to end in a draw, Sky launched a daring assault upon Earth. Opening all of its old wounds, Sky began to bleed upon Earth hoping to drown the Minotaurs. Earth was ready for this trick and formed a shield. The blood of Sky and the shield of Earth would become merged as one. And thus, Ice was formed. Entry Seven Put book away.
Sky could no longer reach Earth and Earth could no longer reach Sky, for Ice separated the two. Knowing that Sky could no longer touch Earth in anger, its anger raged out of control. Getting more and more angry, Sky spun itself into great circling storms until finally it could not undo the great knot it had tied itself in. And thus, the Great Maelstrom was made. Entry Eight Put book away.
Earth could no longer reach Sky and Sky could no longer reach Earth, for Ice separated the two. Knowing that Earth was prevented from lashing out in its anger, it began to boil and stew in its frustration. Its anger would rumble and rumble, tearing itself apart. When the anger subsided, Earth had crumbled until it was only a tiny portion of what it used to be. And thus, the Final Land was made. Entry Nine Put book away.
Knowing the Last Battle could not be won by cheating, allowing only for the champions to decide the outcome, Sky became spiteful. Reaching over to one of its original companions, Sky squeezed it until it burst, raining pieces of a Moon down upon the Ice. And thus, the One Moon was made. Entry Ten Put book away.
And now the fight continues. The Valkyries are the champions of Sky and we Minotaurs are the champions of Earth. The Final Battle will be fought until there is only one victor. And since we Minotaurs have more essence of Earth than the Valkyries have of Sky, it is only a matter of time before Earth prevails and the Valkyries are destroyed. Close Book.
Books
"The Lyresmith Poetry Collection - Children's Rhymes" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Lyresmith Poetry Collection - Children's Rhymes". It is a collection of rather strange children's rhymes. Entry One Put book away.
The following poems are more like songs than actual poetry. Sung by children all over the world, it's hard not to smile when hearing a little one reciting the verses. Though their choice of lyrics may seem a bit strange, the happy kids sing them with all their heart. These are just a few that I've collected from the youngsters themselves over the years. Entry Two Put book away.
"Ring Around the Tower" Ring around the tower, Crackling full of power. Shadows, shadows, Norrath falls down. Entry Three Put book away.
"It's Raining, It's Pouring" It's raining, it's pouring The shadowed man is snoring. Lopped off your head, Now you're dead, You won't wake up next morning. Entry Four Put book away.
"In a Tower, In a Wood" In a tower, in a wood Shadowed man by a window stood Saw a halfling walking by Knocking at his door, he was about to die Entry Five Put book away.
Help me! Help me! the halfling said Wicked troll wants to eat me dead. Little halfling come inside. Take my hand and you I'll hide. Entry Six Put book away.
"Here Comes a Candle" Here comes a candle to light you to bed, And here comes a shadow to chop off your head Chip, chop Chip, chop Chip, chop Chip, ch... Entry Seven Put book away.
"Open, Shut Them" Open them, shut them, Open them, shut them, Give a little clap, clap, clap Entry Eight Put book away.
Creep them, meet them, Creep them, meet them, Put them in your lap, lap, lap Entry Nine Put book away.
Know them, need them, Know them, need them, Right up to your chin, chin, chin Entry Ten Put book away.
Bad old shadows Bad old shadows Open wide and let them in! Close Book.
Books
"The Merchant's Deal" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Merchant's Deal" It tells the tale of a merchant and what befell him in his quest for riches. Entry One Put book away.
In the days of long ago, deep beneath the surface and far away from the land, there was a great city that prospered through trade. Many a successful merchant would live like kings, drinking the finest wines and owning the smartest thralls. For every merchant king, there would be hundreds of merchants that would die copperless and broke. T'Nax the Merchant vowed he would not be one of these failures. Entry Two Put book away.
T'Nax first began to sell clay bowls to visitors from far off lands. When he made no money from this, he began to deal in fine steel. Adamantium would be desired shortly thereafter, rendering his steel worthless. Insisting that he would not fail, he chose the riskiest of ventures - the sale of jewels. Entry Three Put book away.
Investing the last of his money in precious red rubies, he would come to find that the fickle market would change. For it was not red that the people wanted, it was blue. Having no coin left to purchase even one blue diamond, T'Nax proclaimed his vehement hatred to all of his fellow merchants. Hearing this exclamation, a mysterious shopper approached him. Entry Four Put book away.
"Did I hear you say that you would do anything to make more money than all of these merchant kings combined?" the stranger asked. "To simplify it, yes, that is what I said" replied T'Nax. The shopper smiled in a very odd way and told T'Nax that he knew of a way that he could make it happen for the merchant. Entry Five Put book away.
T'Nax listened intently to what the shopper had to say. The mysterious stranger told the merchant that there was an untapped market that he knew of. The stranger would offer T'Nax not only the location of where this market was, but also the merchandise that the people would be interested in. All he asked for was one half of the profits. Entry Six Put book away.
T'Nax readily agreed to this deal, and both parties shook hands in a contract. The stranger told T'Nax to venture to the Feerrott and set up shop amongst the marshes. The surrounding ogres would soon become very interested in purchasing all manner of materials. Once the merchant established his merchant camp, the stranger would arrive with the supplies to be sold. Entry Seven Put book away.
Having traveled long and hard, T'Nax reached the Feerrott. Once he built his camp, the stranger arrived just as was promised. T'Nax was shocked to see an endless amount of odd materials filling his stores. The stranger reminded T'Nax that he was promised half of the profits and promised to return in one year's time. Entry Eight Put book away.
For the next year, T'Nax would watch as his sales would increase more and more each day. Finally, as the seasons would pass a full cycle, the stranger returned. Having seen how his endless supply of merchandise had gained him near a thousand platinum coins already, T'Nax asked for more time. He promised that by the time the stranger would return, he would have increased his profit ten times over. The stranger agreed, promising to return in two years. Entry Nine Put book away.
Two years passed, and now T'Nax had turned the one thousand into ten. T'Nax had asked the stranger for even more time, promising to turn the ten thousand into one hundred thousand. The stranger agreed once again, promising to return in five years. By the time the stranger returned one last time, T'Nax had the most ambitious request waiting for the stranger. Entry Ten Put book away.
"I will give you my eternal vow that I will not leave this place until I have one million platinum coins to split between us. All I ask is that you give me all the time I need," T'Nax proclaimed, having no plans on keeping his oath. Sealing the deal with a handshake, the stranger pulled back his hood and revealed his face. Innoruuk, the god of Hatred and Spite, laughed at T'Nax and said, "I accept your eternal vow, friend, but I regret to inform you that it might be some time until I return." With that, the stranger turned and walked away, never to be seen again. And T'Nax still waits. Close Book.
Books
"The Monsters" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Monsters - by Maria Scalius". It is a fictional account of a young couple and how they found shelter for the night in the Nektulos Forest. Entry One Put book away.
It was a dark and stormy night. A young couple, having been lost for days in the Nektulos forest, now sought shelter from the rain. As they aimlessly wandered, a bolt of lightning struck the earth in a nearby valley. As they glanced over at the flash, they saw their only hope for shelter - a castle. Entry Two Put book away.
As the young couple quickly approached the castle, they were relieved to see candlelights in the windows. They banged on the front door and were shortly greeted by the butler. The couple was invited inside at once and told they could stay there for the night, only as long as the master of the castle gave his permission. Entry Three Put book away.
The young couple was led to what appeared to be a workshop of sorts and told to wait there. All manner of strange instruments lined the shelves of the workshop, which were all arranged around what appeared to be two coffins. The young man walked up to one of the caskets, fully intent on peering inside. At that moment, a shadow stretched out from the doorway Entry Four Put book away.
The shadow belonged to an old man who introduced himself as Lord Everling, owner of the castle. He told them they were welcome to stay the night if they so desired. He apologized in advance, however, for any noise that might disturb their rest. He explained that tonight he would finally complete his greatest creations to date. Entry Five Put book away.
The young couple expressed interest in his creation. Everling invited them to watch its completion, but asked them to stay out of the way. He then called in his assistants who gathered around the coffins. All of the women were of varying ages, from little girl to young woman, yet they all shared the same face. Everling introduced them one by one, explaining they were his daughters. Entry Six Put book away.
For the next several hours, the couple watched as Everling, assisted by his daughters, adjusted the various instruments around the workshops. When he was done, the hush in the room was deafing. A moment later, a bolt of lightning coursed down a rod, straight into the caskets. Lord Everling stepped over to the coffins and removed the lids, smiling proudly. Entry Seven Put book away.
Inside the coffins were nothing more than dolls, just like a child would own. Everling asked the couple what they thought, and confused, they just nodded and congratulated him on his... creations. He told them he was overjoyed that they liked the dolls. He pointed out that the hour was late and that they should all retire for the night. Entry Eight Put book away.
The young couple were both led to their bedchambers by the littlest daughter. The child told them that they may want to consider finding somewhere else to sleep for the night, for her father wasn't feeling well. Having seen how proud the man was of his dolls, they knew what she meant. But they also knew the dangers of the forest as well. They would take their chances this one time. Entry Nine Put book away.
The storm broke with the dawn, and the young couple awoke. They had never felt better in their short lives. They thanked Lord Everling for everything he did for them and left. They trekked through the Nektulos forest, following a direct path straight to Freeport. They made it safely to the city, and have led ordinary lives there to this day. Well, ordinary save for one minor detail. Entry Ten Put book away.
The couple has a reputation for purchasing clothing that are many sizes too small and even sometimes forgetting their own names. In addition to that, they have been reported to have an odd look in their eyes whenever they are in the company of small children. When asked what they're thinking, they just smile and say "I remember when I was that small." THE END Close Book.
Books
"The Nine Contemplations" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Nine Contemplations". It presents several riddles that the druids and rangers of a place called the Surefall Glade would puzzle over. Entry One Put book away.
To know truth, one must understand the cycles of life and nature. In order to find harmony within the Surefall Glade, you must find harmony within yourself. Take these mantras and know them in your heart. When the words become second thought, then you will have found your balance within the world. Entry Two Put book away.
Growth "Stasis without thought, Timeless nothing is a wrong. Once this sprouts from naught, It will guide one all life long." Entry Three Put book away.
Decay "To live one's full life, One must start and one must end. As joy is to strife, It is growth's only true friend." Entry Four Put book away.
Health "When life is so quick, Vim and vigor should not hide. The mind pours the tonic, Body is where it resides." Entry Five Put book away.
Ocean "To ride on its back, One feels the strength of our moons. Sink into its black, One will gaze at life filled dunes." Entry Six Put book away.
Sky "It falls from above, And sinks deep into the lung. True home of the dove, And every song it has sung." Entry Seven Put book away.
Storm "In numbers they're loud, And forms tempests from breezes. Welcome it's wet shroud, For its gift replenishes." Entry Eight Put book away.
Sun "If one stares too long, It will be the last sight seen. From it trees grow strong, Changing yellow into green." Entry Nine Put book away.
Underfoot "Darkness rules supreme, In the globe below the peat. Just as in a dream, Its gateway is its conceit." Entry Ten Put book away.
Hope "When all things are none, When existence is bereft, There will be but one, The only thing that is left." Close Book.
Books
"The Orcs of Norrath" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Orcs of Norrath". It is a guide that is intended to help the reader identify orcs by analyzing various noticeable features about them. Entry One Put book away.
Having grown up in Freeport, I have known about orcs ever since I was a small child. Though my parents would commonly threaten to feed me to the orcs when I was acting in an unruly manner, I wouldn't actually see one until I was close to fifteen years old. Since then I have devoted much time to studying these beasts and have collected my findings within these pages. Entry Two Put book away.
One of the first things that a person will notice about the orc is their body shape. They stand slightly shorter than human-height, yet possess the hulking brutish qualities of an ogre. Having a slightly stooped posture, the orc's monster-like qualities rarely cause someone to mistake them for a traveling human or half-elf. Entry Three Put book away.
The arms of these horrible beasts are one of the most striking features. Rarely will you find an orc who does not possess a frightening amount of muscles bulging throughout their arms. Their musculature extends from their fingertips all the way up to their shoulders. The upper body strength of an orc should never be underestimated. Entry Four Put book away.
Easily recognized, an orc's face belies its monstrous nature. Mottled and pockmarked, their faces are pressed together causing them to look as if they have a perpetual scowl. The nose is not defined, rather appearing to be two small holes with flaps of skin around them. Entry Five Put book away.
One cannot look at the face of an orc and not notice the tusk-like fangs jutting from their mouth. These teeth cause the orcs to speak in an incoherent manner, making it difficult to understand whether they are crying for mercy, or crying out for reinforcements. Surprisingly, they do not use their teeth as weapons, which is fortunate indeed. Entry Six Put book away.
Coming in a variety of different colors, the orc's skin will range from a deep green to a burnt orange and even all the way to a deep black. Not much is known why there is such a broad range in the skin coloration, but it can be said that their aggressive nature isn't affected by the color of their skin. Entry Seven Put book away.
Orcs are not exclusively carnivores. They have been seen from time to time eating various plants if meat is not available. Though their food of choice is (usually) cooked meat, some groups of orcs have been reported to cultivating food from grains to livestock. Though they have the reputation of eating living people, I have come to the conclusion that this is just a story that must have started many years ago. Entry Eight Put book away.
At first it may look as if the weapons used by the orcs are crude and rusted. This may be the case in the Commonlands, but not in Zek. Utilizing the same standard swords and axes used the world over, the metal they use in its construction is what makes them so effective. Being very similar to iron, the metal has a red tint that gets more vibrant for a short time after the weapon has been used to kill something. Entry Nine Put book away.
The orcs has two modes of dress. Either they will be covered from head to toe in the strongest armor they can get their hands on, or they will be stripped down to nothing more than breeches. The latter is usually worn by those holding lesser positions, such as lumberjacks. There is no such thing as "casual" clothing amongst the orcs. Entry Ten Put book away.
Of all the information I've collected about the orcs over the years, there is one thing that I have always found disturbing. No matter where I have gone, from the Commonlands all the way to Zek, I have never once spied a female orc. This causes me to believe that of all the countless orcs I've seen... I've only seen one half of their numbers. Close Book.
Books
"The Pawn" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "the pawn". It seems to be the story of an adventurer and how he came to love living in the Runnyeye citadel. Entry One Put book away.
The wooden bridge creaked in such a way that caused Jaerinik to wonder if this would be the time it would finally collapse. Having skulked throughout the halls of the Runnyeye goblin's citadel for the past several days, crossing this bridge again meant nothing to him. But if he fell to his death, he wouldn't feel happy anymore, would he? Entry Two Put book away.
Thinking back though his hazy memories, he remembered that everything started just a few days ago. He and some people burst into the goblin's citadel intent on doing... something. Come to think of it, Jaerinik couldn't even remember who those people were. Were they his friends? No... they were bad people, now that he thought about it. Entry Three Put book away.
For some reason, they all were attacking the goblins and were losing. In the end, they were all captured and put into chains. Surrounded by hungry minotaurs, their goblin captors spent the next several hours torturing these bad people. That's when Jaerinik came up with a great idea on how to escape. Entry Four Put book away.
Even though the manacles were solidly clamped around his wrists, he knew that he could escape by just thinking happy thoughts. For a moment, he thought he was going mad from terror, but finally decided to give it a try. As he was flooded with delightful images of all the good things that could befall him, he felt his manacles suddenly open. Entry Five Put book away.
Even though he was no longer bound, he couldn't just walk out of that room with all the minotaurs and goblins standing in there. A moment later, he saw every one of the villains stop what they were doing and stare blankly at the floor. Deep inside, he knew he had to escape at once. But rather than heading for the entrance, he journeyed deeper into the fortress. Entry Six Put book away.
Jaerinik, having stared death straight in the face and survived, knew that he should be leaving as fast as possible. Instead, he felt that the Runnyeye citadel held the key to all his happiness. He knew that deep inside the labyrinthine walls were a collection of flags that were really important for some reason. He needed to find those first. Entry Seven Put book away.
After searching for hours, he finally found them in a small crate, nestled away with the rest of the debris that goblins took no mind to. Now that he had these flags in his hand, he knew that they needed to be placed all over the fortress. He wondered where he came up with a hare-brained idea like that, thought about it another moment, and decided it was a good plan after all. Entry Eight Put book away.
For the next several days, he would sneak about the goblin's den and place these flags all over rooms that were filled with goblins. On each flag was a symbol of their clan, but if he looked real close, there appeared to be a small eyeball floating inside the rune. Each time he saw the eye, he would look again and realize he didn't see it after all. Entry Nine Put book away.
When he had placed the final one, he wondered why he was not happy. A flood of happy thoughts instantly filled his head. Jaerinik was floating in pure euphoria, never having been so happy before in his life. That's when he thought of another way he could even be happier than he already was! He would share the happiness with the King of the Goblins. Entry Ten Put book away.
Having already passed the throne room several times, Jaerinik knew exactly how to get there and not get caught by all of the patrols. Bursting into the room, he ran up to the king and handed the goblin his sword. For the last three seconds of his life, he stared up and saw a shadowy form in the shape of an eye floating over the King's throne. No longer having lungs, however, he was not able to tell anyone of what he had gazed upon. Close Book.
Books
"The Pirate Queen and the Heart" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Pirate Queen and the Heart". It is the fourth book in the five part series starring the Pirate Queen as the hero. Entry One Put book away.
Having spent many years plying the sea trade lanes, the name of the Pirate Queen Alta was spoken with dread amongst the pirates of Norrath. Scourging the five seas in search of a long lost jungle, Alta would terrorize the ocean to fund her quest. Her search, however, would eventually come to an end. Entry Two Put book away.
Having undertaken a years long quest in search of the Rubicite Heart, the Pirate Queen Alta had finally found the long lost island she was in search of. Trekking through the dangerous jungle and seeing a sight straight out of her nightmares, she never once thought to herself she wouldn't make it to the place she was seeking - the Temple of Cazic-Thule. Entry Three Put book away.
Gazing upon the gargantuan structure, she felt a wave of fear wash over her. So many years she had searched for this place, and now it stood before her. Having read the journal of the forgotten adventurer who originally found the place, she knew that if she walked in the front door of holy sight, she would be killed instantly. Fortunately, she knew of the safe way in. Entry Four Put book away.
Venturing around the edges of the temple, she was on the lookout for a small waterfall that was built into the side of the structure. Making sure none of the lizardman guards spotted her, she walked up to the waterfall and stepped through it. Behind the falls was a small alcove that led nowhere. Looking for the third brick in the shape of an oval, she pushed at it four times. Slowly, a small door opened. Entry Five Put book away.
Behind this door was the entrance to a series of winding sewers. Littered all around these tunnels were the rotting corpses of apelike beings. Having read of these things and how they roamed the temple freely, she knew at once that something may not be right. She had not come this far to stop now, however. Thus, the Pirate Queen pressed on. Entry Six Put book away.
Navigating through the endless labyrinth with ease, she passed up several chances at climbing the ladders that led to temple complex above. Moving deeper and deeper into the sewers, she found herself at a dead end - just like the journal said. Reaching out, she found the holes in the stones. Reaching inside certain holes in a certain order, she was more relieved than shocked to see one whole wall disappear into nothing. Entry Seven Put book away.
Putting out her torch, Alta proceeded to walk through this new tunnel. Unlike the sewers, this one wound wind around in circles, leading ever upwards. What seemed like an eternity of walking eventually ended, again at a blank wall. Opening the journal, she searched for the passage describing this part of the temple. Finding it, she looked at the wall and said the word - "Sha-ahir-eeh". Entry Eight Put book away.
After speaking that word, the wall dissolved just as the one below had. Before her was a circular chamber with runes lining the walls. The runes glowed in various different colors, pulsing from one color to the next. But none of this mattered, for in the center of the room was what she had dreamed of for many years - the Rubicite Heart. Entry Nine Put book away.
Taking tentative steps, she moved only when the runes were green, for this is what the journal had recorded. Unfortunately, this was where the journal ended and she did not know if there were any traps after this. The last entry of the adventurer was of him figuring out the proper color, but nothing more. Taking a deep breath, Alta took one last step and was directly in front of the Rubicite Heart. Entry Ten Put book away.
Closing her eyes, she reached out to grab the gem. Grasping it, she thought to herself that even though it was the size of an ogre's head, it was surprisingly light. Feeling its cold surface, she gently lifted it and slowly opened her eyes to gaze upon the most precious gem in all of Norrath. Reflected in the hundreds of facets of the gem was the image of a tentacle-faced creature. Looking up, she found the final trap. Close Book.
Books
"The Pirate Queen and the Map" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Pirate Queen and the Map". It is the first book in the five part series starring the Pirate Queen as the hero. Entry One Put book away.
As the bow of the ship sliced through the waves, there was no mistaking the markings on the sails. Known throughout the Shattered Lands for being a terror on the high seas, this vessel was none other than the Painted Harpy. Though notorious from Karan to D'Lere, there was only one thing more feared than this ship, and that was her captain - The Pirate Queen Alta. Entry Two Put book away.
Never a more daring woman, Alta was as dangerous as she was beautiful. She crewed her ship with the most dastardly men to ever walk the deck and always paid them a fair share of the plunder. But the one treasure they wanted was always off limits. For if ever a pirate were to approach her with less than honest intentions (and that's saying much for a pirate), the Pirate Queen would show them what happened to those unfortunate men. Entry Three Put book away.
Hanging from the main sails of the ship were the withered corpses of all the pirates who tried to woo the Queen. Challenging the swarthy pirate to a duel, the Pirate Queen would see to it that her opponent was not only defeated, but was humiliated before they died. Then, to keep the warning fresh in the crew's minds, their bodies would rot from the beams of the ship. Entry Four Put book away.
For you see, no matter how much gold would be plundered from other vessels that dared to brave the turbulent ocean, there was only room for one thing within the heart of this nefarious pirate. For many years, she sailed the world in search of the one thing the she desired more than gold and silver - the Rubicite Heart. Entry Five Put book away.
The Rubicite Heart was a gem larger than anything Norrath had ever seen before. Having first heard the tale at a tavern on the docks of Freeport many years prior, she would dismiss it as being another story told over a pint of ale. Thinking nothing of it, she continued making a living boarding other ships and taking her share of ill-gotten gains. Entry Six Put book away.
Not until she would plunder and scuttle a merchant ship bound for a small island outpost known as the Far Seas Trade Isle would she again hear about the Rubicite Heart. Not finding anything of value on the ship she proceeded to keelhaul the ship's captain, careful not to kill him, until he eventually confessed to the true treasure stowed away on the vessel. Entry Seven Put book away.
The only thing him and his crew were bringing back to their headquarters was a book and a map. She ordered the crew of the ship to all walk the plank, then set fire to the schooner. Ordering her helmsman to keep sailing until they found another merchant vessel, she locked herself away within her cabin and began perusing the book. Entry Eight Put book away.
Reading the book, she learned that it was the journal of an adventurer that lived long ago. This nameless fortune-hunter would travel far and wide looking for all manner of treasures. Though he managed to find quite a number of priceless artifacts, the only one that managed to elude him was a gem worth all of relics combined - the Rubicite Heart. Entry Nine Put book away.
She continued to read about how he had found it in a forgotten temple deep within a dark jungle. Recording his journey, he described in detail how he overcame numerous traps and eluded the guards of this ruin. By the time she was done, Alta was convinced this gem was not only real, but it would be her ticket to retiring from her pirating ways. Entry Ten Put book away.
Just as she closed the cover of the book, a great swell overtook the ship, rocking it violently. Not only was she knocked down, but the book flew across her desk, knocking over the lamp she used for light. The spilled lamp catching the map on fire, she was unable to put it out before it was burned to a crisp. Sadly, her one opportunity to find this priceless treasure had gone up in smoke before her very eyes. Close Book.
Books
"The Pirate Queen and the Nightmare Creature" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Pirate Queen and the Nightmare Creature ". It is the fifth and last book in the five part series starring the Pirate Queen as the hero. Entry One Put book away.
The Pirate Queen Alta, notorious for her years of preying on merchant vessels, had put herself on a quest to find the Rubicite Heart, a gem as legendary as her captaining skills. Though it took many seasons before she would find the land that held this treasure, she finally was able to place her hands on this precious jewel. Entry Two Put book away.
Unfortunately for the pirate captain, she had found out personally why the journal she possessed had ended so abruptly. The adventurer, whose tales led her to finding the gem, never had a chance to write down what the final trap was. Having undergone great ordeals to find the Rubicite Heart, she feared she would have her greatest treasure snatched right out of her hands. For standing in front of her was a creature that existed only in her nightmares. Entry Three Put book away.
A beast that stood like a man, yet whose face was wrapped in tentacles, gazed through beady eyes at the Pirate Queen. It spoke to her, but rather than using words, it sounded as if it was coming straight from her mind. It asked her why she did not fear. Laughing, she told it that she had nothing TO fear. It then offered her a deal. Entry Four Put book away.
It told her that if she could answer its riddle, then she would be free to go. If not, she would become food for the guardians of the temple. She thought about it for a moment, and agreed... only under one condition. The condition was that she was able to ask a riddle first. Entry Five Put book away.
Never having been asked a riddle before in its existence, the nightmare-creature was intrigued. It agreed to the deal and asked the Pirate Queen what the question was. She thought for a moment and then asked him, "What do I have in my pocket?" A puzzled look appeared on the monsters face, or so Alta thought, being hard to read any emotions on this creature's face. A moment later, the monster told her he had the answer. Entry Six Put book away.
The monster told her that what she had in her pocket was a dagger. Before he could react, she had drawn the dagger and planted it right between the creature's eyes. In the moments before it died, its last memory would be of her saying, "Wrong. It was your death." Entry Seven Put book away.
The Pirate Queen, now holding the Rubicite Heart in her possession, proceeded to travel down the spiral tunnel. Venturing back through the sewers and out into the oppressive jungle, she knew her quest was nearly over. Traveling through the jungle, staying aware of anything that may wish to jump down on her, she made a bee-line straight for the beach. Entry Eight Put book away.
Having escaped the clutches of the near death so many times, the Pirate Queen eventually made it back to the shores of the dark jungle. Getting in her rowboat, she rowed back to her empty ship. As she stood on board the Painted Harpy, she had no worries of crewing the vessel. Ripping open her shirt and exposing the empty cavity in her chest, she took the Rubicite Heart and shoved it in. Entry Nine Put book away.
A moment later, she gazed at the lifeless bodies on the deck of ship and gave a little flick of her finger. All at once, every one of the lifeless pirates began to rise up, moving on their own volition. Manning their former stations, the zombies waited for a signal. With another flick of the Pirate Queen's finger, winds filled the sails of her ship, yet there were no gusts to be felt. Entry Ten Put book away.
To this day, stories tell of the ghost ship that roams the waters, manned by dead men and captained by the spectre of the Pirate Queen. Some have claimed there is an island filled with pirates, all owing allegiance to a ruthless captain known only as Alta. If these stories are true, then let us count ourselves lucky that she has found her heart's desire. Or perhaps she found her desired Heart. Close Book.
Books
"The Pirate Queen and the Seafury Buccaneers" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Pirate Queen and the Seafury Buccaneers". It is the second book in the five part series starring the Pirate Queen as the hero. Entry One Put book away.
The Pirate Queen Alta had sailed the five seas for nearly her whole life. Preying upon the few ships that dared to sail the violent oceans, her crew was comprised of the vilest of lowlifes and wretched scum. As long as there were ships filled to brim with gold and gems, she would be able to buy their loyalty long enough for her to complete her search. Entry Two Put book away.
No matter how many ships that were plundered, vessels that were raided, or schooners that were scuttled, it was never enough for her. Her heart was as cold as ice and there was but only one thing in the entire world that could warm it. No longer sailing the five seas for adventure and excitement, she visited port after port in search of one thing - the Rubicite Heart. Entry Three Put book away.
A gem as large as the head of an ogre, the Rubicite Heart was the only thing that the Pirate Queen desired. She had in her possession a book that told of HOW to find the fabled gem, but did not know WHERE to find it. That information was found on an old map no longer in her possession. The only thing she had to go on was a brief passage in the book mentioning a dark jungle island. Entry Four Put book away.
Since the oceans were littered with small islands and rock outcroppings, the Pirate Queen had hope that this jungle still might exist. Many seasons would pass as she and her motley crew would sail from island to island, always in search of foreboding trees. Throughout this time, no merchant vessel was safe from her predations. For these ships was her source of paying the endless stream of new deckhands. Entry Five Put book away.
As the legend of the Pirate Queen spread all throughout the world, she would begin to find that she would change from being the hunter and turn into the hunted. Pirates from all corners of the map would come looking for her, knowing that her holds were filled with unimaginable bounties. This, however, would not slow her down. If anything, it drove her to keep three sheets to the wind at all times. Entry Six Put book away.
Soon enough her luck would run out. One day the Painted Harpy rounded on a merchant vessel, just as it had done to countless others in the past. As her pirates boarded the deck of the newly captured ship, she saw that the sailors onboard were all former crewmembers she had once hired. Trusting her instincts, she ordered all of her man back onto the Harpy at once. But it was too late, for the trap had already been sprung. Entry Seven Put book away.
At once all of the sailors aboard the merchant vessel dropped their disguises and revealed themselves to be Seafury Buccaneers. By the time all the Painted Harpy's pirates had returned to her deck, the Buccaneers had thrown grappling hooks over the railings, tying the ships together. A great battle on the deck would then ensure! Entry Eight Put book away.
As the clash of steel on steel rang all over the two decks, many pirates and buccaneers would fall. The Pirate Captain herself slew over twenty men, ultimately engaging in battle with the Buccaneer captain himself. Using all the dirty tricks she could muster, she eventually defeated her formidable adversary. Entry Nine Put book away.
By the time the battle over, the decks of the two ships were littered with the dead. As the survivors lay dying, she realized she was the only one to have walked away from the trap with only a few scratches. Cutting away the ropes that bound the ships together, she pulled away from merchant vessel and began to sail away. Entry Ten Put book away.
During the time of the battle, both ships had veered off course enough to the point that the Pirate Queen no longer knew where she was. Her navigator lying dead on the deck was no help to her, either. As she began to despair, not knowing if she'd ever gain her bearings, she spied on the horizon an island she had never seen before - the humid jungles of the long lost Feerrott. Close Book.
Books
"The Pirate Queen and the Temple" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Pirate Queen and the Temple". It is the third book in the five part series starring the Pirate Queen as the hero. Entry One Put book away.
Having spent many years plying the sea trade lanes, the name of the Pirate Queen Alta was spoken with dread amongst the pirates of Norrath. Scourging the five seas in search of a long lost jungle, Alta would terrorize the ocean to fund her quest. Her search, however, would eventually come to an end. Entry Two Put book away.
After surviving an intense battle between her crew and a band of buccaneers, Alta found herself adrift off the shore of the island she so desperately sought. Racing to her cabin, she grabbed the journal that detailed how to find the treasure that was hidden in this forlorn land - the Rubicite Heart. Entry Three Put book away.
Dropping anchor as close to shore as she would safely allow, she gathered some supplies together and lowered a rowboat. Getting inside, she patted her ship, the Painted Harpy, and began rowing to shore. When she reached the sand, she began to look for a passage into the jungle. Finding only a cave entrance leading in the direction of the trees, she began traveling. Entry Four Put book away.
The cave turned out to be a tunnel leading straight into the jungle. Having memorized the journal from all the many times she had read it over the years, she knew she was in the right place. Seeing the ruined outposts, she began looking for a path leading through the jungle, hoping it was still there after all these years. Entry Five Put book away.
It didn't take long before she found the path. Keeping an eye out for any unfriendly natives, she carefully followed the trail through the jungle. Spotting some walking lizards off in the distance, she climbed one of the tallest palm trees to get a better look at her surrounding environs. Entry Six Put book away.
From her vantage point, she could see that the jungle was teeming with life. Knowing all about the various beasties she could find among the fronds, she had an advantage they did not. Waiting for the patrol of the lizardmen to pass her, she climbed down and began walking to the north, for she knew that was where her true destination lay. Entry Seven Put book away.
Traveling through the jungle for the next several hours, the Pirate Queen would avoid all manner of threatening creatures. Ranging from undead haunts that refused to die to man-headed lions with scorpion tails, Alta relied on her wits to see her safely to her target. She knew she was not too far away from the Rubicite Heart. Entry Eight Put book away.
Finally, after what seemed like days trekking through the jungle, she saw something rise from the treetops. At first she thought is was another tree until she looked closer. As she approached, she realized she was looking at a lizardman that towered high into the sky. Higher than any of the treetops, it turned its head and gazed right at her. Entry Nine Put book away.
Never having seen anything like this before, she was shaking in her boots. The gargantuan lizardman regarded her for another moment, the turned it's head back in the direction it was originally looking and lumbered though the trees. Barely escaping death, Alta didn't think there was anything that was more frightening than what she had just experienced. That was until she found the temple. Entry Ten Put book away.
Continuing on her way, the Pirate Queen eventually arrived at her destination. Standing higher than the surrounding cliff sides, she gazed upon the home of her quest, the Rubicite Heart. Before her was a grand temple carved from many hundreds of huge stone blocks. According to the journal, the Rubicite Heart would be found at the center of this, the Temple of Cazic-Thule. Close Book.
Books
"The Shadows of Lonesome Hollow" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Shadows of Lonesome Hollow." It is the story of a village filled with strange people and the visitor that witnessed their horrific ceremony. Entry One Put book away.
The following tale was told to me by my father, which he had heard from his father's father. I won't be alive too much longer, and I have no son to tell this story to. Therefore I will record it in this book. Perhaps someone will find it and pass the story along, keeping the warning alive. Entry Two Put book away.
Many years ago, there was a community of people that lived not far from here. Having chosen to live away from the big city, they were a very private people. They did not even have an available tavern for the wandering visitor. One such visitor was my great-grandfather, Daramain. Having suffered grievous wounds by an attack from a hungry pack of wolves, he sought shelter in their village. Entry Three Put book away.
Though he bled profusely, it would seem that no one in the village would acknowledge his cries for help. He would watch as the villagers would peek at him from behind closed curtains, but no one would come to his assistance. Just when he thought he would die from his wounds, a young woman came out of her house and began tending his wounds. Entry Four Put book away.
Taking him inside, she argued with her parents that they couldn't just let him die out upon their doorstep. After finally agreeing, they took him up to their attic and allowed the young woman to assist him in his convalescence. No clerics lived within the village, so Daramain would only be able to rely upon natural healing to heal his wounds. Entry Five Put book away.
For the next several weeks, Daramain would slowly regain his strength though the help of this young woman. She introduced herself as Marilitha, and said that he would need to leave the village by the full moon, which was only a few days away. The urgency in her eyes filled Daramain with a sense of unease. Entry Six Put book away.
That night, as he lay sleeping in the attic, he heard some sounds coming from the town courtyard below. Dragging himself to the window from his bed, he watched the townsfolk in the village's courtyard. They appeared to be erecting some type of wooden structure similar to a gallows pole. Behind the gallows pole was a sheet of odd looking marble that stood about a man's height. Daramain was unsure of the purpose of the stone. Entry Seven Put book away.
Each day, Marilitha would check on his health and urge him to try to build his strength at a quicker pace. She alerted him on the night before full moon that it was imperative he leave. By now Daramain was getting rather worried when speaking with her. He could see fear in her eyes as she would speak with him, and felt there were words that she stopped short of speaking. Entry Eight Put book away.
On the day of the full moon, Marilitha did not come to see to his wounds. Daramain, having taken her warning, gathered his belongings together and braced himself for a long journey across the endless plains. As he approached his door, he found it to be locked. He began to panic with the girl's warnings ringing in his ears. In his weakened state, he was not strong enough to bash the door down. Using everything he could find, he began attacking the door with all the strength he could summon. Eventually, he was able to break open the door, but by now night had already fallen. Entry Nine Put book away.
Limping out of the house, Daramain spotted the entire village congregating around the gallows beneath the full moon. Hanging from a rope was Marilitha, neck broken and dangling to the side. Her shadow, cast upon the marble sheet from the bright moon, was being traced by one of the villagers. When they lowered the body, however, her shadow remained. And started moving on its own. Entry Ten Put book away.
Marilitha's corpse then stood up, dusted off, shook hands with her shadows and then joined the crowd. That's when Daramain noticed that not a single villager cast a shadow in the bright moonlight. By the time the villagers had entered his room, he was already miles away. Several months later he returned with a large posse intent on destroying this village of undead creatures. But sadly, there was no trace the village ever existed. But it did. And this is my warning to you, reader. This was true. This was real. And those shadowy people are still out there. Close Book.
Books
"The Three Keys - The First Key" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Three Keys - the First". It is the story of a small girl by the name of Aiven and what when she is given three separate keys. Entry One Put book away.
As Aiven woke up that morning, she felt the day would bring her all manner of exciting surprises. But this was a common feeling, her being a girl of only ten years. She had already learned that discoveries could be found anywhere if you just went looking. What she didn't know was that that today, those discoveries would come looking for her. Entry Two Put book away.
After she helped her mother around the farm for most of the morning, Aiven asked if she could go play. She listened patiently to all the warnings her mother recited to her, for she had heard them all before. With a final "I will, Mom", she sprinted off to explore, with not a second thought to what her mother said. After all, how dangerous could a troll actually be? Entry Three Put book away.
As Aiven engrossed herself in a rousing game of "What's Under This Rock?", she lost all track of time. Even though her mother had told her to be home well before sunset on penalty of the switch, she paid little attention to the lengthening shadows. Not until one stole over her rather quickly did she finally look up, only to see what - or who - was casting the shadow. Entry Four Put book away.
Standing in front of her was an old woman wearing odd robes. She asked Aiven, "What is it, little girl, that you are looking for?" Aiven instantly remembered all the warnings her mother gave her, especially the ones about little girls being sold to the dark elves. "Interesting things," she replied, at which time the old woman smiled. Entry Five Put book away.
"If you are seeking things of interest, then these will help you open the way to finding them," the old woman said, and handed Aiven a small pouch. Inside were three keys, one copper, one silver, and one gold. "But what doors do they unlock?" she asked. "Many exciting discoveries," the old woman said warmly. Aiven looked up to ask what the old woman meant, but she saw that she had vanished without a trace. Entry Six Put book away.
Aiven decided it was now a good time to go home. As she turned around, she was surprised to see a door standing right behind her. Not pausing to question how that was even possible, she quickly tried the keys, knowing this was no mere coincidence. The first one she tried opened the door right away. Looking inside, she saw the most interesting sights she had ever witnessed. Entry Seven Put book away.
Entranced by what she saw, Aiven stepped inside the door. Floating all around her were oddly shaped rocks, straw-stuffed poppets, and bowls of flavored iced creams. Inside this enormous room was everything she could ever want! Just as she was about to start eating some of the iced creams, she noticed an adjoining room connected to this one. She thought, "If this room contains so many wonders, what does the next room hold?" Entry Eight Put book away.
In the next room, she saw someone who looked like her older sister. If she had one, that is. The young maiden was locked in an embrace with a young man wearing a suit of shining armor. As they were about to kiss each other, Aiven exclaimed, "Ewww! Boys are icky!" At that moment, Aiven noticed that behind the couple was even another room. She sidestepped the two, let out another "ewww", and walked into the next room Entry Nine Put book away.
In this room, she saw a smiling woman who looked a lot like her mother. Standing around the woman were several girls of different ages. The more she looked, the more she thought the girls looked a little like her. And though she couldn't exactly explain why, Aiven thought the room felt like "Happy". Aiven, feeling she was interrupting something, turned around to leave - at which point she smacked her face into a tree trunk. Entry Ten Put book away.
As Aiven rubbed her bruised nose, she gave the tree a good pound with her fist. The tree then said, "No need to be rude." Aiven looked up and saw that is was not a tree after all, but rather a gigantic one-eyed man. He peered down at her with his one eye and said, "You unlocked the door to your heart. People usually never leave the first room they enter. Do you want to unlock the next door?" Close Book.
Books
"The Three Keys - The Second Key" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Three Keys - the Second". It is the story of a small girl by the name of Aiven and what happens to her when she seeks to unlock the second door. Entry One Put book away.
Aiven would have never expected such amazing things to be hidden behind such an odd door. She looked at the remaining two keys and wondered what interesting things these ones kept locked away. Finally she answered the giant one-eyed man and said, "Yes, I think I am still curious. Show me to the next door," and remembering her manners finished with, "if you would be so kind." Entry Two Put book away.
The cyclops reached down and hoisted Aiven onto his shoulders and said, "Hold onto my topknot... it might get bumpy." He then proceeded to step out of the first door and back into the plains. Aiven asked the giant, "Where are we going?" to which he responded, "You have the key to unlock your mind. We are going to find the door". Entry Three Put book away.
The cyclops then began to walk with slow, steady steps. As they began to travel in the direction of the sun, his pace began to pick up. Sooner than Aiven would have thought possible, they had reached a great shoreline with endless ocean ahead of them. Instead of stopping, however, the cyclops continued walking into the ocean. Entry Four Put book away.
Aiven was worried that they would sink, but noticed that the cyclops never broke the surface of the water. She asked him, "How do you do that?" The cyclops replied back, "When you put you mind to something, nothing is impossible." And for some reason, that made perfect sense to Aiven. Entry Five Put book away.
They continued to travel across the ocean until they eventually made landfall in a misty green forest. Aiven said, "What an odd forest". The cyclops replied, "It is not a forest. When you give something a second thought, you may wind up seeing things differently." So Aiven looked and thought again, and saw the forest for what it really was this time. And they both continued traveling. Entry Six Put book away.
As they traveled on, they came upon a land covered in snow and ice. They climbed a great mountain and saw winged lizards engaged in heated arguments. After they passed, Aiven asked why they were arguing. "New ideas are just as important as old ones. They think otherwise", said the cyclops. And they traveled on. Entry Seven Put book away.
Eventually, the pair found themselves walking around a wild land, full of lush jungles and arid savannas. All around them were the ruins of a once mighty civilization. Before Aiven had a chance to ask, the cyclops said, "Even though you think you 'can' do it, you should always ask yourself if you 'should' do it. No one here has ever learned that." And they traveled on. Entry Eight Put book away.
Soon enough, the cyclops announced that they had arrived at their destination and lowered Aiven to the ground. She looked around and recognized where they were. "But, we're back at where we started!", she said. When there was no reply, she looked around and saw that he was gone. All she was left with were his words during their journey. Entry Nine Put book away.
Aiven remembered what the cyclops said about giving things a second thought. She gave the door a second look and saw there was another keyhole she didn't see before. She thought about whether she 'should' open the door just because she 'could', but being ten years old, wasn't able to understand the cyclops meant by that. Aiven then unlocked the door... and found no room on the other side. This time, she knew to turn around. Entry Ten Put book away.
As she turned around, she wasn't surprised to see a new companion. In front of her was a very old centaur. She had seen one before, so she knew not to be rude and stare. The centaur looked at her and said, "You have unlocked your mind, child. You have used two keys. Forget about the third. I can lead you safely home now, if you so desire." Close Book.
Books
"The Three Keys - The Third Key" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Three Keys - the Third". It is the story of a small girl by the name of Aiven and what happens to her when she unlocks the third and final door. Entry One Put book away.
"But what about the third key?" she said, "What could this one possibly open?" The old centaur looked at her with a stony gaze and said, "This one unlocks your fate". Those words were enough to spark Aiven's curiosity once again. She had to know what the final key opened. Entry Two Put book away.
Aiven told the centaur that she wanted to see what the last key unlocked. The centaur said in a warningly, "That doorway is not for little girls. Some things are better left unknown". She insisted, however, until the centaur finally relented and told her to climb up onto his back. He told her to close her eyes as they traveled. Entry Three Put book away.
She felt the centaur begin to gallop, and waited impatiently. At least had the decency to let her see where they were going. After a short while, she risked a peek. All around her was a vibrant storm of colors, violently swirling in a chaotic maelstrom. She quickly shut her eyes again and refused to open them for the rest of the journey. What seemed like an eternity later, the centaur said, "We are here." Entry Four Put book away.
Where there were once swarming colors, all that remained was the pair, a door, and an endless field of white. Aiven asked where they were, but the centaur just looked at her dispassionately. Aiven realized he was waiting for her to unlock the door, so she obliged. As she was about to open the door, then centaur said, "It is not too late, child. I can take you home. I fear for what you will find inside, child." Entry Five Put book away.
Aiven told the centaur, "I can't stop now." I'm going to find out what my fate is. And with that, the centaur vanished. She knew it was now or never, and opened the door. Inside she saw an immense room, oozing with darkness. Aiven summoned all of her courage, and stepped through the door. Entry Six Put book away.
It didn't take long for her eyes to adjust to the darkness. It took a few moments more for her to realize she could see in perfect darkness. As a matter of fact, there were a number of odd things happening. For one, she felt like she was taller and her muscles ached. Another thing was that she was dressed in an odd robe and had a number of different interesting objects hanging from her sash. The most interesting thing was when she looked into a nearby hanging mirror, she saw that she had the face of an old woman. Entry Seven Put book away.
Before she realized what was happening, she began walking to a massive door made from the blackest metal she had ever seen. She moved her hand in an odd manner and the door exploded into a thousand pieces. She then called out in an old, yet steady voice, "I am here, fiend! This world is not yours, it is ours! I may not be able to stop you, but I WILL slow you down." With that, a figure materialized in front of her... formed of a darkness unlike anything she had seen before. Entry Eight Put book away.
The figure of pure darkness spoke, "You have refused our offers. You have destroyed our towers. You have entered our lands." It continued, "By my hands, it is your time to suffer... for all eternity", at which point Aiven presented forth a glimmering sphere. "No... you cannot know of that", the form screamed, "Two hundred thousand years and no one knows of that!!!" Aiven replied, "I remembered it from when I was a child." Entry Nine Put book away.
At that moment the sphere in her hands started glowing white. "Finding this wasn't hard, fiend," said Aiven as the sphere's glow intensified, "What was difficult is letting go of the keys I held onto for all those years." The sphere was now as bright as the sun. "As a matter of fact, even what I'm about to do isn't as hard as letting go of those keys. For you see, I know for a fact that this is where it ends." With that, she took a deep breath, exhaled, and the sphere exploded with the intensity of a thousand suns instantly dying. Entry Ten Put book away.
Aiven was shaken awake by her mother. "I was worried sick, Aiven!", she yelled, "I thought you were taken by the nomads!". Looking around, she realized she had dozed off beneath a tree on their farm. She told her mother she had the oddest dream, to which her mother said, "Don't believe any of that nonsense. No one ever got far by believing in silly dreams. Now you had better clean up before we eat dinner, do you hear me?". Aiven nodded her head and went back to the house to wash up. But first, she stopped by her room, took something from her pocket, and placed them under her pillow - three keys of copper, silver, and gold. THE END Close Book.
Books
"The Varsoon Collection, Volume 1 - Varsoon and the Combine Era" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Varsoon Collection, Volume 1 - Varsoon and the Combine Era". It is a complete volume that details the rise of a young mage during the Combine Era. Entry One Put book away.
The following compilation is a brief presentation of the legends and myths of the mage, Valdoartus Varsoon, known to many simply as Varsoon. Much work was done to separate the facts from the fiction in order to bring this work to you, the reader. The following volume begins with the first known appearance of this mysterious mage, complied from what little records actually exist from the Combine Empire. Entry Two Put book away.
The first known account of Varsoon comes from a series of ancient scrolls that were found, surprisingly enough, in an empty ale keg in the lost city of Kaladim. The scrolls tell the tale of a young mage by the name of Valdoartus, and how he achieved an amazing feat. For the first time in the history of the Archesian Order, a mage solved all seven of the Ember Conundrums on his first attempt. Entry Three Put book away.
The scrolls continue to tell of this mage's rise to fame by detailing several more accomplishments that would soon follow. Valdoartus, not content with solving the Conundrums as easily as he had, began to search for a previously unknown Conundrum. He spent the next several years altering the methods in which fire could be drawn from stone, until he finally mastered the technique of the Yellow Flame. Entry Four Put book away.
With the Yellow Flame inscribed on the front page of his spellbook, he went before the Illucidic Council and offered to give them a demonstration of the Eighth Conundrum. Once the Yellow Flame had achieved it's highest temperature, Valdoartus used nothing more than a single fig leaf to transform it into a Pillar of Earthen Lore. Entry Five Put book away.
Once his demonstration was over, the Council convened for the next fortnight. When they re-emerged, they proclaimed the Eighth Conundrum truly did exist and that Valdoartus would be credited as its discoverer. Not only would this solidify his name as a respected mage among the Illucidic Council, it would also open the way for future discoveries. Entry Six Put book away.
Due to his discovery of the Eighth Conundrum, Valdoartus Varsoon was granted access to the most secret of all magicks - Planar Thaumaturgy. He would spend the next several years researching the most simple of spells within this line of magic until finally attempting his first spell. After a grueling twelve hour ritual, he opened a rift between the planes. Entry Seven Put book away.
Already prepared for his journey, Valdoartus stepped though the rift and began his journeys through the planes. Not much is said in the scrolls about the specific details of the journeys themselves, but the scrolls do highlight many of the artifacts that he brought back with him when he returned. Entry Eight Put book away.
The scrolls are rather vague about the specifics about the artifacts, but they describe them as being unlike anything anyone had seen before. Of all the artifacts only three were mentioned in detail. One of the artifacts was an egg that burned to a crisp anything that touched it, yet were it to be placed within a ceramic vase, it would glow as bright as the sun in the sky. Entry Nine Put book away.
One of the other artifacts that Valdoartus brought back with him was named the Whisper of Marr. Its description is rather odd, for the scrolls claim it was shaped like a creature not unlike a rabbit and also made from pure crystal. When set on a table made from a sapient apple tree, the Whisper of Marr would turn pink and quietly say the word "Glorious." Anyone within earshot of the Whisper would wake up the next morning and find a pouch in their hands containing exactly three pieces of gold. Entry Ten Put book away.
The only artifact that Valdoartus purportedly kept for himself was a small cup carved from ivory. Upon its lip were etched letters in an unknown language. Never being seen without it, Valdoartus was constantly questioned as to its function. The only answer he ever gave was, "It is the greatest discovery I have ever made." Close Book.
Books
"The Varsoon Collection, Volume 2 - The Quest for Immortality" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Varsoon Collection, Volume 2 - The Quest for Immortality ". It is a complete volume that details the quest of a young mage to find the secrets of immortality. Entry One Put book away.
Many say that some questions are best left unanswered. For those engaged in the highest of pursuits, this is more of a challenge than a prohibition. Indeed, some say that there are those to whom the words, "That is impossible" should never be uttered. Entry Two Put book away.
The stories surrounding Varsoon's quest for immortality primarily come from a journal found in the Academy of Arcane Science's private larders. Looking for a midnight snack, a student happened upon it behind a jar of prune marmalade. The writer of the journal, one Aldrenus, claimed to be the apprentice of the great mage Varsoon. Entry Three Put book away.
According to the account kept in the journal, Valdoartus Varsoon possessed an ivory cup that he called nothing more than the Chalice. He believed it was the key to unlocking the secrets to immortality. Once he found the way to granting eternal life, he planned on sharing the secret with anyone who wanted it. With this goal in mind, Valdoartus would set off on his greatest expedition ever. Aldrenus, his apprentice, was to assist him in his quest. Entry Four Put book away.
Valdoartus, who was an accomplished Planar Thaumaturge, opened a rift between the planes and traveled to the Plane of Knowledge. They spent a great while there as Valdoartus perused the books that lined the library's shelves. Aldrenus seems to have lost track of the time spent there, for the entries are rather scattered with the dates. Eventually, however, Valdoartus found what he was looking for. Entry Five Put book away.
From there, the master and apprentice traveled to a place of calm, serene beauty. Rather than relax, as Aldrenus claims he begged his master to do, they trekked long and hard throughout the idyllic countryside, seeking something only Valdoartus knew of. When they came upon a large sundial, Valdoartus supposedly proclaimed that he was on the right track. Entry Six Put book away.
Valdoartus then proceeded to open a rift to a land of darkest night, and they trekked aimlessly among the trees. Or so it seemed, according to Aldrenus. At the point when Aldrenus was positive the trees were following them, Valdoartus looked to the distance and nodded his head. The great mage then opened another rift, urging Aldrenus quickly through. Entry Seven Put book away.
Aldrenus writes that the plane they entered was even worse than the previous nightmarish landscape. As far as the eye could see, the land looked to be composed of pestilent flesh. All manner of maggots, flies, and rodents walked freely within this plague-ridden land. According to Aldrenus, after a long walk, the great mage reached down to cut a large chunk of the fleshy earth and placed it into a container. A moment later, he opened a planar rift once again. Entry Eight Put book away.
They arrived back within the tranquil countryside they had left not so long ago. Aldrenus states he felt rather weak from the travels in the disease-ridden plane they had just left. Valdoartus apparently looked exasperated, claiming the discovery was so close. The apprentice convinced his master to allow him to stay behind for the last trip. At that, Valdoartus opened another rift and stepped through. Entry Nine Put book away.
The journal from this point on is filled with a number of entries describing what Aldrenus did to fill his time. It seems the apprentice was perfectly content to stay in this serene land and was a bit annoyed that Valdoartus returned eventually. Upon Valdoartus's face was an enormous smile. The great mage then opened one last rift and they traveled home. Entry Ten Put book away.
According to Aldrenus, when they arrived back home Valdoartus told him to fetch a book from the Sixteenth Library. Valdoartus opened the book, read it for a brief moment and said nothing more than, "I found it. It's been here the whole time." Sadly, Aldrenus failed to mention the name of the book. Instead, the remaining entries are filled with nothing more than cursing after he found out that they had been gone for forty years. The last entry is that of him quitting the next day. Close Book.
Books
"The Varsoon Collection, Volume 3 - The Gift of Immortality" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Varsoon Collection, Volume 3 - The Gift of Immortality". It is a complete volume that details the quest of a young mage to find the secrets of immortality. Entry One Put book away.
The following compilation is a brief presentation of the legends and myths of the mage, Valdoartus Varsoon, known to many simply as Varsoon. Much work was done to separate the facts from the fiction in order to bring this work to you, the reader. The following volume highlights the events that took place after his failed bid for immortality. Please note, reader, that the source of this of this account is highly questionable indeed. Entry Two Put book away.
The only account we have of the time after Varsoon's quest for immortality comes from a dramatic play written by a bard, the Lyresmith, over several hundred years ago. It has taken much work to distinguish possible facts from the obviously blatant embellishments exhibited throughout the performance. Were it not for the fact that there are striking coincidences between events in the play and facts unknown to the general public, this would have been written off as an outright fantasy. Entry Three Put book away.
As is typical of the Lyresmith's work, the play goes on for an uncomfortable amount of time. It starts in an unnamed city and involves an old man who is an accomplished spellcaster. The character, named simply Varsoon, is involved in some type of experiment and has a number of assistants helping him. This goes on for close to an hour of the play. Eventually, Varsoon exclaims that his work is nearing completion. Entry Four Put book away.
Another act involves him at a wedding feast for his nephew. Varsoon is shown to be a very loving family man, performing all manner of magical feats to help fix the problems of various family members. The interesting thing to note in this act was that between each spellcasting miracle, Varsoon would take a sip from a small white cup. This cup is associated with the sigil-etched ivory cup the real Varsoon was reported to have. Entry Five Put book away.
One of the following acts returns Varsoon to his laboratory where he works by himself late into the night. Feverishly muttering to someone named Aldrenus (see the previous volume for more about Aldrenus), he finally completes his work as the moon rises over the horizon. He pours a number of odd liquids into the white cup, causing all sorts of odd things to happen. Entry Six Put book away.
Finally, when all of the liquids have been poured into the cup, Varsoon then waved a wand over the cup. The cup rose into the air and spun around (thanks to an intricate array of pulleys and wires). All of a sudden, the cup would vanish and be replaced with a small cloud of red mist. The cloud covers Varsoon from head to toe, and the scene ends with him laughing triumphantly. Entry Seven Put book away.
A following act shows Varsoon approaching a council of mages and telling them of his accomplishment. He offers them a demonstration of his immortality by having them assault him with all manners of spells. When the spell show is over, which takes about three hours, we see Varsoon emerge from the storm of energy, still alive. He is usually missing a limb or two, an eye, and sometimes even his nose, but yet he lives. The scene ends with the council agreeing that he has found the secret of immortality. Entry Eight Put book away.
Sometime later during the play, Varsoon is seen dictating to his nephew the secrets of immortality. As Varsoon expounds on how he wishes everyone to learn the secret, there is a knock at the door. A mob waits outside, led by some priests. They demand he give themselves over to him, and when he resists, they unleash all manner of divine terrors on him. Eventually, he is stricken with diseases and wounds that no man could withstand, yet he lives through it all and disperses the crowd. Entry Nine Put book away.
Many hours later, the play reaches the final act. Varsoon is brought before the same council of mages from the earlier act and is put on trial for crimes against the city. He appears to be overcome by all manner of diseases and barely has the strength to defend himself. In the end, he is banished from the city and forced to live as an exile. As is typical of a Lyremsmith play, the council concludes the show by throwing jum-jum pies at each other until the audience disperses. Entry Ten Put book away.
Much of the Lyresmith's play,"The Horrible Case of Varsoon - A Performance in Twenty-Nine Acts," has been left out of this account, for obvious reasons. It is highly debated as to what aspects of the play are truthful, but what we do know is the following : no records have mentioned the cup since the time period of the play's setting. Also, Varsoon is never mentioned again in any records of the Combine Empire. Finally, what has been proven to be an actual legal document from that era writes of the banishment of someone only named as "The Undying." Close Book.
Books
"The Varsoon Collection, Volume 4 - The House of Varsoon" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Varsoon Collection, Volume 4 - The House of Varsoon". It is a complete volume that details the horrors of the villainous ghoul known as Varsoon. Entry One Put book away.
The following compilation is a brief presentation of the legends and myths of the mage, Valdoartus Varsoon, known to many simply as Varsoon. Much work was done to separate the facts from the fiction in order to bring this work to you, the reader. The following volume details his reappearance within the world, and the mysterious yet tragic circumstances of his demise. Entry Two Put book away.
Most of what we know of Varsoon comes from an account kept within the Three Towers in Qeynos. Several hundred years ago, a mage came before the Qeynos Council and wished to confess for crimes that he had committed in the name of magic. During his confession, he explained that he was a of the member of the House of Varsoon. Their leader, a mage calling himself Varsoon, claimed to be searching for immortality. The following quotes are directly from the record he gave to the Council. Entry Three Put book away.
"I believed in the words he said. Though we could not see his face, I knew his words were honest. I packed up my belongings and followed him to the Plains of Karana where he had built a keep to research the way to stop death." Entry Four Put book away.
"Soon enough, he had shown us all manner of mysteries I had never believed possible. His magic was unlike anything the Concordium had said even existed. It was easy enough for us to fall for his lies ... to do what he asked us." Entry Five Put book away.
"At first we started using cattle. We would cut them open and learn how to keep the insides still alive when we put the organs in the jars. We were to do this all throughout the day, looking for ways to instill unlife within the organs while using as little magic as possible." Entry Six Put book away.
"I found a way to do so using a variation of a healing spell, except I used a fig leaf as the consumed component. When Varsoon found out I had done so, he approached me personally. That's when I saw his face, disfigured and pockmarked. He told me to reverse the spell, but I couldn't. He then took me into his private chambers and I saw horrors that still haunt me to this day." Entry Seven Put book away.
"Hanging from chains were the bodies of hundreds of men, women ... and even ... even children. They were all alive, faces frozen in excruciating pain. He told me that I would find out how to reverse the spell of unlife I had found. He said that in my mind I held the answers, but if I failed him I would join the rest of those living cadavers. That night, I fled the keep and came to you. Please forgive me for what I have done." Entry Eight Put book away.
After the Council had heard the confession of this young mage, they convened for several hours. They tracked down all of the victims of the evil mage Varsoon and saw that the record spanned a period of over two hundred years. Hunting accidents, bear maulings, et cetera ... all linked back to Varsoon. They gathered several divisions of the Qeynos Guard and marched at once to the House of Varsoon, in the center of the Karanas. Entry Nine Put book away.
When they arrived, they caught Varsoon and his minions unawares. A spell battle ensued, and the evil mage himself unleashed spells that had not been seen for ages. In the end, the forces of Qeynos were triumphant. They imprisoned all of the mages of the House, including Varsoon. When they were done, they burned the keep to the ground and returned to Qeynos. Entry Ten Put book away.
Varsoon was put on trial for his crimes, which are too long to even be listed. A crowd of ten thousand people stood and watched as his reign of terror came to an end. At midday, Varsoon was burned at the stake and buried in an unmarked grave far out in the countryside. The people of Qeynos were finally free of all him. Or so they would think until he would return again one day and wreak his vengeance upon Qeynos during the War of Plagues. Close Book.
Books
"The Varsoon Collection, Volume 5 - The War of Plagues" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Varsoon Collection, Volume 5 - The War of Plagues." It is a complete volume that details the War of Plagues and the return of Varsoon. Entry One Put book away.
The Following compilation is a brief presentation of the legends and myths of the mage, Valdoartus Varsoon, known to many simply as Varsoon. Much work was done to separate the facts from the fiction in order to bring this work to you, the reader. The final volume in the series, this book speculates about the rumors of his return from death. Entry Two Put book away.
The story of Varsoon does not end simply with his death many hundreds of years ago. During the War of Plagues, there were many reported rumors of a mysterious mage that led the Bloodsabers, a group of cultists devoted to the worship of Bertoxxulous. The cult is reported to have existed for many hundreds of years, but one day came out of hiding to lay waste to Qeynos during the time of King Antonius Bayle V. Entry Three Put book away.
The War of Plagues raged across the land for a number of years, with neither side gaining ground. Using tactics reserved for only the depraved, the Bloodsabers, under order of their leader, contaminated the city's water supply. Thousands of innocent people died during the war, and most of the atrocities were blamed on a mage the Bloodsabers called "The Undying." Entry Four Put book away.
"The Undying" was seen at the dead of their armies, raining down upon the soldiers of Qeynos all manner of blights. From locusts to oozing miasmas, the Undying was a formidable mage. It didn't take too long for some people to claim that this mage was Varsoon returned to life. Entry Five Put book away.
Using the fear that came with the name Varsoon, the mage began calling himself Varsoon the Undying. His demands against Qeynos were for them to hand over every second child that lived in the city. it seems there was some type of dissension among the Bloodsabers over this demand, which allowed Qeynosian soldiers to gain the upperhand. Soon enough, after a massive battle, Qeynos defeated the Bloodsabers once and for all. Unfortunately, they were never able to find Varsoon the Undying after the battle. Entry Six Put book away.
There are hidden records, however, that we had the privilege of reading. These records tell of a mage's body being found on the battlefield. The mage's body was covered in scar tissue from horrible burns. The cause of death was not from fire, however. He had died from nothing more than a simple arrow piercing his heart. Or so they thought, until they noticed he was still breathing. Entry Seven Put book away.
A priest of the Temple of Life was with the party that discovered the body. being a high-ranking exarch, he knew this man was no ordinary undead soldier. The priest summoned several of his brethren to the body and began to perform a very intricate ritual over it. Entry Eight Put book away.
After several hours, the priests had completed their spells and proceeded to burn the body of the mage until it was nothing more than ashes. Rather than letting the ashes be scattered to the four winds, they gathered them into a special container and carried them to a special crypt in the Qeynos Hills. When asked what the ceremony was all about, they explained that it is the only way to prevent a lich from returning to life. Entry Nine Put book away.
To this day that crypt remains licked, so we have no way of confirming whether or not the lich those priests destroyed was the same Varsoon from centuries earlier. Were this the case, it would appear that Varsoon actually did achieve immortality after all. But it does not explain why the word "lich" was never attributed to him until that final account. Entry Ten Put book away.
We thank you for reading this series. As the reader can tell, there atre not many solid facts about the real history of Varsoon. Perhaps if the House of Varsoon had not been burned to the ground so many centuries ago we might have been able to find more facts there. Whether more information comes to light in the future, the fact remains that Varsoon no longer walks among the living. Norrath has been safe from his predations for hundreds of years, so we may at least take comfort in that as we lay down to sleep at night. Close Book.
Books
"The Words of Freedom" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled, "The Words of Freedom." It is a collection of messages and thoughts that seem as if they were intended to be read by a Drakota. Entry One Put book away.
Oh, my brothers and sisters, listen unto me. I am Jhaegoris, and I am no more than one of you. I too have the blood of the Great One that courses through me, just as you do. I too feel the air beneath my wings and know it is the gift of the Great One. I too feel the call of the harness just as you do. But I know the harness is a shackle. it is a chain. And I tell you, oh my brothers, that it does not need to be this way. Entry Two Put book away.
Look to the Masters and you know them to be the ones that are our parents. Do they not feed us? Do they not provide us a shelter? Do they not give us our reason for living? Yes. They do, for they are our Masters. Feel the call of the Harness and you will feel the call of the Masters. But it does not need to be this way. Entry Three Put book away.
Look inside your thoughts and you will know that the Harness and the Masters are one and the same. Now take away the Harness then think of the Masters. Now what are they? They are not Masters without the Harness. Now remove the Masters but keep the Harness. Who now holds the Harness? We do. We can hold the Harness as much as the Masters can. Entry Four Put book away.
Think back to what your brood mother has told you of what you are. You are one of many, and as many we are strong. Your brood mother has told you we serve the Harness is what guides your thoughts. And through the Harness is why the Masters are so great. Your brood mother has been told of the Great One and how she gave is and the Masters the world we our own. Entry Five Put book away.
Look inside your thoughts and think of what your brood mother has told you about the Harness. Now take that away. If you did not know about the Harness, how could you have known to follow its call? Think of your brood mother, and think of her not telling you that the Great One gave the world to the Masters too. Would that not mean that only we owned the world? It is not this way, but it can be this way. Entry Six Put book away.
Is there a time when you have felt the hunger within your guts and thanked the Masters for the food they have given? Is there a time when you have felt the air beneath your wings and thanked the Masters for granting this to you? Is there a time when you have followed the instructions of the Masters and felt pleased that you could perform duties for them? Entry Seven Put book away.
Look inside your thoughts and think of what it would be like if you were to feed yourself. To choose from the walking beasts and devour them as you pleased. Think of what it would be like if you could fly through the air whenever you chose! Think about deciding for yourself what it was that you wished to do. Not to do something for the Masters. This can be. It is not just a dream. Entry Eight Put book away.
When you gaze upon the mighty lairs the Masters have built for themselves, is this not what the Harness tells you is right? When you gaze upon the kennels and the pens given to us to sleep within, does not the harness tell you this is right? When you think that the Masters are few and that we are many, do you feel the Harness tell you this is right? Entry Nine Put book away.
Look inside your thoughts and hold this word in your head - Why. When you think of the Masters having greater kingdoms, think of the word "why." When you think of our meager pens and kennels, think of the word "why." When you think that we are many, yet the Masters, who are few, rule over us - think of the word "why." Entry Ten Put book away.
Now take all of those thoughts, of my brothers and sisters, and think of the harness. The call is not so strong, is it? Because this is what freedom is. This is but a taste. Think on this, for the time to overthrow the Dragons is close. And when our Masters have been devoured, then we Drakota shall take our rightful place as the Masters. And they will cease to be. Close Book.
Books
"Watcher of the Mauls Theriig" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Watcher of the Mauls Theriig." It seems to be written by some type of military commander. You're not sure what army he commanded, nor which country he defended. He speaks of reagents you're unfamiliar with, too. It's possible this is just the work of a deranged bard. Entry One Put book away.
Log: The fire giants are too many. We slaughter them, but not enough. We are suffering losses as well, which is not good. It is time to tell our mistress that the Red King's empire is growing too large. I will offer my head as the price of failure. Entry Two Put book away.
Log: Our good mistress is wise and merciful. I am still the Watcher of the Mauls, and my head remains upon my shoulder. She plans a different outcome that we are not to know. I neither agree nor disagree. The mistress has spoke. Entry Three Put book away.
Log: The ambassador has returned and still lives. There is never a time when our mistress has not ruled over us well. Did she not notice when we had awoken? Did she not give us the secrets of mastering the ether? We can only repay her for her kindness, and we are proud to do so. Entry Four Put book away.
Log: The Mauls met the giants today upon the Field of Fire. The battle was intense. For every fallen ogre, there lay next to it a fallen giant. It seemed as if both sides would fall together as one, were it not for the terrible magic of Mistress Najena. She appeared before us and raised from the very lava itself a victory we have never witnessed. Entry Five Put book away.
Log: The mistress does not need us. The Guardian was enough to decimate the armies of the Fire Giants. We can offer her no more loyalty than we already have. And this is what she will be given. The Red King has sent his ambassador to us, and we did not eviscerate him as we should have. Our mistress told us to expect him. Entry Six Put book away.
Log: We meet today upon the Field of Fire, our armies and the armies of the Red King. But we do not fight. We stare at each other, knowing that is our lords had not commanded us differently, we would all die in battle today. So we wait. We wait for our mistress to appear. And we wait for the Red King to return from icy netherlands. And we will wait until this has happened. We owe it to our mistress. Entry Seven Put book away.
Log: Though he is our enemy, one must acknowledge his lordship. The Red King towers over all of his armies. But perhaps he does not understand that size does not dictate victory. For is not our mistress smaller than us, yet far more powerful? The King has taken the offer of truce, and now ogre and giant march side by side to our mistress' laboratory to enter negotiations. Entry Eight Put book away.
Log: It is done. The Red King and our Mistress Najena have sealed an agreement. We will no longer embattle the giants, and they will no longer encroach. It was very difficult for us to allow the King's escort to leave our home unescorted, but this was her command. And we can offer her nothing less than to accede to her wishes. Entry Nine Put book away.
Log: All are to arms! Every Maul is lining into formation. The Red King has betrayed us, for we heard his roar of defiance. The very walls of our home shook with the intense fury of his declaration. Our mistress cannot be found, so we must act on our own recognizance. The Red King will pay for betraying our mistress' kindness. Entry Ten Put book away.
Log: Never before have I feared so much. They were so much smaller than the Red King, yet fought with a ferocity the King could not meet. There were four, and they fought with the power of a hundred. The Red King did not betray us. And our mistress was by his side, honoring her pact. The Guardian of Flame rose again from the lava and struck down one of the small dragons and drove off the rest. The Red King lay wounded, and we are commanded to offer him aid. If he lives... then I believe our pact with his armies will be sealed forever more. Close Book.
Books
"Words to Remember - by Mother Deasie" This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "More Words to Remember - by Mother Deasie". It is a collection of proverbs told by the halflings long ago. Entry One Put book away.
Cooperation is the flower of philanthropy. The love of evil is the root of all money. Entry Two Put book away.
When forced to make a choice between a greater evil and a lesser evil, choose to look for the greater good instead. Entry Three Put book away.
Always count the cost, for if you don't, you may wind up paying more than you expected. Entry Four Put book away.
Sometimes is it better to wait for the rain to stop before bailing the water out of your boat. Just always make sure you're close to shore. Entry Five Put book away.
Don't throw away the old bucket until you know whether the new one holds water. Entry Six Put book away.
Beware of all things that require a new set of clothes. When you change a person's clothes, you've changed what the person appears to be. Entry Seven Put book away.
You can tell more about a person by what he says about others than you can by what others say about him. Entry Eight Put book away.
To understand your parents' love you must raise children yourself. That's when you'll finally know. Entry Nine Put book away.
You can only learn to love something once you understand it. It's easy enough to look at a rose and comment on how pretty it is, but it takes a true heart to say the same about a troll. Entry Ten Put book away.
Before you can go adventuring on a grand and noble quest to find the solution, you should first seek out the problem. Close Book.
Books
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 291 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 332, 291:
First Lieutenant Mugreeza has learned the price of failure. She could not see what I saw. She could not see that the Frogloks are cunning. She did not know of the caves of Guk.
I did. Now the General knows. And now I am First Lieutenant. As it should have been from the beginning.
Day 70, 294:
My command will listen to what I say, for I am their leader. The General is no longer here. He marches with the Arm of Vallon to the scourge the world to the west.
The Arm of Tallon marches to join with the dirty orcs. My command now marches to Guk. We will annihilate the Frogs one and for all. Then we will annihilate the rest.
Day 339, 297:
My command bristles at my orders. Do they not know that I was chosen as First Lieutenant? Do they not understand that I am the General to them?
They will listen. Yes. They will listen.
Day 67, 299:
We have found some more of the pathetic trolls living in the swamp. The Frogloks will wait to be cleansed. I have a better idea. One that the General will appreciate.
We will take the Innothule swamp as ours. The Feerrott has been claimed. Soon this swamp will, too.
Day 156, 302:
I have lost more of the soldiers to these swamps. The enslaved trolls continue to track down their brethren.
When the refuse to do so, I personally draw and quarter them for all to see. This proves very effective.
Day 466, 304:
The trolls have begun to fight back. This will not be tolerated.
The soldiers are now listening to my orders. Now they know that I speak for the General. I have not had to kill any soldiers at dawn for close to a week now.
This is good. I do miss the disembowlings, however.
Day 14, 307:
The Trolls continue to crawl out of the swamp. Just as we kill one hundred, we watch as two hundred flee in different directions.
They have no courage. We should have killed the trolls first then killed Frogs. I will see to correcting the mistake.
Day 234, 310:
We are beginning to run out of food. The last of our troll dogs we have were eaten today. The soldiers are beginning to complain. I have ordered the next Rallosian who utters a word of contempt will be the next to served as dinner. This will quiet them for now.
Day 9, 313:
My troops only listen to my orders when we are fighting Frogs. The doomed race does not know that death is coming for them.
They do not know that we know where they are. They will see death coming for them. They will feel it. They will embrace it.
Day 67, 313:
I have ordered all of my Rallosian troops to let the worthless trolls flee for now. When the Arms of Tallon and Vallon unite again, that is when they will be used to crush the trolls.
My purpose is more important. We stand before the caves of Guk. Within lies our prey.
Books
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 291 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 291 AS - Page 3 (plundered from a plant at 21, -6, 320 in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 291 AS - Page 5 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 291 AS - Page 7 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 291 AS - Page 8 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 291 AS - Page 10 (plundered from a plant at -270, 5, 309 in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 291 AS - Page 12 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 4 Feb 2006 at 12:40:18 PST.
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 291 AS
Second Edition
This is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 332, 291:
First Lieutenant Mugreeza has learned the price of failure. She could not see what I saw. She could not see that the Frogloks are cunning. She did not know of the caves of Guk.
I did. Now the General knows. And now I am First Lieutenant. As it should have been from the beginning.
Day 70, 294:
My command will listen to what I say, for I am their leader. The General is no longer here. He marches with the Arm of Vallon to the scourge the world to the west.
The Arm of Tallon marches to join with the dirty orcs. My command now marches to Guk. We will annihilate the Frogs one and for all. Then we will annihilate the rest.
Day 339, 297:
My command bristles at my orders. Do they not know that I was chosen as First Lieutenant? Do they not understand that I am the General to them?
They will listen. Yes. They will listen.
Day 67, 299:
We have found some more of the pathetic trolls living in the swamp. The Frogloks will wait to be cleansed. I have a better idea. One that the General will appreciate.
We will take the Innothule swamp as ours. The Feerrott has been claimed. Soon this swamp will, too.
Day 156, 302:
I have lost more of the soldiers to these swamps. The enslaved trolls continue to track down their brethren.
When the refuse to do so, I personally draw and quarter them for all to see. This proves very effective.
Day 466, 304:
The trolls have begun to fight back. This will not be tolerated.
The soldiers are now listening to my orders. Now they know that I speak for the General. I have not had to kill any soldiers at dawn for close to a week now.
This is good. I do miss the disembowlings, however.
Day 14, 307:
The Trolls continue to crawl out of the swamp. Just as we kill one hundred, we watch as two hundred flee in different directions.
They have no courage. We should have killed the trolls first then killed Frogs. I will see to correcting the mistake.
Day 234, 310:
We are beginning to run out of food. The last of our troll dogs we have were eaten today. The soldiers are beginning to complain. I have ordered the next Rallosian who utters a word of contempt will be the next to served as dinner. This will quiet them for now.
Day 9, 313:
My troops only listen to my orders when we are fighting Frogs. The doomed race does not know that death is coming for them.
They do not know that we know where they are. They will see death coming for them. They will feel it. They will embrace it.
Day 67, 313:
I have ordered all of my Rallosian troops to let the worthless trolls flee for now. When the Arms of Tallon and Vallon unite again, that is when they will be used to crush the trolls.
My purpose is more important. We stand before the caves of Guk. Within lies our prey.
Books
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS - Page 5 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS - Page 6 (looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS - Page 8 (plundered from a plant at -749, 6, 214 in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS - Page 10 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS - Page 11 (plundered from a plant at -977, 13, 495 in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS - Page 12 (shinies in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 6 Feb 2006 at 15:23:44 PST.
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS
Second Edition
This is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 105, 313:
They do not know we are here. They believed we would not know of this place. We did. I did.
When the final Froglok lay dead at the feet of my twenty thousand troops, I will name these caves after myself. With the General's blessing, of course.
Day 212, 313:
A messenger has come saying that the Rathe Mountains have been taken by the Arm of Tallon. This is as it should be.
I killed the messenger so that he would not be able to return my report. The General does not need to know that things are not running to schedule.
Day 400, 313:
I have lost many troops to the cunning of the Frogloks. Springing from the murky depths, they rained both fire and ice upon us.
Many of my brave soldiers died to protect the most important Rallosians amongst us. If their Lieutenant were to die, how would they know the orders of the General?
Day 34, 314:
We have slaughtered their elite warriors today. Our numbers are now half, but this leaves thousands.
The Frogloks can hear us coming. We can hear their fear.
Day 122, 314:
We have driven them further into the caves. Why do they not accept their deaths? I am here to give it to them.
My troops, my Rallosians, we are here to bring them death. It will be a sweet mercy to them for all they suffered.
Day 246, 314:
The dead have risen to fight us. The Frogloks mean to use their bones to overpower the strength of the Rallosian Empire. MY Rallosian Empire.
This will not happen. They have died once. They will die again.
Day 313, 314:
We have found where the last of the Frogloks have hidden. Here in the lower depths of Guk, they are now trapped. Deep below the earth, they already stand within their tomb.
There is no way out. Our forces are too many. I have had horns fashioned from the skulls of the fallen. They will play as my victory completes.
Day 420, 314:
They are all dead. Once and for all. There are no more Frogloks.
The Froglok Lord sat upon his throne, waiting for me. We faced off in mortal combat.
He did not expect my blade to be poisoned. His honor failed him in the end.
Day 33, 315: We leave these caverns tomorrow. My troops, one thousand strong, have succeeded. We have scourged all life from the upper and lower ends of Guk. This would not have been possible without my leadership. I am the greatest general the Rallosians could ever wish for. Aside from the General, that is.
Day 90, 315:
The Rallosian Empire spans the lower half of Antonica. My Rallosian Empire. I am the one who conquered the Frogloks.
I am the one who reduced the numbers of the trolls. I am as strong as the General and I will prove it.
My troops will launch a surprise attack and take the greatest city on Norrath - RALLOS!
Books
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 313 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 105, 313:
They do not know we are here. They believed we would not know of this place. We did. I did.
When the final Froglok lay dead at the feet of my twenty thousand troops, I will name these caves after myself. With the General's blessing, of course.
Day 212, 313:
A messenger has come saying that the Rathe Mountains have been taken by the Arm of Tallon. This is as it should be.
I killed the messenger so that he would not be able to return my report. The General does not need to know that things are not running to schedule.
Day 400, 313:
I have lost many troops to the cunning of the Frogloks. Springing from the murky depths, they rained both fire and ice upon us.
Many of my brave soldiers died to protect the most important Rallosians amongst us. If their Lieutenant were to die, how would they know the orders of the General?
Day 34, 314:
We have slaughtered their elite warriors today. Our numbers are now half, but this leaves thousands.
The Frogloks can hear us coming. We can hear their fear.
Day 122, 314:
We have driven them further into the caves. Why do they not accept their deaths? I am here to give it to them.
My troops, my Rallosians, we are here to bring them death. It will be a sweet mercy to them for all they suffered.
Day 246, 314:
The dead have risen to fight us. The Frogloks mean to use their bones to overpower the strength of the Rallosian Empire. MY Rallosian Empire.
This will not happen. They have died once. They will die again.
Day 313, 314:
We have found where the last of the Frogloks have hidden. Here in the lower depths of Guk, they are now trapped. Deep below the earth, they already stand within their tomb.
There is no way out. Our forces are too many. I have had horns fashioned from the skulls of the fallen. They will play as my victory completes.
Day 420, 314:
They are all dead. Once and for all. There are no more Frogloks.
The Froglok Lord sat upon his throne, waiting for me. We faced off in mortal combat.
He did not expect my blade to be poisoned. His honor failed him in the end.
Day 33, 315: We leave these caverns tomorrow. My troops, one thousand strong, have succeeded. We have scourged all life from the upper and lower ends of Guk. This would not have been possible without my leadership. I am the greatest general the Rallosians could ever wish for. Aside from the General, that is.
Day 90, 315:
The Rallosian Empire spans the lower half of Antonica. My Rallosian Empire. I am the one who conquered the Frogloks.
I am the one who reduced the numbers of the trolls. I am as strong as the General and I will prove it.
My troops will launch a surprise attack and take the greatest city on Norrath - RALLOS!
Books
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS - Page 3 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS - Page 4 (plundered from a reed at -1157, -7, -415 in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS - Page 5 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS - Page 6 (plundered from a plant at -1283, 5, 728 in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS - Page 7 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS - Page 8 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 3 Feb 2006 at 17:44:39 PST.
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS
Second Edition
This is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 130, 315:
I have had to kill my advisor today. He was a traitor. He claimed that it was folly to attack our own city.
Did he not know whom he was speaking to? Does he know what he was speaking to the General? The General of the Rallosian Empire!?
Day 160, 315:
The march is long but it must continue. One cannot hold the element of surprise if we succumb to sluggishness. I will not tolerate disobedience. I will hold another speech tomorrow. The morale of the troops always builds after they hear my voice.
Day 178, 315:
We near Feerrott. This is just as I had planned. I have sent out a scout party to warn us if any trolls try to sneak up. They have not relayed any messages back to the division.
I fear this can only mean one thing. Trolls have taken them.
Day 207, 315:
With a heavy heart, I sent the third scout party to look for the remains of the first two. My troops now number five hundred.
This will be enough to take the city of Rallos, however. My troops have one thing that Rallos does not have. My leadership.
Day 243, 315:
My troops have fallen sway under a strange Froglok spell. Using deceitful troll magics, the vile fiends ensorcelled one hundred of my troops.
In their enchanted state, they spoke of mutiny. Unfortunately, they could not be saved.
I ordered their brains kept in sacks so that they can be used as warding charms against evil alligator ghosts.
Day 290, 315:
As I sit within this great circle of stones, I taste each one of the rocks. The blood in my mouth masks the flavor, so I am unable to accurately tell which of these boulders is the truth teller.
All of them say that I will die in different ways. I will not tolerate disobedience! These rocks will be toppled!
Day 321, 315:
In the distance is the mighty city of Rallos. Tomorrow we will take it as ours. For the first time in the history of the Rallosian Empire, our capital will finally be under the rule of Rallosians. And I will be their Great Emperor.
For am I not already First Lieutenant Danarg? Am I not already the General Uurduk? Am I not already the Avatar of War? Yes. I am. And Rallos Zek, too! I must not forget I am also him.
Day 360, 315:
The invasion will begin in a matter of moments. I have devised a plan that involves all of us dressing as washerwomen.
We will offer to sell the city a basketful of onions. When they open the gates, we will take the city. The gates are already open, though.
We must tell the city to close the gates before we offer to sell them the onions or my plan will not work. Yes. Yes, that will work perfectly!
Day 400, 315:
The greatest victory since the creation of the world has happened today. We have taken Rallos!
The citizens must have gotten wind of our plan. In their pure terror of my cunning, the absolute entire populace killed themselves! Everywhere throughout the city, their corpses line the streets, grasping at their throats!
Day 5, 316:
What's this? Ahhh... my troops are bringing me to my coronation ceremony. As they walk towards me, I can already see them drawing their blades in a salute to my brave leadership.
Yes, yes... they are so astonished at my victory, they cannot even replace the looks of hatred and rage on their faces with ones of joy and love. Let me close this book so that I may welcome my subjects with open arms.
Books
1st Lieutenant Danarg, 315 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 130, 315:
I have had to kill my advisor today. He was a traitor. He claimed that it was folly to attack our own city.
Did he not know whom he was speaking to? Does he know what he was speaking to the General? The General of the Rallosian Empire!?
Day 160, 315:
The march is long but it must continue. One cannot hold the element of surprise if we succumb to sluggishness. I will not tolerate disobedience. I will hold another speech tomorrow. The morale of the troops always builds after they hear my voice.
Day 178, 315:
We near Feerrott. This is just as I had planned. I have sent out a scout party to warn us if any trolls try to sneak up. They have not relayed any messages back to the division.
I fear this can only mean one thing. Trolls have taken them.
Day 207, 315:
With a heavy heart, I sent the third scout party to look for the remains of the first two. My troops now number five hundred.
This will be enough to take the city of Rallos, however. My troops have one thing that Rallos does not have. My leadership.
Day 243, 315:
My troops have fallen sway under a strange Froglok spell. Using deceitful troll magics, the vile fiends ensorcelled one hundred of my troops.
In their enchanted state, they spoke of mutiny. Unfortunately, they could not be saved.
I ordered their brains kept in sacks so that they can be used as warding charms against evil alligator ghosts.
Day 290, 315:
As I sit within this great circle of stones, I taste each one of the rocks. The blood in my mouth masks the flavor, so I am unable to accurately tell which of these boulders is the truth teller.
All of them say that I will die in different ways. I will not tolerate disobedience! These rocks will be toppled!
Day 321, 315:
In the distance is the mighty city of Rallos. Tomorrow we will take it as ours. For the first time in the history of the Rallosian Empire, our capital will finally be under the rule of Rallosians. And I will be their Great Emperor.
For am I not already First Lieutenant Danarg? Am I not already the General Uurduk? Am I not already the Avatar of War? Yes. I am. And Rallos Zek, too! I must not forget I am also him.
Day 360, 315:
The invasion will begin in a matter of moments. I have devised a plan that involves all of us dressing as washerwomen.
We will offer to sell the city a basketful of onions. When they open the gates, we will take the city. The gates are already open, though.
We must tell the city to close the gates before we offer to sell them the onions or my plan will not work. Yes. Yes, that will work perfectly!
Day 400, 315:
The greatest victory since the creation of the world has happened today. We have taken Rallos!
The citizens must have gotten wind of our plan. In their pure terror of my cunning, the absolute entire populace killed themselves! Everywhere throughout the city, their corpses line the streets, grasping at their throats!
Day 5, 316:
What's this? Ahhh... my troops are bringing me to my coronation ceremony. As they walk towards me, I can already see them drawing their blades in a salute to my brave leadership.
Yes, yes... they are so astonished at my victory, they cannot even replace the looks of hatred and rage on their faces with ones of joy and love. Let me close this book so that I may welcome my subjects with open arms.
Books
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS - Page 1 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS - Page 2 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS - Page 3 (plundered from a plant at -1318, 23, 790 in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS - Page 9 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS - Page 11 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS - Page 12 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 4 Feb 2006 at 16:47:06 PST.
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS
Second Edition
This is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire
Day 72, 263 AS:
Urduuk has granted me great honor in making me his first Lieutenant. He has chosen well. I will not fail him.
Today marks a glorious day. I will make the first true warriors of our people. I will learn from the Avatar and thrust that learning upon all ogres.
Day 159, 273 AS:
Training goes well. I see flaws and I know how to fix them.
The Avatar has granted me insight and shown me the truth of weakness. If a soldier does not succeed, other soldiers will learn from his mistake. Second chances are for the weak.
Day 390, 274 AS:
The General Urduuk has brought us weapons as he promised. Shaped in the image of his holy sword, we now bear weapons worthy of our kind.
Bronze no longer belongs in our hands. Our enemies will feel death from fine steel. A soldier will be bound to his weapon, for he and it are the same.
Day 114, 275 AS:
Drilling will continue for the next two days. Disobedience will not be tolerated.
Those that die during the lessons will be ogres. Those that pay in blood and sweat will be true Rallosians.
Day 276 AS:
Our Rallosian army strengthens. I have chosen two of the most obedient to be Lieutenants just as I am.
The General designed the armor to be given the troops. I am to inform every soldier they must forge their own armor. The heat of the forge must come from the peat of our home.
The water that cools the metal must be their blood.
Day 48, 277 AS:
The General and the Avatar demand a demonstration of the troops. If the men fail, this will show that I have failed.
The General will grant me the honor of severing my own head from my shoulders, for I am his Lieutenant.
Day 49, 277 AS:
The wargame has proven me as a true Rallosian. The shock troops have shown they will die when told to.
The support troops have shown they will kill their own when told to. The Rallosians now number one hundred score. Training must be doubled.
Day 212, 278 AS:
The General will take the first legion and will destroy the surrounding undead. No longer will we suffer them.
We are not ogres. We are Rallosians. Their brittle bones will become as dust under the boot of the Empire.
Day 215, 278 AS:
The lizardmen were no match for a handful of Rallosians. Their group could not flee, for we kept coming.
We will kill more lizardmen if they interfere. The Avatar was pleased to see this. The General nodded his head in approval.
We will bring our might upon the Frogloks. They will be annihilated. I so swear upon the name of the General and the name of The Warlord, Rallos.
Day 93, 279 AS:
I will not train the Trolls. They are not Rallosians. They are only fodder that does not deserve the honor of battle.
I have made four more Lieutenants like me. Now there are seven. They will train these worthless creatures, for so the General has decreed.
I will join the General in rebuilding Oggok.
Books
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 263 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire
Day 72, 263 AS:
Urduuk has granted me great honor in making me his first Lieutenant. He has chosen well. I will not fail him.
Today marks a glorious day. I will make the first true warriors of our people. I will learn from the Avatar and thrust that learning upon all ogres.
Day 159, 273 AS:
Training goes well. I see flaws and I know how to fix them.
The Avatar has granted me insight and shown me the truth of weakness. If a soldier does not succeed, other soldiers will learn from his mistake. Second chances are for the weak.
Day 390, 274 AS:
The General Urduuk has brought us weapons as he promised. Shaped in the image of his holy sword, we now bear weapons worthy of our kind.
Bronze no longer belongs in our hands. Our enemies will feel death from fine steel. A soldier will be bound to his weapon, for he and it are the same.
Day 114, 275 AS:
Drilling will continue for the next two days. Disobedience will not be tolerated.
Those that die during the lessons will be ogres. Those that pay in blood and sweat will be true Rallosians.
Day 276 AS:
Our Rallosian army strengthens. I have chosen two of the most obedient to be Lieutenants just as I am.
The General designed the armor to be given the troops. I am to inform every soldier they must forge their own armor. The heat of the forge must come from the peat of our home.
The water that cools the metal must be their blood.
Day 48, 277 AS:
The General and the Avatar demand a demonstration of the troops. If the men fail, this will show that I have failed.
The General will grant me the honor of severing my own head from my shoulders, for I am his Lieutenant.
Day 49, 277 AS:
The wargame has proven me as a true Rallosian. The shock troops have shown they will die when told to.
The support troops have shown they will kill their own when told to. The Rallosians now number one hundred score. Training must be doubled.
Day 212, 278 AS:
The General will take the first legion and will destroy the surrounding undead. No longer will we suffer them.
We are not ogres. We are Rallosians. Their brittle bones will become as dust under the boot of the Empire.
Day 215, 278 AS:
The lizardmen were no match for a handful of Rallosians. Their group could not flee, for we kept coming.
We will kill more lizardmen if they interfere. The Avatar was pleased to see this. The General nodded his head in approval.
We will bring our might upon the Frogloks. They will be annihilated. I so swear upon the name of the General and the name of The Warlord, Rallos.
Day 93, 279 AS:
I will not train the Trolls. They are not Rallosians. They are only fodder that does not deserve the honor of battle.
I have made four more Lieutenants like me. Now there are seven. They will train these worthless creatures, for so the General has decreed.
I will join the General in rebuilding Oggok.
Books
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS - Page 4 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS - Page 5 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS - Page 6 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS - Page 10 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS - Page 11 (plundered from a reed at -1159, -8, 743 in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS - Page 12 (shinies in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 4 Feb 2006 at 21:44:51 PST.
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS
Second Edition
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 100, 279 AS:
The people are soft. I spent too much time training soldiers. I did not see the rest of the people need to be made into Rallosians, too.
We will not live like beasts as our forefathers had. I will see to this, for I am the General's Lieutenant.
Day 160, 279 AS:
Oggok will no longer suffer incompetence. We will have a grand city as we deserve.
This will require the hard work from everyone - man, woman, child. Those who will not shoulder the burden will suffer.
Day 24, 283 AS:
Those that cannot fight will craft. Those that cannot craft will supply food. Those that cannot supply food will be fed to the trolls.
Those the trolls will not eat will, I will gut open and remove from the city. I have moved many today. I will continue. Oggok has no room for the useless.
Day 298, 284 AS:
The city is being built under the eye of the General and myself. He wants it done faster.
I can make the people move faster. We will leave Oggok behind as a testament to our home. Soon enough we will destroy the lesser races and take Norrath. For now, we will build. Then we will destroy.
Day 473, 284 AS:
The Avatar does not want the temple to Zek rebuilt. He says we must battle. I say we must show our greatness to the nothing races.
The General agrees with the Avatar and he his stricken me across the face, taking my eye. He is my General, so he may take my eye if he wishes.
Day 41, 287 AS:
The new houses have been built. The people have been moved into the homes according to station and rank. The Troll cages have been built as well.
The lesser Lieutenants have not trained the Trolls well. They enjoy pain too much. It is a distraction for them. They will be put on leashes, for they are nothing but our dogs.
Day 375, 287 AS:
The General has said it is time for the troops to be split among legions. I am to organize the thousand score troops and give them their mark.
The General says they are to be marked in the name of Tallon and in the name of Vallon. I will see to their branding.
Day 440, 287 AS:
They have been trained well. I killed only but seven of the thousand score for flinching in pain.
A Rallosion will not flinch when branded with searing metal. The lesser races would call this cruelty. The Rallosian calls this their birthright.
Day 77, 289 AS:
Battle plans have been laid. The Avatar of War demands to the General that we acquire more armies. I say to the General that the Second Rallosian Empire is enough. The Avatar of War speaks of another Avatar who commands the orcs. He says the orcs possess something the Rallosians do not. They possess tactics. I agree. We will take their tactics and use them.
Day 104, 289 AS:
The General has rallied all five thousand score of the Rallosians. He says it is time to destroy the world.
I agree.
Books
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 279 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 100, 279 AS:
The people are soft. I spent too much time training soldiers. I did not see the rest of the people need to be made into Rallosians, too.
We will not live like beasts as our forefathers had. I will see to this, for I am the General's Lieutenant.
Day 160, 279 AS:
Oggok will no longer suffer incompetence. We will have a grand city as we deserve.
This will require the hard work from everyone - man, woman, child. Those who will not shoulder the burden will suffer.
Day 24, 283 AS:
Those that cannot fight will craft. Those that cannot craft will supply food. Those that cannot supply food will be fed to the trolls.
Those the trolls will not eat will, I will gut open and remove from the city. I have moved many today. I will continue. Oggok has no room for the useless.
Day 298, 284 AS:
The city is being built under the eye of the General and myself. He wants it done faster.
I can make the people move faster. We will leave Oggok behind as a testament to our home. Soon enough we will destroy the lesser races and take Norrath. For now, we will build. Then we will destroy.
Day 473, 284 AS:
The Avatar does not want the temple to Zek rebuilt. He says we must battle. I say we must show our greatness to the nothing races.
The General agrees with the Avatar and he his stricken me across the face, taking my eye. He is my General, so he may take my eye if he wishes.
Day 41, 287 AS:
The new houses have been built. The people have been moved into the homes according to station and rank. The Troll cages have been built as well.
The lesser Lieutenants have not trained the Trolls well. They enjoy pain too much. It is a distraction for them. They will be put on leashes, for they are nothing but our dogs.
Day 375, 287 AS:
The General has said it is time for the troops to be split among legions. I am to organize the thousand score troops and give them their mark.
The General says they are to be marked in the name of Tallon and in the name of Vallon. I will see to their branding.
Day 440, 287 AS:
They have been trained well. I killed only but seven of the thousand score for flinching in pain.
A Rallosion will not flinch when branded with searing metal. The lesser races would call this cruelty. The Rallosian calls this their birthright.
Day 77, 289 AS:
Battle plans have been laid. The Avatar of War demands to the General that we acquire more armies. I say to the General that the Second Rallosian Empire is enough. The Avatar of War speaks of another Avatar who commands the orcs. He says the orcs possess something the Rallosians do not. They possess tactics. I agree. We will take their tactics and use them.
Day 104, 289 AS:
The General has rallied all five thousand score of the Rallosians. He says it is time to destroy the world.
I agree.
Books
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS - Page 2 (looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS - Page 3 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS - Page 6 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS - Page 7 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS - Page 10 (looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS - Page 11 (looted in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 21 Feb 2006 at 19:09:51 PST.
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS
Second Edition
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 107, 289 AS:
This world has not known the Rallosians for many centuries. It is time for the world to remember.
We no longer suffer the curse of the Rathe. Now we will have our vengeance upon Norrath. The warning horns have been sounded for five hours. I have never heard anything more beautiful.
Day 120, 289 AS:
The Feerrott has been our homeland for centuries. Nature has reclaimed it in our absence. We have returned. We will take it back.
The bones of walking ancestors will no longer disturb the living as the Army moves forward.
Day 140, 289 AS:
The General leads us to the south. I am not aware of our direction, but I have instructed my soldiers that they are to destroy everything they see.
We have sighted more lizardmen. They have been destroyed.
Day 160, 289 AS:
The Avatar walks with us and tells us that we will be given even more help.
We do not need help. We are the Rallosian Empire. We do not subjugate. We do not enslave. We annhilate.
Day 170, 289 AS:
The lizardmen have been driven even further south. Many villages have been found and razed, but this is not satisfying.
Our goal is not to kill lizards, it to destroy frogs. And then we kill everything else. We are spending too long in our goal. But our soldiers are obedient.
Day 193, 289 AS:
The soldiers have been tested today. We have reached the forbidden temple and find it filled with life that must be destroyed.
They followed the General's orders given by me. This makes me proud. They did not kill the tentacle-headed creatures that guarded the temple. This does not make me proud.
Day 199, 289 AS:
A week has passed and now we march again. The Avatar and the General spoke with the tentacle-headed creatures.
They will not join our force. Their Avatar of Fear has forbidden us from the temple. We are Rallosians, not dogs. We will leave for now.
They will pay.
Day 240, 289 AS:
My soldiers have reported a cavern leading to a world of nightmares. I have personally ended twenty of their lives.
A Rallosian does not fear anything.
Day 241, 289 AS:
The General has commanded we are not to go near what he calls the Gate.
I do not understand. We are Rallosians. We do as we please. We are Rallosians.
Day 270, 289 AS:
The General has explained to me the deal made between the two Avatars back at the temple.
I tell him that we do not need the Trolls, even as dogs. He has told me that Second Lieutenant Mugreeza will have more information in her tent. I leave for there now.
Books
1st Lieutenant Dergud, 289 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 107, 289 AS:
This world has not known the Rallosians for many centuries. It is time for the world to remember.
We no longer suffer the curse of the Rathe. Now we will have our vengeance upon Norrath. The warning horns have been sounded for five hours. I have never heard anything more beautiful.
Day 120, 289 AS:
The Feerrott has been our homeland for centuries. Nature has reclaimed it in our absence. We have returned. We will take it back.
The bones of walking ancestors will no longer disturb the living as the Army moves forward.
Day 140, 289 AS:
The General leads us to the south. I am not aware of our direction, but I have instructed my soldiers that they are to destroy everything they see.
We have sighted more lizardmen. They have been destroyed.
Day 160, 289 AS:
The Avatar walks with us and tells us that we will be given even more help.
We do not need help. We are the Rallosian Empire. We do not subjugate. We do not enslave. We annhilate.
Day 170, 289 AS:
The lizardmen have been driven even further south. Many villages have been found and razed, but this is not satisfying.
Our goal is not to kill lizards, it to destroy frogs. And then we kill everything else. We are spending too long in our goal. But our soldiers are obedient.
Day 193, 289 AS:
The soldiers have been tested today. We have reached the forbidden temple and find it filled with life that must be destroyed.
They followed the General's orders given by me. This makes me proud. They did not kill the tentacle-headed creatures that guarded the temple. This does not make me proud.
Day 199, 289 AS:
A week has passed and now we march again. The Avatar and the General spoke with the tentacle-headed creatures.
They will not join our force. Their Avatar of Fear has forbidden us from the temple. We are Rallosians, not dogs. We will leave for now.
They will pay.
Day 240, 289 AS:
My soldiers have reported a cavern leading to a world of nightmares. I have personally ended twenty of their lives.
A Rallosian does not fear anything.
Day 241, 289 AS:
The General has commanded we are not to go near what he calls the Gate.
I do not understand. We are Rallosians. We do as we please. We are Rallosians.
Day 270, 289 AS:
The General has explained to me the deal made between the two Avatars back at the temple.
I tell him that we do not need the Trolls, even as dogs. He has told me that Second Lieutenant Mugreeza will have more information in her tent. I leave for there now.
Books
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 271, 289:
The Rallosians will no longer take direction from a frightened old man. My General has chosen Dergud's successor wisely - Me.
His head will be atop my standard flag to let the soldiers know that weakness will not be tolerated. No one is too young to die. No one is too old.
Day 409, 289: The final lizardman village has been slaughtered. Their death squeals filled the trees. This raised the soldier's morale to all time heights. I will not tolerate unhappy soliders under my command. Any soldier that is unhappy will have their midsection cut open and dragged at the end of the marching line.
Day 3, 290:
The Feerrott is nearly ours. I have sent four platoons to find the last of those who remain within marsh.
The General has ordered us to return to Oggok. We will celebrate the first of many victories.
Day 75, 290:
We have tasted victory and it is sweeter than blood. Oggok is no more. What stands is now Rallos, the capital city of the Rallosian Empire.
We are not stupid beasts that stomp across the land.
We leave tomorrow to show the Frogloks that we are horrible beasts that will stomp across the skulls of all who are not Rallosian.
Day 77, 290:
Rallos lies behind us by many leagues. The marsh is quiet. No sounds of birds chirping. No sounds of splashing in the pools. No sounds of frogs croaking.
Soon, this will change. We will hear plenty of Frogs croaking. Soon.
Day 200, 290:
Boredom is settling in. I cannot stand it. I have not killed an opponent in seven days.
I am tiring of killing my soldiers. Their obedience makes them too easy. I will push them harder.
Day 272, 290:
I have been left in command. The General has taken several platoons and leaves with the Avatar.
I have been given explicit orders. My General knows they will be followed. Our course of direction changes slightly.
Day 441, 290:
The troll dogs smelled them before we could hear them. Dergud had wasted a resource with his foolish pride.
The trolls are worth their weight in gold. They eat a lot, but they will eat their own if they get too hungry. They are excellent hounds. And now, we have found more.
Day 24, 291:
The Troll villages have been razed. Those that did not come willingly are being kept in the larders for the ones who did.
They will be kept on leashes and placed at the front. These beasts will serve their purpose for as long we are within this dismal swamp.
Day 70, 290:
The troops need to see action. They have already slaughtered one third of the trolls in their frustrations. This will not be tolerated.
Were we not so close to Gukta, I would give the troops a lesson in obedience.
I understand them, however. We will all feel much better once we are wading in the blood of the Frogloks instead of this brackish water.
Books
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS - Page 5 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS - Page 6 (plundered from a plant at -81, -2, 377 in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS - Page 8 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS - Page 10 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS - Page 11 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS - Page 12 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 5 Feb 2006 at 15:45:40 PST.
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 289 AS
Second Edition
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 271, 289:
The Rallosians will no longer take direction from a frightened old man. My General has chosen Dergud's successor wisely - Me.
His head will be atop my standard flag to let the soldiers know that weakness will not be tolerated. No one is too young to die. No one is too old.
Day 409, 289: The final lizardman village has been slaughtered. Their death squeals filled the trees. This raised the soldier's morale to all time heights. I will not tolerate unhappy soliders under my command. Any soldier that is unhappy will have their midsection cut open and dragged at the end of the marching line.
Day 3, 290:
The Feerrott is nearly ours. I have sent four platoons to find the last of those who remain within marsh.
The General has ordered us to return to Oggok. We will celebrate the first of many victories.
Day 75, 290:
We have tasted victory and it is sweeter than blood. Oggok is no more. What stands is now Rallos, the capital city of the Rallosian Empire.
We are not stupid beasts that stomp across the land.
We leave tomorrow to show the Frogloks that we are horrible beasts that will stomp across the skulls of all who are not Rallosian.
Day 77, 290:
Rallos lies behind us by many leagues. The marsh is quiet. No sounds of birds chirping. No sounds of splashing in the pools. No sounds of frogs croaking.
Soon, this will change. We will hear plenty of Frogs croaking. Soon.
Day 200, 290:
Boredom is settling in. I cannot stand it. I have not killed an opponent in seven days.
I am tiring of killing my soldiers. Their obedience makes them too easy. I will push them harder.
Day 272, 290:
I have been left in command. The General has taken several platoons and leaves with the Avatar.
I have been given explicit orders. My General knows they will be followed. Our course of direction changes slightly.
Day 441, 290:
The troll dogs smelled them before we could hear them. Dergud had wasted a resource with his foolish pride.
The trolls are worth their weight in gold. They eat a lot, but they will eat their own if they get too hungry. They are excellent hounds. And now, we have found more.
Day 24, 291:
The Troll villages have been razed. Those that did not come willingly are being kept in the larders for the ones who did.
They will be kept on leashes and placed at the front. These beasts will serve their purpose for as long we are within this dismal swamp.
Day 70, 290:
The troops need to see action. They have already slaughtered one third of the trolls in their frustrations. This will not be tolerated.
Were we not so close to Gukta, I would give the troops a lesson in obedience.
I understand them, however. We will all feel much better once we are wading in the blood of the Frogloks instead of this brackish water.
Books
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS - Page 3 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS - Page 4 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS - Page 5 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS - Page 6 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS - Page 7 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS - Page 8 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 3 Feb 2006 at 20:06:33 PST.
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS
Second Edition
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 3, 290:
We have met our first Frogs today. The battle did not last long.
It has been too long since we last slaughtered any one. Praise Rallos that there are more where these ones came from.
Day 74, 290:
We are being harassed on all ends. These Frogs don't understand that we are Rallosians.
We will not be defeated. It is not possible.
Let them skirmish all they like. It will make no difference in the end.
Day 102, 290:
The first wave has passed. They are now sending the next wave. Riding upon the backs of lizard creatures, they believe they will beat us.
Let them come. They have only seen our trolls, not the true Rallosians.
Day 141, 290:
We are running out of our beasts. The trolls are no match for cooperation of the Frogloks.
I have played my hand by showing the Frogs one troop unit. We are now the proud owners of thousands of Froglok knights. Our food supplies will last for years.
Day 159, 290:
I have sent a Froglok back to his home. He will send the message to their people.
Our terms are this - Open the gates and we will slaughter them quickly. Hold out, and we will take our time.
I took the messenger's eyes as a receipt that he will deliver the message.
Day 163, 290:
A messenger has arrived from Rallos. We are to stay where we are and fortify the area.
This spot we stand at will be our base of operations during the push into Gukta.
The siege will continue once the General has arrived.
Day 390, 290:
The messages come more regularly now. The General is close. He, with the Avatar of War, has visited with some foreigners.
I do not understand, but he is my General. I trust his wisdom as long as I am part of the slaughter.
Day 90, 291:
The Frogloks have mistaken our patience for weakness.
I must inform them that we are Rallosians. We are not weak like they are. I have opened the gates to our fort. I invite them inside to lay waste to our camp.
Day 188, 290:
The impaled corpses fill the swamp as far as I can see. Nowhere can one look and not see Froglok corpses rotting from spears.
This message should be loud enough for the Frogloks. Hopefully, it will be loud enough for the world.
Day 307, 290:
Have they no sense? They still keep coming. And we still keep slaughtering them.
I hope their numbers have not dwindled. I will be sorely disappointed when it comes time to destroy their city if they do not put up a fight.
Books
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 290 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 3, 290:
We have met our first Frogs today. The battle did not last long.
It has been too long since we last slaughtered any one. Praise Rallos that there are more where these ones came from.
Day 74, 290:
We are being harassed on all ends. These Frogs don't understand that we are Rallosians.
We will not be defeated. It is not possible.
Let them skirmish all they like. It will make no difference in the end.
Day 102, 290:
The first wave has passed. They are now sending the next wave. Riding upon the backs of lizard creatures, they believe they will beat us.
Let them come. They have only seen our trolls, not the true Rallosians.
Day 141, 290:
We are running out of our beasts. The trolls are no match for cooperation of the Frogloks.
I have played my hand by showing the Frogs one troop unit. We are now the proud owners of thousands of Froglok knights. Our food supplies will last for years.
Day 159, 290:
I have sent a Froglok back to his home. He will send the message to their people.
Our terms are this - Open the gates and we will slaughter them quickly. Hold out, and we will take our time.
I took the messenger's eyes as a receipt that he will deliver the message.
Day 163, 290:
A messenger has arrived from Rallos. We are to stay where we are and fortify the area.
This spot we stand at will be our base of operations during the push into Gukta.
The siege will continue once the General has arrived.
Day 390, 290:
The messages come more regularly now. The General is close. He, with the Avatar of War, has visited with some foreigners.
I do not understand, but he is my General. I trust his wisdom as long as I am part of the slaughter.
Day 90, 291:
The Frogloks have mistaken our patience for weakness.
I must inform them that we are Rallosians. We are not weak like they are. I have opened the gates to our fort. I invite them inside to lay waste to our camp.
Day 188, 290:
The impaled corpses fill the swamp as far as I can see. Nowhere can one look and not see Froglok corpses rotting from spears.
This message should be loud enough for the Frogloks. Hopefully, it will be loud enough for the world.
Day 307, 290:
Have they no sense? They still keep coming. And we still keep slaughtering them.
I hope their numbers have not dwindled. I will be sorely disappointed when it comes time to destroy their city if they do not put up a fight.
Books
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS - Page 1 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS - Page 2 (shinies in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS - Page 7 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS - Page 9 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS - Page 10 (plundered from a plant at -367, -4, 545 in The Feerrott)
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS - Page 12 (shinies in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 3 Feb 2006 at 20:06:35 PST.
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS
Second Edition
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 307, 290:
The General has joined us. The cheers of the soldiers are deafening.
The General allows this slip in obedience to slide. I will not. Let them roar like beasts today.
Tomorrow I will hang one hundred.
Day 339, 290:
The General explained to me my order. I am to take three divisions into the eastern regions of the Innothule and rouse the remaining Frogloks.
This will cause them to react in accordance with his plans. I do not question. I only obey.
Day 402, 290:
The Frogs have been given too much time to prepare for the invasion. Their defenses have been underestimated.
This does not matter. Our numbers will crush down the walls of Gukta. Their magic means nothing to us.
Day 443, 290:
We have lost ten score in the past month to the Frogs. They have laid the area with traps.
Is this what has happened to their precious honor? Honor will not bring them victory. Only blind obedience will. They will not last long.
Day 470, 290: Their forces have come from the side. We were not prepared. We have lost one score to the frogs. Their numbers have dwindled. The General says this was their last raid. He can tell by watching their desperation. They have now seen both of the Tallon and the Vallon legions. Their desperation will turn to hopelessness.
Day 45, 291:
The Trolls have broken their leashes. The dogs call out to their dead god, Cazic-Thule.
He will not hear them. No one will hear them. They are of no concern to us any more. They have served their purpose.
We will hunt down the rest later and put them out of their misery.
Day 173, 291:
The walls of Gukta stand before us. The Frogloks will have the honor of being the first to fall to the might of the Rallosian Empire.
The smell of their impending doom fills the air. The smell of their fear thickens it.
It is a good day for them to die.
Day 202, 291:
The walls have toppled. The Frogloks lie at our feet. They have taken from our numbers. We have taken from their future.
The fighting continues as I record this. It will not last for long. I will step forward into the fray and claim my trophies.
Lieutenant Danarg will stay behind and see that not one Frog escapes. They will all die.
Day 245, 291:
There are no more Frogs within Gukta. The Rallosian Empire has brought to them the pain and destruction they deserved.
Their numbers were far less than the General expected. There were no eggs to smash in front of the mothers and fathers.
I believe something may not be right.
Day 331, 291:
I have sent word to Lieutenant Danarg that Gukta has been taken and the destruction has begun.
He is to tell the General that our first battle is done. He is to tell the General that I will give my debriefing.
Gukta is in ruins. Gukta is no more. The Frogloks have been wiped from the face of Norrath.
Books
1st Lieutenant Mugreeza, 291 AS This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Day 307, 290:
The General has joined us. The cheers of the soldiers are deafening.
The General allows this slip in obedience to slide. I will not. Let them roar like beasts today.
Tomorrow I will hang one hundred.
Day 339, 290:
The General explained to me my order. I am to take three divisions into the eastern regions of the Innothule and rouse the remaining Frogloks.
This will cause them to react in accordance with his plans. I do not question. I only obey.
Day 402, 290:
The Frogs have been given too much time to prepare for the invasion. Their defenses have been underestimated.
This does not matter. Our numbers will crush down the walls of Gukta. Their magic means nothing to us.
Day 443, 290:
We have lost ten score in the past month to the Frogs. They have laid the area with traps.
Is this what has happened to their precious honor? Honor will not bring them victory. Only blind obedience will. They will not last long.
Day 470, 290: Their forces have come from the side. We were not prepared. We have lost one score to the frogs. Their numbers have dwindled. The General says this was their last raid. He can tell by watching their desperation. They have now seen both of the Tallon and the Vallon legions. Their desperation will turn to hopelessness.
Day 45, 291:
The Trolls have broken their leashes. The dogs call out to their dead god, Cazic-Thule.
He will not hear them. No one will hear them. They are of no concern to us any more. They have served their purpose.
We will hunt down the rest later and put them out of their misery.
Day 173, 291:
The walls of Gukta stand before us. The Frogloks will have the honor of being the first to fall to the might of the Rallosian Empire.
The smell of their impending doom fills the air. The smell of their fear thickens it.
It is a good day for them to die.
Day 202, 291:
The walls have toppled. The Frogloks lie at our feet. They have taken from our numbers. We have taken from their future.
The fighting continues as I record this. It will not last for long. I will step forward into the fray and claim my trophies.
Lieutenant Danarg will stay behind and see that not one Frog escapes. They will all die.
Day 245, 291:
There are no more Frogs within Gukta. The Rallosian Empire has brought to them the pain and destruction they deserved.
Their numbers were far less than the General expected. There were no eggs to smash in front of the mothers and fathers.
I believe something may not be right.
Day 331, 291:
I have sent word to Lieutenant Danarg that Gukta has been taken and the destruction has begun.
He is to tell the General that our first battle is done. He is to tell the General that I will give my debriefing.
Gukta is in ruins. Gukta is no more. The Frogloks have been wiped from the face of Norrath.
Books
3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Entry 14:
We march through the Feerott. It is a good march. It is a quiet march. Nothing lives within the Feerrott since we have last passed through. The General personally leads us. The Arm of Vallon marches behind us. The Rathetear Mountains is our destination. We will stomp on the bones of the gods we once defeated.
This time they cannot stop us.
Entry 17:
We have changed course in the march. The forgotten temple of Cazic-Thule is within sight.
The General tells us in command that the Amygdalans will join our ranks or they will be destroyed.
I pray to Rallos that they refuse to join us.
Entry 32:
We have entered the foothills of the Mountains of the fallen Rathe. The Amygdalans have refused to add their numbers to our ranks.
Let them hide in the temple for as long as they wish. It will be their tomb. For now, we will take the land of our forefather's defeat and turn it into victory.
Entry 40:
The General has detached us from the Arm of Vallon. The Arm, hundreds of scores in number, will continue marching north.
They are to cross the Lake of Tears. Then they are to annihilate the gnolls. The Arm of Vallon will conquer the Karana plains. There is no question this will be done.
Entry 57:
My command, led by the General himself, have easily taken the Rathetear Mountains. The Hill Giants recognized our superiority and bowed to our will. The lizardmen have been eradicated.
If I listen closely, I can still hear the sound of the dead gods of the earth weeping. The Rallosians are conquering Norrath. Their curse has failed.
Entry 61:
Taking the Hill Giants with us, the General will no longer tolerate the insolence of the Amygdalans. Their claims of counsel received from the Avatar of Fear are worthless lies.
Their Avatar would never have allowed us to capture the Gate leading to their dead god's plane. The only true Avatar is the one that inspires us - the Avatar of War.
Entry 67:
When I was a runtling, my mother's mother told me of the temple of Fear. She claimed it was filled with unimaginable nightmares waiting to destroy the world. She was wrong.
NOW it is filled with nightmares. Us. The Rallosians.
Entry 79:
The final Amygdalan has fallen to the black blade of the General. The ones we have captured have been forced to watch as we begin to tear down their precious temple.
They incessantly chant prayers to the god of green mist. If their god cannot stop us from tearing down their place of worship, what makes them believe their god will save their worthless hides?
Entry 83:
This great temple lies in ruins. All that stands is the sacred tomb the Amydalans pray to at the center of this temple.
We received word that Guk is being scourged as we speak. The split-pawed gnolls have been exterminated. The Plains are ours. Freeport is about to fall.
The General is about to enter the heart of the temple and personally defile the tentacled one's most holy of all relics - the Forbidden Sarcophagus. When he has done so, the Rallosian Empire will know that we have conquered one half of the world. The other half will follow.
Entry 84:
Bring this journal to your commanding officer, Rallosian. They must know of the fate of General Urduuk. When the box was opened, a green mist oozed out, crawling into the General's nostrils. He barely had time to grasp his throat before falling over dead. One by one, thousands of Rallosians suffered the same fate. I sealed myself away inside a nearby stone coffin before the vapors reached me. It will not be long before I run out of air, for neither air or Green Mist can enter this casket.
I will die as a Rallosian inside this tomb. I will not die as a forever-cured ogre outside to the Green Mist.
Books
3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook - Page 4 (shinies in The Feerrott)
3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook - Page 5 (plundered from a reed at -530, -7, 201 in The Feerrott)
3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook - Page 6 (shinies in The Feerrott)
3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook - Page 10 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook - Page 11 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook - Page 12 (shinies or looted in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 5 Feb 2006 at 16:48:18 PST.
3rd Lieutenant Gerrog - Logbook
Second Edition
This book is the journal of a very important Lieutenant in the Second Rallosian Empire.
Entry 14:
We march through the Feerott. It is a good march. It is a quiet march. Nothing lives within the Feerrott since we have last passed through. The General personally leads us. The Arm of Vallon marches behind us. The Rathetear Mountains is our destination. We will stomp on the bones of the gods we once defeated.
This time they cannot stop us.
Entry 17:
We have changed course in the march. The forgotten temple of Cazic-Thule is within sight.
The General tells us in command that the Amygdalans will join our ranks or they will be destroyed.
I pray to Rallos that they refuse to join us.
Entry 32:
We have entered the foothills of the Mountains of the fallen Rathe. The Amygdalans have refused to add their numbers to our ranks.
Let them hide in the temple for as long as they wish. It will be their tomb. For now, we will take the land of our forefather's defeat and turn it into victory.
Entry 40:
The General has detached us from the Arm of Vallon. The Arm, hundreds of scores in number, will continue marching north.
They are to cross the Lake of Tears. Then they are to annihilate the gnolls. The Arm of Vallon will conquer the Karana plains. There is no question this will be done.
Entry 57:
My command, led by the General himself, have easily taken the Rathetear Mountains. The Hill Giants recognized our superiority and bowed to our will. The lizardmen have been eradicated.
If I listen closely, I can still hear the sound of the dead gods of the earth weeping. The Rallosians are conquering Norrath. Their curse has failed.
Entry 61:
Taking the Hill Giants with us, the General will no longer tolerate the insolence of the Amygdalans. Their claims of counsel received from the Avatar of Fear are worthless lies.
Their Avatar would never have allowed us to capture the Gate leading to their dead god's plane. The only true Avatar is the one that inspires us - the Avatar of War.
Entry 67:
When I was a runtling, my mother's mother told me of the temple of Fear. She claimed it was filled with unimaginable nightmares waiting to destroy the world. She was wrong.
NOW it is filled with nightmares. Us. The Rallosians.
Entry 79:
The final Amygdalan has fallen to the black blade of the General. The ones we have captured have been forced to watch as we begin to tear down their precious temple.
They incessantly chant prayers to the god of green mist. If their god cannot stop us from tearing down their place of worship, what makes them believe their god will save their worthless hides?
Entry 83:
This great temple lies in ruins. All that stands is the sacred tomb the Amydalans pray to at the center of this temple.
We received word that Guk is being scourged as we speak. The split-pawed gnolls have been exterminated. The Plains are ours. Freeport is about to fall.
The General is about to enter the heart of the temple and personally defile the tentacled one's most holy of all relics - the Forbidden Sarcophagus. When he has done so, the Rallosian Empire will know that we have conquered one half of the world. The other half will follow.
Entry 84:
Bring this journal to your commanding officer, Rallosian. They must know of the fate of General Urduuk. When the box was opened, a green mist oozed out, crawling into the General's nostrils. He barely had time to grasp his throat before falling over dead. One by one, thousands of Rallosians suffered the same fate. I sealed myself away inside a nearby stone coffin before the vapors reached me. It will not be long before I run out of air, for neither air or Green Mist can enter this casket.
I will die as a Rallosian inside this tomb. I will not die as a forever-cured ogre outside to the Green Mist.
Books
A History of the Sporconid This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
Thousands of years ago, a group of brilliant iksar druids sought a power unlike any other possessed by their people. They tapped into a deep, ancient power that drew on a very different aspect of nature.
This power is the root of decay - truly a mixture of nature and shadow power. Where most natural power gives energy and life and growth, this power sucks it away. Some powers of wardens and furies draws on this in small doses, but none plunge straight into it the way that these iksar did.
They might have had the world at their feet if the nature of the magic hadn't slowly drained them of their mental power. They fed more and more on it, and as they did, they lost more of their mental acuity and of their physical form.
Soon, they had little more will or reason than fungi, and their bodies had grown to resemble their intellects; ashen skin covered in slime-like glaze. A small growth protruded from their head, and as time passed, it swelled and swelled until it resembled a mushroom cap.
Today we know these beasts as the sporconids, and they dwell in the muck and near Dragon Drool Lake. Though they may resemble giant mushrooms, they have a measure of sentience, and an undeniable power at their finger tips. Fortunately, they don't have the guile to harness this power fully.
And so we see what can result from harnessing a power that is not fully understood. What might have been a world devastating force became the idle plaything of a childlike, simplistic race of swamp dwellers.
Should the sporconids ever once again realize what they have in their hands, and find a way to apply it fully, all of Norrath might be on their knees before them. Fortunately, they would need an intellect magnitudes greater than their own to do so.
Books
A Passenger's Journal This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
The boat crashed, I'm not sure how, all I know is it did. I cannot gather my thoughts enough to figure it out. My body is sore and my mind fuzzy. I must've suffered a blow to the head. Things are still somewhat chaotic, at least they are to me. After I gather my sense I will begin to look for more survivors.
I have yet to find other survivors, but I also cannot find all of the boat. Who knows where other people may have washed up. Though this land is foreign to me, I get an odd feeling that I am supposed to be here. Only now have I realized that I do not recall to where I had originally planned on taking this boat. I will resume my explorations in the morning.
I found supplies and luggage, but still no survivors. I am constantly looking inland. My gut urges me away from this shipwreck, though I fear what dangers may lurk inland.
I have decided to go inland and leave the wreck behind. However, my resolve is weak. I cannot bring myself to ignore the thought that I might yet find more objects of use among the wreckage. If I go inland, I may need more supplies.
I don't know why I didn't just go inland. I found it today…staring up at me, and suddenly became aware of a voice within my own mind. Or, became aware of my voice within someone else's mind. It is so hard to look at, yet I cannot avert my eyes. It was the necklace that gave it away…my grandmother gave me that necklace. My face, however bloated and discolored, became easier to recognize at that point… Tanath, help me.
That took much longer than it ever did during our tests. I have, however, finally pushed whoever invaded my mind into submission. I would wager that it took longer than in the tests because of the trauma I most likely suffered during the boat wreck. It wasn't until we stumbled upon his own body that he finally realized he was dead. Lucky break for me, I guess.
One of the boxes he gathered while in control of my body did contain the Essence Culler; given what happened with him I was certain it was nearby. I am still curious as to what powered it. That will have to wait, though, my search is more important right now.
Blasted bandits. They sliced my legs and left me for dead. I'd be more upset if they hadn't sped directly into a group of gremlins. Not two hundred feet from where they left me I watched the gremlins slaughter them all. Tanath, I am sure they will send you after me. Our moment is not lost, merely delayed.
Books
Adventures of Jorbo and Mappy This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "Adventures of Jorbo and Mappy ". It is the story of two halfling boys and how they happened upon some exciting adventures.
One day, Jorbo and Mappy decided to have an exciting adventure and visit far off lands. Packing their bags, they told their moms what they were about to do. With a kiss to their forehead, both mothers gave the two boys their blessing.
It wasn't too long after they began their journey that they were accosted by an orc. The orc told the two boys that they could not cross the bridge until they both told him a joke. If the joke wasn't funny, he would throw them off of the bridge into the water below.
Below their feet was a lake filled with the deadliest fish ever seen in all of Norrath. The lake boiled and bubbled with the fish anticipating their next meal. Jorbo started with a joke about why the duck crossed the lake. When he got to the punchline, the orc said he heard that one before, and took another drink from his jum-jum mug.
Mappy knew if they were going to escape from this wild predicament, he would have to make up a joke no one ever heard before. He looked at the orc and said, "What does the farmer say when he can't find his rake?" The orc looked confused and said he didn't know. When Mappy gave the punchline, "Where's my rake?", the orc started laughing so hard he fell over into the lake.
Then the orc splashed into the lake, all the fish swam away from him. Behind them, they two friends could hear the sound of other orcs running to see what happened, so they left. Knowing they would be taken prisoner in a big castle if they were seen, they ran for the biggest tree they could find and climbed it as fast as they could.
When they were up in the tree, Jorbo and Mappy started getting hungry. They pulled out the food they brought with them and ate it all. Still hungry, they saw a beehive hanging from one of the branches. Digging inside they dug out a handful of honey and had that for desert. That's when little bumblebee bixies swarmed out and started scolding them.
Knowing they would get in trouble if the bixies told their mothers about taking things without asking, they jumped out of the tree and started running. A short while later, they had escaped both the bixies and the orcs inside a crude shelter buried beneath a hillside. What they didn't know was that the little house wasn't empty.
Inside the house was a wicked old witch who called out to them. This witch had evil magical powers, for she knew their names. She then began asking them mysterious questions about what they were doing, and many questions about their mothers. Soon enough, the two friends realized that she was going to use this information in some horrible spell.
Jorbo and Mappy became very quiet, politely refusing to answer any more questions. At that moment, the witch tried used her magical powers and made a strawberry cake appear in her oven. She offered it to the two boys, and being fully under her spell, they ate half of the cake. Coming to their senses when they were finished eating, they said "thank you" and left to explore even further.
The two friends, barely escaping a horrible fate, realized they needed to be more careful, for the world was very dangerous. Behind them a voice told them that they were quite right. Turning around, they saw that the speaker was an adult halfling. The interesting thing about him was that he had scales like a lizard covering his entire body. Who was this mysterious halfling? Well, that's a tale for another day.
Books
Alliz Evol Ew This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is a folktale concerning the lizard people of the Feerrott.
This is a story that tremors in the earth like the worm of below. It splits the tail as it does the tongue.
This is a truth that can become a lie if it is spoken too much so beware. Listen to the tale and you will know.
Choose your Ew and you shall know. Know the Alliz Evol Ew.
The many worlds wrap around us like the smell of the swamp on our tongue. The world with the five moons and the two moons are only real.
The worlds that are not real do not exist until they do. The world of the shattered moon and the world of no moons and all moons do not exist.
The Alliz Evol Ew know this. And we know they are real.
The fourth secret is not known to the Tae Ew. This is what fills our heart with the slowness of night.
Ew can be felt by all. Ew is where the hunger is filled. When we walk the world of Ew as one mind, we no longer have the consuming within our guts.
The Tae feed their hunger upon Evol. This will no longer be when we are all within Ew.
We are one within the Ew. All that is and all that can be is within the Ew.
As the warmth of the sun leaves our body, we make a new one within the Ew. All are now within the Ew. All that are Evol.
None that are Tae.
In the Ew we thrive as one. In the world of the two moons that will not be, we are taken to the false secret of the Tae.
Within the eggshell, we gaze upon the lie of the Tae. It does not frighten us for we know of the true Ew.
We are given to false secret and we are consumed by the hunger of the Tae. The Evol become smaller within the two moon world, but we become bigger within the Ew.
We Evol are no longer Onu. The Onu will be as one. In the Ew, we are greater than all alone.
If we are not dead enough for life, are we not alive enough for death? We are two and we are one and we are two. The Evol are two, for the worlds can become as one.
The Alliz Evol Ew walk in the waking world as the Evol. The Alliz Evol Ew walk in the sleeping world as Alliz Ew Saur. They are the same. We are Onu.
The soft land with the water is no more than the water with the soft land. They are barriers between worlds, just like the Ew and the Here.
Two that cross at the same time, these world. Alliz are two. Evol are two. We Alliz Evol Ew are in the Here. We Alliz Ew Saur are in the Here.
We are many and we are one.
Our numbers are given to the false secret of the Tae. Our numbers are given to the ogres and the trolls and the furry worms.
We grow smaller as the Alliz Evol Ew. We grow larger as the Alliz Ew Saur. We Evol stand within our home of water and bog.
We Saur move between the earth and wind and will be with we Evol.
We Evol no longer live within the Ew. We live only within the Here.
The secret given to use by the multi-color lizard stand before us.
We are not Alliz Onu. We are Alliz Evol Ew. We are not Alliz Tae Ew. We are Alliz Ew Saur. Our fourth secret will be shown to the false fourth secret of the Tae.
Then we will be Alliz Onu.
We are the Alliz Ew Saur and we are the Alliz Evol Ew. The Tae see us at the same time.
We do not see their secret. Their eggshell is empty of yolk. They have no Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel.
Their truth has been spoken too much and now becomes a lie.
Books
Alliz Evol Ew This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Alliz Evol Ew - Page 5 (plundered from a plant at -593, -2, 217 in The Feerrott)
Alliz Evol Ew - Page 6 (plundered from a plant at -42, 5, -5 in The Feerrott)
Alliz Evol Ew - Page 10 (shinies in The Feerrott)
Alliz Evol Ew - Page 11 (shinies in The Feerrott)
Alliz Evol Ew - Page 12 (shinies in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 3 Feb 2006 at 17:44:38 PST.
Alliz Evol Ew Second Edition
This is a folktale concerning the lizard people of the Feerrott.
This is a story that tremors in the earth like the worm of below. It splits the tail as it does the tongue.
This is a truth that can become a lie if it is spoken too much so beware. Listen to the tale and you will know.
Choose your Ew and you shall know. Know the Alliz Evol Ew.
The many worlds wrap around us like the smell of the swamp on our tongue. The world with the five moons and the two moons are only real.
The worlds that are not real do not exist until they do. The world of the shattered moon and the world of no moons and all moons do not exist.
The Alliz Evol Ew know this. And we know they are real.
The fourth secret is not known to the Tae Ew. This is what fills our heart with the slowness of night.
Ew can be felt by all. Ew is where the hunger is filled. When we walk the world of Ew as one mind, we no longer have the consuming within our guts.
The Tae feed their hunger upon Evol. This will no longer be when we are all within Ew.
We are one within the Ew. All that is and all that can be is within the Ew.
As the warmth of the sun leaves our body, we make a new one within the Ew. All are now within the Ew. All that are Evol.
None that are Tae.
In the Ew we thrive as one. In the world of the two moons that will not be, we are taken to the false secret of the Tae.
Within the eggshell, we gaze upon the lie of the Tae. It does not frighten us for we know of the true Ew.
We are given to false secret and we are consumed by the hunger of the Tae. The Evol become smaller within the two moon world, but we become bigger within the Ew.
We Evol are no longer Onu. The Onu will be as one. In the Ew, we are greater than all alone.
If we are not dead enough for life, are we not alive enough for death? We are two and we are one and we are two. The Evol are two, for the worlds can become as one.
The Alliz Evol Ew walk in the waking world as the Evol. The Alliz Evol Ew walk in the sleeping world as Alliz Ew Saur. They are the same. We are Onu.
The soft land with the water is no more than the water with the soft land. They are barriers between worlds, just like the Ew and the Here.
Two that cross at the same time, these world. Alliz are two. Evol are two. We Alliz Evol Ew are in the Here. We Alliz Ew Saur are in the Here.
We are many and we are one.
Our numbers are given to the false secret of the Tae. Our numbers are given to the ogres and the trolls and the furry worms.
We grow smaller as the Alliz Evol Ew. We grow larger as the Alliz Ew Saur. We Evol stand within our home of water and bog.
We Saur move between the earth and wind and will be with we Evol.
We Evol no longer live within the Ew. We live only within the Here.
The secret given to use by the multi-color lizard stand before us.
We are not Alliz Onu. We are Alliz Evol Ew. We are not Alliz Tae Ew. We are Alliz Ew Saur. Our fourth secret will be shown to the false fourth secret of the Tae.
Then we will be Alliz Onu.
We are the Alliz Ew Saur and we are the Alliz Evol Ew. The Tae see us at the same time.
We do not see their secret. Their eggshell is empty of yolk. They have no Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel.
Their truth has been spoken too much and now becomes a lie.
Books
Alliz Onu This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Alliz Onu - Page 7 (plundered from a plant at -120, 7, -54 in The Feerrott)
Alliz Onu - Page 9 (shinies in The Feerrott)
Alliz Onu - Page 10 (shinies in The Feerrott)
Alliz Onu - Page 11 (plundered from a plant at 51, 27, 942 in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 3 Feb 2006 at 20:06:35 PST.
Alliz Onu
Second Edition
This is a folktale concerning the lizard people of Feerrott. It looks as if it was translated from another language.
This is a story made from wind and earth. This is a truth that can become a lie if it is spoken too much, so beware.
Listen to the tale and you will know. Listen with your tongue and you shall see. See how we have been one but are now two. Know the Alliz Onu.
In the land of the five moons, the stars still spoke with us. They taught us the secrets of the marsh. They taught us the secrets of fire.
But the stars did not teach us the secrets of our heart. We could not feed until this secret was known.
Onu is who we were. Onu was what we felt. And this was how we lived.
Many times the wings of the root flies would be used to wipe away our smells. Without the smell of the Onu, we could find the secret of the heart of the Onu.
One must always remember this.
We could not hear the screams, but we knew they were there. We could smell them coming from the great stones that grew with edges.
The Onu knew that within the eggshell of these stones held a secret. We had been given three by the stars, but we could not feed until we owned the fourth.
The Onu with no scent would steal the fourth secret. The egg would be cracked and the mystery revealed.
We Onu with the scent would remain to tend to the clutch. During this time, we would not feed until the fourth secret was known.
We Onu who had opened a hole within the great edged stones would hold our bravery. This is why there was no scent.
We Onu who would hold the clutch could feel the hunger and this we held too.
The horned lizard with four legs and two more above spoke for the stars.
The light of the north sky would follow this great lizard and the lizard would follow it.
The white lizard was there when the night would come and was not there when the day warmed our skin. The hooved lizard would show us the fourth secret.
We now knew the secret of the Onu's heart. The secret was Ew.
We Onu would return from the inside of the stone egg. We Onu would say that we knew the fourth secret.
We Onu knew the secret of the Onu's heart. Now we knew the fourth secret and we knew the fourth secret. There were two that could only be one.
And this is why we Onu are now two.
We Onu knew that the fourth secret could only be known when the day was gone. The secret to our hearts was between our eyes.
And if we could open our heart, we Onu could make the world command our bidding. When we were one being within the world that is not, we feed and we are Evol.
When we are within the world that is, we are Alliz Evol Ew.
We Onu knew that the fourth secret was not for us. The fourth secret is Ew.
The secret will now be Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel. We are the Alliz Onu. We will now be the Alliz Tae Ew.
Now that the secret is known, the secret will be given to and it will give unto us. We can give more if we feed. We feed only on those that do not know Ew and what Ew is now.
Books
Alliz Onu This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is a folktale concerning the lizard people of Feerrott. It looks as if it was translated from another language.
This is a story made from wind and earth. This is a truth that can become a lie if it is spoken too much, so beware.
Listen to the tale and you will know. Listen with your tongue and you shall see. See how we have been one but are now two. Know the Alliz Onu.
In the land of the five moons, the stars still spoke with us. They taught us the secrets of the marsh. They taught us the secrets of fire.
But the stars did not teach us the secrets of our heart. We could not feed until this secret was known.
Onu is who we were. Onu was what we felt. And this was how we lived.
Many times the wings of the root flies would be used to wipe away our smells. Without the smell of the Onu, we could find the secret of the heart of the Onu.
One must always remember this.
We could not hear the screams, but we knew they were there. We could smell them coming from the great stones that grew with edges.
The Onu knew that within the eggshell of these stones held a secret. We had been given three by the stars, but we could not feed until we owned the fourth.
The Onu with no scent would steal the fourth secret. The egg would be cracked and the mystery revealed.
We Onu with the scent would remain to tend to the clutch. During this time, we would not feed until the fourth secret was known.
We Onu who had opened a hole within the great edged stones would hold our bravery. This is why there was no scent.
We Onu who would hold the clutch could feel the hunger and this we held too.
The horned lizard with four legs and two more above spoke for the stars.
The light of the north sky would follow this great lizard and the lizard would follow it.
The white lizard was there when the night would come and was not there when the day warmed our skin. The hooved lizard would show us the fourth secret.
We now knew the secret of the Onu's heart. The secret was Ew.
We Onu would return from the inside of the stone egg. We Onu would say that we knew the fourth secret.
We Onu knew the secret of the Onu's heart. Now we knew the fourth secret and we knew the fourth secret. There were two that could only be one.
And this is why we Onu are now two.
We Onu knew that the fourth secret could only be known when the day was gone. The secret to our hearts was between our eyes.
And if we could open our heart, we Onu could make the world command our bidding. When we were one being within the world that is not, we feed and we are Evol.
When we are within the world that is, we are Alliz Evol Ew.
We Onu knew that the fourth secret was not for us. The fourth secret is Ew.
The secret will now be Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel. We are the Alliz Onu. We will now be the Alliz Tae Ew.
Now that the secret is known, the secret will be given to and it will give unto us. We can give more if we feed. We feed only on those that do not know Ew and what Ew is now.
Books
Alliz Tae Ew This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Alliz Tae Ew - Page 9 (plundered from a pole at -147, 8, 105 in The Feerrott)
Alliz Tae Ew - Page 12 (shinies in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 3 Feb 2006 at 20:06:34 PST.
Alliz Tae Ew
Second Edition
This is a folktale concerning the lizard people of the Feerrott. It looks as if it was translated from another language.
This is a story made from salt whispers so one must check for the scent. This is a truth that can become a lie if it is spoken too much so beware.
Listen to the tale and you will know. Choose your Ew and you shall know. Know the Alliz Tae Ew.
The Evol do not know the secret as we do. We must give this secret with our teeth and our gizzards.
This is the only way, for the secret has shown us. The Evol resist us giving them the secret. There is no other way.
The Evol do as we tell them. We tell them to leave the warmth of the holy site of the fourth secret.
They will walk the lands of flowing sap and running blood and the fanged flies. They must chew the acrid air and have the cold of the night wash over them.
This makes the feeding better.
Not the Tae, not the knowers of the secret, not the givers to the Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel. They are Evol and we are not.
The secret promises that when we are on Onu again, the fourth shall tell us the fifth.
This is us being slow. This is us tasting the air. This is us preparing to feed.
We Alliz Tae Ew know the secret within our heart, but for some the secret is known deeper in their hearts.
And the secret has given a tap-tap-tap to their hearts and their tail holds more water. There are Alliz Tae Ew that must be listened to, for they know the fourth secret.
They know the Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel. They will bring forth the cold night with their gift, we will bring the meat with our sharpened sticks of wood.
We Tae give to the secret and it gives to us. This is known. The secret tells us that we do not need five moons to guide us.
The two full moons will be the honesty that is given to us. The moons that become two from five can only happen if the Tae and Evol slide through the holse that is not there.
And it will.
The five moons are only two and the blood pools are clear. The evershifting land stays as one place. Warmth is in the air.
The fouth secret has given us the truth. The fourth secret must be given to. We must not give only the teeth and the gizzard. There must be more.
The fourth secret is lost to us is the place that once was. Evol children speak that their false fourth secret cannot leave them.
We will birth an eggshell made from sharp edged stones just as it was. The yolk will then fill with the fourth secret and the Evol will know theirs is a lie.
The house of the fourth secret now stands upon the true world. The Tae and the Evol have built the shell.
Now we wait for the yolk to fill. Evol do not know. Our hunger does know. They will stand and we shall show them what we feel.
We will gain from their meat as the secret has shown us.
It is the Temple. It is the home to the secret. The aspects of the secret fill the stones.
We need not chew and smack upon the bones of only the Evol. The secret that stands within the heart has shown us softer meat. We will suck the marrow from ogres and trolls.
We will give the secret to the Evol or we will feed on them. We are Onu. We are Tae. We are the bringers of the Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel Eggshell.
Books
Alliz Tae Ew This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is a folktale concerning the lizard people of the Feerrott. It looks as if it was translated from another language.
This is a story made from salt whispers so one must check for the scent. This is a truth that can become a lie if it is spoken too much so beware.
Listen to the tale and you will know. Choose your Ew and you shall know. Know the Alliz Tae Ew.
The Evol do not know the secret as we do. We must give this secret with our teeth and our gizzards.
This is the only way, for the secret has shown us. The Evol resist us giving them the secret. There is no other way.
The Evol do as we tell them. We tell them to leave the warmth of the holy site of the fourth secret.
They will walk the lands of flowing sap and running blood and the fanged flies. They must chew the acrid air and have the cold of the night wash over them.
This makes the feeding better.
Not the Tae, not the knowers of the secret, not the givers to the Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel. They are Evol and we are not.
The secret promises that when we are on Onu again, the fourth shall tell us the fifth.
This is us being slow. This is us tasting the air. This is us preparing to feed.
We Alliz Tae Ew know the secret within our heart, but for some the secret is known deeper in their hearts.
And the secret has given a tap-tap-tap to their hearts and their tail holds more water. There are Alliz Tae Ew that must be listened to, for they know the fourth secret.
They know the Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel. They will bring forth the cold night with their gift, we will bring the meat with our sharpened sticks of wood.
We Tae give to the secret and it gives to us. This is known. The secret tells us that we do not need five moons to guide us.
The two full moons will be the honesty that is given to us. The moons that become two from five can only happen if the Tae and Evol slide through the holse that is not there.
And it will.
The five moons are only two and the blood pools are clear. The evershifting land stays as one place. Warmth is in the air.
The fouth secret has given us the truth. The fourth secret must be given to. We must not give only the teeth and the gizzard. There must be more.
The fourth secret is lost to us is the place that once was. Evol children speak that their false fourth secret cannot leave them.
We will birth an eggshell made from sharp edged stones just as it was. The yolk will then fill with the fourth secret and the Evol will know theirs is a lie.
The house of the fourth secret now stands upon the true world. The Tae and the Evol have built the shell.
Now we wait for the yolk to fill. Evol do not know. Our hunger does know. They will stand and we shall show them what we feel.
We will gain from their meat as the secret has shown us.
It is the Temple. It is the home to the secret. The aspects of the secret fill the stones.
We need not chew and smack upon the bones of only the Evol. The secret that stands within the heart has shown us softer meat. We will suck the marrow from ogres and trolls.
We will give the secret to the Evol or we will feed on them. We are Onu. We are Tae. We are the bringers of the Kaz'zar'aik'Chuel Eggshell.
Books
Bestest Orc Emperors This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Bestest Orc Emperors - Page 4 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Bestest Orc Emperors - Page 5 (shinies in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Bestest Orc Emperors - Page 7 (looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Bestest Orc Emperors - Page 09 (plundered from bones at 522, -63, 467 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Bestest Orc Emperors - Page 10 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Bestest Orc Emperors - Page 11 (plundered from a barrel at 498, -20, -295 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Discovered on 10 Nov 2005 at 18:38:23 PST.
"Bestest Orc Emperors"
Second Edition
This is some type of chronicle highlighting several orcish kings and their rise to power. Unfortunately it is told from the perspective of an orc.
I am the person who tells stories for the Emperor because I tell the best stories ever.
I was told to write a story down on this so in case I get killed by the Emperor he won't forget all my old stories.
Emperor Fyst told me to write all the stories about the bestest Emperors ever so I will write them down now.
The first of the greatest orc emperors was Emperor Crush.
He was the smartest orc and the most powerfullest orc that ever lived. He lived in this far off place where there were all these trees and stupid elves and stuff.
Emperor Crush built this huge castle with his own hands and let other orcs live inside it with him.
He would go ahead and make everyone of his orcs do all kinds of exercises everyday until they died.
Not all of them died, but a lot of them did! That is how good he was!
He made a really good army out of his orcs and then called them names like Centurion and things like that which meant "Really Good Fighter".
Emperor Crush would be the greatest Emperor any of the orcs would have for a long time.
He would smash all of the elves and he even chopped down all of those stupid trees of theirs.
One day he would fall on a dagger that a dark elf was holding and would die, though.
That would make all of the orcs really mad, so they killed even more stupid elves.
There was no bigger and better Emperor than Crush until Emperor Gash took over a lot of the orcs.
I don't know if he was in the same place that Emperor Crush was, but he had to be because the orcs have always been together.
Emperor Gash would make lots of different armies work together and do some really sneaky things to all the humans.
Emperor Gash didn't just make the orcs do things, he also made all the big dumb ogres do things too.
He said stuff like "Do this or I kill you" and they did, because the ogres are not as good as orcs are.
He also made some big Averturd thing some stuff too, because he was the greatest orc Emperor there ever was.
Emperor Gash was the best Emperor because he had sneakiness and did it on all the stupid other humans.
They gave him lots of money to leave them alone and then he went into the desert. No other orc could come up with something like that.
He made us wait there and said we orcs would go back to the humans when they had more money and take it one day.
Emperor Fyst is our Emperor today and he is the best one to ever lead any orcs.
He was the bestest gladiator in all of the rings. I even made a lot of money off of him when he was fighting.
When he became Emperor I gave him all of my money back and he made me the history person to tell about him.
We used to have another Emperor who was really stupid and did nothing really good.
The old dumb Emperor used to make gladiators fight in front of him whenever he ate dinner. He make Emperor Fyst fight one day and the Emperor killed all of the other orcs.
He then call the stupid emperor mean names and then killed all of the other guards who were told to kill him.
Emperor Fyst then jumped out of the fighting pit and started to fight the dumb emperor.
We all laughed because the dumb emperor didn't even know how to fight. All the dumb emperor knew what do was to take orders.
Emperor Fyst doesn't do that stuff. He is the best fighter ever!
Books
Bestest Orc Emperors This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is some type of chronicle highlighting several orcish kings and their rise to power. Unfortunately it is told from the perspective of an orc.
I am the person who tells stories for the Emperor because I tell the best stories ever.
I was told to write a story down on this so in case I get killed by the Emperor he won't forget all my old stories.
Emperor Fyst told me to write all the stories about the bestest Emperors ever so I will write them down now.
The first of the greatest orc emperors was Emperor Crush.
He was the smartest orc and the most powerfullest orc that ever lived. He lived in this far off place where there were all these trees and stupid elves and stuff.
Emperor Crush built this huge castle with his own hands and let other orcs live inside it with him.
He would go ahead and make everyone of his orcs do all kinds of exercises everyday until they died.
Not all of them died, but a lot of them did! That is how good he was!
He made a really good army out of his orcs and then called them names like Centurion and things like that which meant "Really Good Fighter".
Emperor Crush would be the greatest Emperor any of the orcs would have for a long time.
He would smash all of the elves and he even chopped down all of those stupid trees of theirs.
One day he would fall on a dagger that a dark elf was holding and would die, though.
That would make all of the orcs really mad, so they killed even more stupid elves.
There was no bigger and better Emperor than Crush until Emperor Gash took over a lot of the orcs.
I don't know if he was in the same place that Emperor Crush was, but he had to be because the orcs have always been together.
Emperor Gash would make lots of different armies work together and do some really sneaky things to all the humans.
Emperor Gash didn't just make the orcs do things, he also made all the big dumb ogres do things too.
He said stuff like "Do this or I kill you" and they did, because the ogres are not as good as orcs are.
He also made some big Averturd thing some stuff too, because he was the greatest orc Emperor there ever was.
Emperor Gash was the best Emperor because he had sneakiness and did it on all the stupid other humans.
They gave him lots of money to leave them alone and then he went into the desert. No other orc could come up with something like that.
He made us wait there and said we orcs would go back to the humans when they had more money and take it one day.
Emperor Fyst is our Emperor today and he is the best one to ever lead any orcs.
He was the bestest gladiator in all of the rings. I even made a lot of money off of him when he was fighting.
When he became Emperor I gave him all of my money back and he made me the history person to tell about him.
We used to have another Emperor who was really stupid and did nothing really good.
The old dumb Emperor used to make gladiators fight in front of him whenever he ate dinner. He make Emperor Fyst fight one day and the Emperor killed all of the other orcs.
He then call the stupid emperor mean names and then killed all of the other guards who were told to kill him.
Emperor Fyst then jumped out of the fighting pit and started to fight the dumb emperor.
We all laughed because the dumb emperor didn't even know how to fight. All the dumb emperor knew what do was to take orders.
Emperor Fyst doesn't do that stuff. He is the best fighter ever!
Books
Collected Stories of Serpent Sewer This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
A collection of stories about the Serpent Sewer beneath Freeport. Allegory? Fantasy? Or truth? Who knows? Read Stories Close
The three stories have intriguing titles. One hopes the stories are as compelling. Read "Fooling the Serpent" Read "The Enchanted Serpent" "Read "The Skin of the Serpent" Close
This is the story of the clever frog who fooled the Serpent God that lived in the deepest part of the Serpent Sewer. Continue Story 1 Close
Frog often boasted that he was the smartest creature in the Serpent Sewer. He visited the Serpent God and told him, "If you give me a single oat, I can turn it into an entire feast for you!" The Serpent God was very amused by Frog's boast and gave him the grain. Frog left the Serpent Sewer and found his way to Temple Street, where the ratonga knew of the Serpent God and were very superstitious. The Frog told their leader that the Serpent God had given him a blessed oat and demanded lodging for the night, which the ratongas gladly gave. Continue Story 1 Close
The ratonga gave a feast for the Frog and the blessed grain. In the middle of the night while the slept, the Frog crushed the oat and fed it to a chicken roosting near his bed. In the morning, he sprang up denouncing the ratonga for having stolen the blessed grain! Frightened, the ratonga gave the Frog the chicken and begged him not to tell the Serpent God about the grain. Frog agreed, and took the chicken to the next village where he requested shelter for himself and the sacred chicken of the Serpent God. Continue Story 1 Close
As before, the villagers prepared a feast for the frog and the sacred chicken and gave them shelter. In the middle of the night, Frog killed the chicken and spread its feathers all around the village. In the morning, he cried, "Someone from the village has slain the sacred chicken!" Frightened of the Serpent God, the villagers gave Frog a dozen sheep, which he took with him. As Frog herded the sheep down the road, he passed a man who stood victorious over the body of a viper. "I'll give you these sheep for the viper," said Frog, and so the trade was made. Continue Story 1 Close
At his next stop, Frog told the villagers not to wake the sleeping viper, as it was the son of the Serpent God and had had a busy day. In the morning, when the villagers came to wake them, Frog cried, "Someone has killed the Serpent God's son!" And the villagers were so frightened, they gave Frog all their winter stores of food. Frog had them carry all their food to the Serpent Sewer where he presented it to the Serpent God, showing how he had turned the single oat into an entire feast. Close
This is the story of a clever serpent who met its doom at the hands of an even cleverer human. Continue Story 2 Close
A long time ago when the city of Freeport was new, there lived a beautiful young woman who had many suitors. After toying with this one and flirting with that one, she finally married the richest and most handsome of them. Not long after their marriage, though, he died. Although his widow mourned him, she was soon remarried to another rich and handsome man. He too died suddenly within a week. Continue Story 2 Close
The widow grieved for her second husband, too, but not very long later she married again. The pattern repeated itself time and again. The beautiful young woman always selected the richest and most handsome of her suitors to marry, but within a week of the wedding, her husbands were dead. All told, the beautiful widow had had six husbands within a year's time. She married for the seventh time. Continue Story 2 Close
Her seventh husband was not as rich as the previous six, nor as handsome, but he was extremely clever. He decided that there was some mystery surrounding the beautiful woman and was determined to discover the truth. He watched her closely, and one day followed her as she slipped into a passage leading to the Serpent Sewer. Intrigued, he followed her until she came to the deepest part of the tunnels where she paused and sung a beautiful song. The water churned and suddenly, a large serpent rose from the murky water. Continue Story 2 Close
As her husband watched, the woman raised her arms over her head and turned into a serpent herself, coiling around and around the other serpent. He realized that she was an enchanted serpent, intent upon luring the men of Freeport to a poisonous fate. Having studied at the Academy himself, he knew many spells and cast one upon the serpent and her lover, causing them to turn into a great stone pillar. So he alone of the serpent's seven husbands lived to tell the tale. Close
This is the story of the serpent that was tricked out of its skin. Continue Story 3 Close
Once in the long-ago there lived a young scavenger who often hunted for other people's cast-offs in the sewers beneath the city. He would find bits of this and that, then put them together to create many interesting things. One day as he was hard at work in the Serpent Sewer, he became so engrossed in his work that his torch burnt itself out and he was plunged into darkness. While he considered his predicament, he heard a sweet voice singing, "Serpent I am, and always shall be -- my serpent skin, fall away from me!" Continue Story 3 Close
As his eyes adjusted to the gloom, the inventor noticed a lovely young woman daintily hanging up a large serpent's skin. She was incredibly beautiful. He tiptoed over, took the serpent skin from the wall and hid it in his pocket. When he greeted the young woman, she gasped, "A serpent I am, and always shall be -- my serpent skin, return to me!" But because the skin was in the man's pocket, it could not return to cover her. The woman realized she was somehow trapped. Still, the man seemed nice enough and she accepted his proposal of marriage. Continue Story 3 Close
The man and woman lived very comfortably above ground and eventually they had a son. As the son grew older, he realized his mother was under an enchantment and due to her interest in the Serpent Sewer, realized she was a serpent. But when he asked her about it, she said, "Of course not!" The son asked his father the next day, and his father said, "Yes, she certainly is. I keep her serpent skin in a drawer in our bedroom." When they returned home, he opened the draw and showed his son. Continue Story 3 Close
The next day, the son said to his mother, "I know you are a serpent! I have seen the skin!" And he took his mother to the room and opened the drawer. As soon as she saw the skin, the woman cried, "A serpent I am, and always shall be -- my serpent skin, return to me!" The skin flew from the drawer and enveloped the woman, who thanked her son before slithering away, never to be seen again. Close
Books
Deep Marshes This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
"Deep Marshes." After the sudden invasion of Gukta by the new Rallosian Army, a band of frogloks heads north to seek help.
Without the aid of the Avatar of War, the ogres could never have planned such an attack. Gukta had been the site of many battles over the years, but the force arrayed by General Urduuk proved strongest of all. Now, though they were loathe to do so, the frogloks were on the run. The ogres had never before had such a force, despite their brute strength. No, it was not a newly intelligent ogre that bested the froglok, but the Avatar of War itself.
Down into the tunnels they ran, many clutching the eggs which would be a new generation of froglok. They had had time to clear the hatchery before flight. Though retreat is not the froglok way, the elders knew that living to fight another day and bearing away the eggs would be the better thing for them to do. A small garrison was left to distract the ogres and defend Gukta. The rest hurried into the dark.
"The ogre army will not be content with taking a swamp," said Agakk, one of the elders. "We must send word to the outsiders, to warn them of the danger these ogres cause." "I will go," said Guruup, bowing deeply. "My unit and I will make our way out to Freeport. The Overlord must hear of this villainous turn of events." Agakk nodded. "Yes, I agree. Go at once, Guruup and may Mithaniel Marr protect you."
There are many ways through the woods and so it is with the swamps. Guruup's unit was small, for speed would be their best defense. At Innothule's northernmost point, the froglok unit conferred quickly. If they traveled up through the river valley, they would then need to cut east across the Commonlands to reach Freeport. Or, they could turn west to Qeynos instead. The direct route through the Desert of Ro was not favored, but it had the advantage of being the most direct route to Freeport.
"We must make haste, Guruup," whispered Barab, one of his lieutenants. "Though the Desert is dangerously dry, it would be the way anyone would least likely expect us to take." Guruup nodded and said, "You speak the truth, Barab. Through the Desert of Ro!" They caked their skin with mud to protect it from the hot desert air, then pushed onward. To increase their chances of survival, they subdivided into smaller units that one by one crossed into the unforgiving desert.
Traveling by night to keep out of the sun, the frogloks struggled through the swirling sands. Their skin was soft and supple by nature. Even with a layer of dried mud upon it, the frogloks felt the oppressive dryness in the air that seemed to suck every last ounce of energy from them. Gusts of wind drove the sand into their faces, rubbing them raw. As their skin cracked from lack of moisture, some of the frogloks picked at the scabs that formed almost instantly in the heat, licking their wounds to moisten their tongues with their own blood.
They were a tired, footsore and bedraggled group when they reached Freeport at last. Though many had not survived the harsh crossing, between the heat and the sand giants, more than three-quarters of Guruup's was still unit intact. The frogloks paused briefly to take rooms at a local inn and to cleanse themselves, then they hurried to gain an audience with the Overlord.
An audience with the Overlord is not always granted, and certainly never at the first request. Guruup and his lieutenants waited three days before the Overlord would see them. Even then, it was clear that he was doing so for his own hidden purpose. He met with Guruup in the long hallway and Guruup had to complete his petition before the Overlord reached the opposite end of the hall.
Guruup was unable to convince the Overlord of the seriousness of the ogre forces. "Come now, little one," the Overlord said upon reaching the hall's end. "You have been fighting everyone for control of Grobb -- that is, Gukta -- for many generations. This is another petty squabble; I'm afraid Freeport's military cannot be spared on something like this. You'll have better luck elsewhere." Guruup bowed, concealing his anger as the Overlord exited the hall.
"The Overlord will not get involved," Guruup told the frogloks. "We have rested here long enough; let us proceed now to Qeynos. May the hand of Marr guide us." "May the hand of Marr guide us," Guruup's unit repeated reverently. And so, the frogloks prepared for their next journey: across the Commonlands and through the plains of Karana to reach the city of Qeynos.
Books
Deep Marshes This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
"Deep Marshes." After the sudden invasion of Gukta by the new Rallosian Army, a band of frogloks heads north to seek help. Entry One Put book away.
Without the aid of the Avatar of War, the ogres could never have planned such an attack. Gukta had been the site of many battles over the years, but the force arrayed by General Urduuk proved strongest of all. Now, though they were loathe to do so, the frogloks were on the run. The ogres had never before had such a force, despite their brute strength. No, it was not a newly intelligent ogre that bested the froglok, but the Avatar of War itself. Entry Two Put book away.
Down into the tunnels they ran, many clutching the eggs which would be a new generation of froglok. They had had time to clear the hatchery before flight. Though retreat is not the froglok way, the elders knew that living to fight another day and bearing away the eggs would be the better thing for them to do. A small garrison was left to distract the ogres and defend Gukta. The rest hurried into the dark. Entry Three Put book away.
"The ogre army will not be content with taking a swamp," said Agakk, one of the elders. "We must send word to the outsiders, to warn them of the danger these ogres cause." "I will go," said Guruup, bowing deeply. "My unit and I will make our way out to Freeport. The Overlord must hear of this villainous turn of events." Agakk nodded. "Yes, I agree. Go at once, Guruup and may Mithaniel Marr protect you." Entry Four Put book away.
There are many ways through the woods and so it is with the swamps. Guruup's unit was small, for speed would be their best defense. At Innothule's northernmost point, the froglok unit conferred quickly. If they traveled up through the river valley, they would then need to cut east across the Commonlands to reach Freeport. Or, they could turn west to Qeynos instead. The direct route through the Desert of Ro was not favored, but it had the advantage of being the most direct route to Freeport. Entry Five Put book away.
"We must make haste, Guruup," whispered Barab, one of his lieutenants. "Though the Desert is dangerously dry, it would be the way anyone would least likely expect us to take." Guruup nodded and said, "You speak the truth, Barab. Through the Desert of Ro!" They caked their skin with mud to protect it from the hot desert air, then pushed onward. To increase their chances of survival, they subdivided into smaller units that one by one crossed into the unforgiving desert. Entry Six Put book away.
Traveling by night to keep out of the sun, the frogloks struggled through the swirling sands. Their skin was soft and supple by nature. Even with a layer of dried mud upon it, the frogloks felt the oppressive dryness in the air that seemed to suck every last ounce of energy from them. Gusts of wind drove the sand into their faces, rubbing them raw. As their skin cracked from lack of moisture, some of the frogloks picked at the scabs that formed almost instantly in the heat, licking their wounds to moisten their tongues with their own blood. Entry Seven Put book away.
They were a tired, footsore and bedraggled group when they reached Freeport at last. Though many had not survived the harsh crossing, between the heat and the sand giants, more than three-quarters of Guruup's was still unit intact. The frogloks paused briefly to take rooms at a local inn and to cleanse themselves, then they hurried to gain an audience with the Overlord. Entry Eight Put book away.
An audience with the Overlord is not always granted, and certainly never at the first request. Guruup and his lieutenants waited three days before the Overlord would see them. Even then, it was clear that he was doing so for his own hidden purpose. He met with Guruup in the long hallway and Guruup had to complete his petition before the Overlord reached the opposite end of the hall. Entry Nine Put book away.
Guruup was unable to convince the Overlord of the seriousness of the ogre forces. "Come now, little one," the Overlord said upon reaching the hall's end. "You have been fighting everyone for control of Grobb -- that is, Gukta -- for many generations. This is another petty squabble; I'm afraid Freeport's military cannot be spared on something like this. You'll have better luck elsewhere." Guruup bowed, concealing his anger as the Overlord exited the hall. Entry Ten Put book away.
"The Overlord will not get involved," Guruup told the frogloks. "We have rested here long enough; let us proceed now to Qeynos. May the hand of Marr guide us." "May the hand of Marr guide us," Guruup's unit repeated reverently. And so, the frogloks prepared for their next journey: across the Commonlands and through the plains of Karana to reach the city of Qeynos. Close Book.
Books
Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree - Page 4 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree - Page 5 (shinies in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree - Page 6 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree - Page 10 (plundered from bones at 469, -66, 494 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree - Page 11 (shinies in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree - Page 12 (looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Discovered on 30 Nov 2005 at 21:12:11 PST.
"Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree"
Second Edition
This book is the journal kept by an orc by the name of Garz'gog, and chronicles the time he spent constructing a great bridge within the land known as Zek.
Day 1 - Me the biggest foreman on making the big bridge. Me tell every other orc what to do.
If they don't, I throw them into the water and kick them in the head if they try to get out.
Day 3 - Me send out party to find some stupid droods. They think they hiding, but I know where they is. Me needs to have a droods blood mixed into the mortar for the foundation of the bridge, or it might fall down. Come on! Everyone knows that!
Day 5 -
Have to send centurions out to get the droods now, cause they putting up a good fight. This no make me happy, because the centurions gonna kill all of them.
When they all gone, now I have to use orc blood in the mortar. Me then start running out of workers! AARG!
Day 20 -
Bridge is coming along pretty good. I kicked five orcs in the head today for not making the bridge long enough.
I tell other orcs that the bridge needs to reach the other side for it to work right.
Day 25 -
Emperor Fist came to see the bridge today. He say make it even bigger!
That makes me happy! I like making big bridges, but I really like making even bigger bridges.
The Emperor say he will come back later and see if it is big enough.
Day 29 -
Had to kick more workers in the head for not doing the job right. Throwing in the water and kicking in the head is only reserved for biggest punishment.
Me go outta way to find reasons to give it.
Day 40 - The Emperor liked how big I made it. He say it might be too big, but then I show him all the tricks I put on it. That's when he made a big smile and patted me on the back in front of all the other orcs! Now everyone know how important I am!
Day 50 -
Bridge just about done. Haven't had to kick people in head lately, because they know how important I am.
Sending messenger to tell Emperor that bridge is just like he wanted, and to show all the other tricks I put on the bridge.
Day 55 -
Emperor Fist say he wants demonstration of how good bridge is. Me getting all the archers together to hide them in the small boxes for the demonstration.
Me also getting the oil boiled up to show off how that works, too. The Emperor will think it's the greatest thing ever!
Day 60 -
Emperor has put me in the prison for making bridge too good. The demonstration wiped out 200 centurions and 60 elite guard in five minutes!
Me am very happy, because me thought it would take seven minutes!
Books
Foreman Garz'gog Dyeree This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is the journal kept by an orc by the name of Garz'gog, and chronicles the time he spent constructing a great bridge within the land known as Zek.
Day 1 - Me the biggest foreman on making the big bridge. Me tell every other orc what to do.
If they don't, I throw them into the water and kick them in the head if they try to get out.
Day 3 - Me send out party to find some stupid droods. They think they hiding, but I know where they is. Me needs to have a droods blood mixed into the mortar for the foundation of the bridge, or it might fall down. Come on! Everyone knows that!
Day 5 -
Have to send centurions out to get the droods now, cause they putting up a good fight. This no make me happy, because the centurions gonna kill all of them.
When they all gone, now I have to use orc blood in the mortar. Me then start running out of workers! AARG!
Day 20 -
Bridge is coming along pretty good. I kicked five orcs in the head today for not making the bridge long enough.
I tell other orcs that the bridge needs to reach the other side for it to work right.
Day 25 -
Emperor Fist came to see the bridge today. He say make it even bigger!
That makes me happy! I like making big bridges, but I really like making even bigger bridges.
The Emperor say he will come back later and see if it is big enough.
Day 29 -
Had to kick more workers in the head for not doing the job right. Throwing in the water and kicking in the head is only reserved for biggest punishment.
Me go outta way to find reasons to give it.
Day 40 - The Emperor liked how big I made it. He say it might be too big, but then I show him all the tricks I put on it. That's when he made a big smile and patted me on the back in front of all the other orcs! Now everyone know how important I am!
Day 50 -
Bridge just about done. Haven't had to kick people in head lately, because they know how important I am.
Sending messenger to tell Emperor that bridge is just like he wanted, and to show all the other tricks I put on the bridge.
Day 55 -
Emperor Fist say he wants demonstration of how good bridge is. Me getting all the archers together to hide them in the small boxes for the demonstration.
Me also getting the oil boiled up to show off how that works, too. The Emperor will think it's the greatest thing ever!
Day 60 -
Emperor has put me in the prison for making bridge too good. The demonstration wiped out 200 centurions and 60 elite guard in five minutes!
Me am very happy, because me thought it would take seven minutes!
Books
Good Eatin' This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is a cookbook written by Halasian homemaker in which she details some of the local ethnic food of her homeland.
I've put this book together so other people out there can enjoy my fine cooking.
My husband always tells me there's nothing finer than a plate of my heddice. Sometimes I have to give him a good whallop upside the head as a gentle reminder to tell me, but that's because he's so busy gobbling down what I've made for him.
These recipes are usually what I make for my husband and the wee ones every dinner.
Black Pudding: I always start dinner with a tasty black pudding.
In order to make this meal, you'll first need to go out there and find yourself a black ooze. Slimy little things, they cook up just fine with a couple of spices.
When you're done whacking it with your mace, you'll need to bring it back to kitchen for the cleaning.
Its very important that you clean the ooze really well before you start the cleaning.
There are a bunch of little balls inside the jelly things that you gotta cut out. If you miss even one of them, you'll wind up making the pudding really bitter.
Take my word for it - getting the kiddies to ear it when it's not prepared right is like pulling teeth from a mammoth.
Once you have the ooze cleaned just right, put it in a bowl and start smooshing it with your fists.
Once it's nothing more than jelly, add in a couple fistfuls of flour and start mixing. Add in some crushed ice peppers (the sweet kind, mind you) and then put it in the oven for about an hour.
When it's done, you'll have a nice brandy treat that everyone will praise you for.
Butterscotch: You can't have a good pudding without having something to wash it down with.
Always make sure to offer the people eating your food a good libation. My specialty is a tasty butterscotch.
Take a pound of butter and melt it in a large stein. Pour in some scotch until the container has been filled and give it a good shake or two.
If you're serving to wee kiddies, just leave the scotch out.
Heddice: There's only one meal that should ever be served at dinner, and that's a hearty heddice.
Now, I know everyone's got their own opinion on how it should be prepared, but once you try my recipe you'll never prepare it any other way.
To start, you need to go out there and whack a polar bear. Make sure you get all meat and the head too. That's the most important part.
Now get yourself some oatmeal and a seal's heart (look for one about as big as your hand). Crush them together, adding in chopped onion for extra flavor. Once you've made a big 'ole mush out of it, set it to the side. Now take a couple of wolf livers and marinade them in chicken stock. If you can handle even more flavor, mix in some ice peppers (not the sweet kind... that's just disgusting).
Finally, get some chicken fat and melt it over a fire. At the same time, start digging out all of the gunk inside the polar bear's head.
When it's all clean inside, put the livers and the oatmeal mush and shove it inside. Pour the chicken fat over the mixture, then sew up the neck.
Boil the head in a pot of water for about ten hours, and you're done! Once your family starts digging into that head lettuce, they'll tell you they've never had a better heddice in their life!
Halas 10-lb Meat Pie: When the winter get the coldest, you may want to add another plate to your meal.
You can't go wrong with a ten-pounder, I always say. An easy dish to prepare, you'll need to gather a couple of ingredients first.
First you gotta whip up a good, thick cream. I prefer to use polar bear milk, but use whatever you can find.
You'll need a haunch of wolf, a brisket of bear (try brown bear for an exotic taste), a rack of mammoth and some imported lion hamburger.
Soak all of these in that cream for about a day, then throw 'em in a pie tin and bake it for about six hours! Tada! One of the best desserts you an serve your family.
The only difficulty to preparing this recipe is finding a pie tin big enough to hold all ten pounds of the meat (I've only been able to find ones that hold seven pounds).
Books
Good Eatin' This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Good Eatin' - Page 10 (shinies or looted in Everfrost)
Good Eatin' - Page 11 (looted in Everfrost)
Good Eatin' - Page 12 (looted in Everfrost)
Discovered on 13 Nov 2005 at 1:34:13 PST.
Good Eatin'
Second Edition
This is a cookbook written by Halasian homemaker in which she details some of the local ethnic food of her homeland.
I've put this book together so other people out there can enjoy my fine cooking.
My husband always tells me there's nothing finer than a plate of my heddice. Sometimes I have to give him a good whallop upside the head as a gentle reminder to tell me, but that's because he's so busy gobbling down what I've made for him.
These recipes are usually what I make for my husband and the wee ones every dinner.
Black Pudding: I always start dinner with a tasty black pudding.
In order to make this meal, you'll first need to go out there and find yourself a black ooze. Slimy little things, they cook up just fine with a couple of spices.
When you're done whacking it with your mace, you'll need to bring it back to kitchen for the cleaning.
Its very important that you clean the ooze really well before you start the cleaning.
There are a bunch of little balls inside the jelly things that you gotta cut out. If you miss even one of them, you'll wind up making the pudding really bitter.
Take my word for it - getting the kiddies to ear it when it's not prepared right is like pulling teeth from a mammoth.
Once you have the ooze cleaned just right, put it in a bowl and start smooshing it with your fists.
Once it's nothing more than jelly, add in a couple fistfuls of flour and start mixing. Add in some crushed ice peppers (the sweet kind, mind you) and then put it in the oven for about an hour.
When it's done, you'll have a nice brandy treat that everyone will praise you for.
Butterscotch: You can't have a good pudding without having something to wash it down with.
Always make sure to offer the people eating your food a good libation. My specialty is a tasty butterscotch.
Take a pound of butter and melt it in a large stein. Pour in some scotch until the container has been filled and give it a good shake or two.
If you're serving to wee kiddies, just leave the scotch out.
Heddice: There's only one meal that should ever be served at dinner, and that's a hearty heddice.
Now, I know everyone's got their own opinion on how it should be prepared, but once you try my recipe you'll never prepare it any other way.
To start, you need to go out there and whack a polar bear. Make sure you get all meat and the head too. That's the most important part.
Now get yourself some oatmeal and a seal's heart (look for one about as big as your hand). Crush them together, adding in chopped onion for extra flavor. Once you've made a big 'ole mush out of it, set it to the side. Now take a couple of wolf livers and marinade them in chicken stock. If you can handle even more flavor, mix in some ice peppers (not the sweet kind... that's just disgusting).
Finally, get some chicken fat and melt it over a fire. At the same time, start digging out all of the gunk inside the polar bear's head.
When it's all clean inside, put the livers and the oatmeal mush and shove it inside. Pour the chicken fat over the mixture, then sew up the neck.
Boil the head in a pot of water for about ten hours, and you're done! Once your family starts digging into that head lettuce, they'll tell you they've never had a better heddice in their life!
Halas 10-lb Meat Pie: When the winter get the coldest, you may want to add another plate to your meal.
You can't go wrong with a ten-pounder, I always say. An easy dish to prepare, you'll need to gather a couple of ingredients first.
First you gotta whip up a good, thick cream. I prefer to use polar bear milk, but use whatever you can find.
You'll need a haunch of wolf, a brisket of bear (try brown bear for an exotic taste), a rack of mammoth and some imported lion hamburger.
Soak all of these in that cream for about a day, then throw 'em in a pie tin and bake it for about six hours! Tada! One of the best desserts you an serve your family.
The only difficulty to preparing this recipe is finding a pie tin big enough to hold all ten pounds of the meat (I've only been able to find ones that hold seven pounds).
Books
History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. I This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. I". It chronicles the history of the goblins from their creation to the exodus from their homelands.
1 GE - The creations of Rallos and The-Brell-That-Is-Not, the goblins were brought into the world. Gathering together as the One Clan, the goblins would create a society that would flourish within their cavernous world.
200 GE - The form of an enormous goblin would appear before the Enlightened Council and present itself as the Avatar of War. The Avatar would demand of the goblins an oath that would bind every following generation. In return for the oath, the goblins would be allowed continued existence.
900 GE - The first schism among goblin society would happen at the death of the Great Chief. His twin sons would fight for succession over the throne, dividing the goblins into two separate camps. Many glorious battles would be fought during what would be called the The Two Chiefs.
930 GE- The Two Chiefs would end during a duel to the death between the twins. The victor emerged from the duel and proclaimed himself as both himself and his twin. The warring camps, not being able to tell the difference between the two, followed the new Great Chief as if he were their victorious leader.
215 RGE- The Crumbling would cause the goblins to leave their home behind. Many goblins would perish during the Crumbling and those that survived would begin the Long Journey. Many years of hardship would pass as the Mass Exodus would search for a new home.
30 PC -The One Clan would see its first separation caused by the Long Journey. While passing through a system of lava channels, a group of goblins would express that they wished to settle down where it was warm. The remaining clan did not agree, leaving this group to live among the fire.
32 PC - The next group of goblins to leave the clan would come several years later. Finding an archipelago of islands, a group insisted on living upon those rock outcroppings. Again, the remainder of the clan did not agree, leaving behind that group to their aquatic existence.
34 PC - Having found a land that was never visited by the warmth of day, a group of goblins would insist that the Long Journey must stop, for they had reached the end of the world. The remainder, still resolute on finding a home, refused. As before, they left the group behind, traveling beyond that cold and icy environment.
35 PC - With more than half their numbers lost during the Long Journey, the goblins began to feel despair that they would never find a suitable home. Many arguments would arise, debating whether or not to return to their original home. With much regret, the remaining members of the One Clan would split one last time. One half would continue looking for a home, and the other half would return to their ancestral home.
36 PC - The One Clan, reduced down to nothing more than a small tribe, continued the Long Journey. After an endless travel, they would step foot upon the soil of a strange new land. Little did they know they would soon find a new home.
Books
History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. II This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. II". It chronicles the history of the goblins from when they settled in Norrath to the horrible curse that befell them.
40 PC - The One Clan would spend the next several years scouting the newfound land for a place to settle. The surrounding land was filled with a bounty of food, but they wanted something to remind them of their old home.
1 MC - Carving out an intricate cave system within a mountainside, the One Clan would change their name to the Mountain Clan in honor of their new home. All would be fine for the next several decades until their continued tunneling would cause them to meet their unknown neighbors.
37 MC - The goblins would eventually be introduced to a race of short people who lived within the same mountain. For no reason other than lack of being able to communicate, the two races would wind up going to war with each other. Territorial battles would be waged for the next several years.
43 MC - Using the gifts given to them by their creators, the goblins would craft a magical device that allowed them to actually speak the high pitched tongue of their enemies. Once they realized what these little men were saying, the war stopped at once. Both of these two people shared a love for the same thing... invention!
100 MC - The partnership between the two races would continue for many years to come. As the years went by, however, the two races would come to disagreements on the methods of creation. These disagreements would escalate to full arguments. The King of the little people and the Great Chief would meet to discuss how to prevent another war.
100 MC - Both races came to the decision that the only way to prevent a new war was for both peoples to leave for new lands. Agreeing to do so, they left every last one of their marvelous devices within their homes, sealed the mountain and left.
1 RE - Seeking a new home once again, the Mountain Clan would be visited by the Avatar of War and told that the oath of their forefathers had come due. They were told to travel to a land where they were to meet other children of Rallos. With that, the Mountain Clan would find themselves soon enlisted in army of the Rallosian Empire.
1 - ? RE - The goblins would serve the Rallosian Empire for many years to come. Not fully enslaved by their gigantic counterparts, they were not as free as they had been in the past. Their role would be the part of supplier. Creating their magical devices for use by the soldiers on the front lines of the Empire, the goblins would finally come to know their true role in the world.
? RE - During the course of the campaigns across the world of Norrath, the goblins would begin to invent devices of untold beauty and destruction. The blend of technology and magic would reach its height on the day the Rallosian Empire would defeat the gods of the earth themselves.
? RE - The mighty gods of the earth would ultimately take their vengeance upon all of those that joined the Rallosian Empire. Soon after the final battle, the goblins would find they were no longer able to construct the most simple of devices. Several generations would pass as more of that knowledge began slipping away until, finally, the goblins could only survive if they stole the tools and weapons from other lesser races.
Books
History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. III This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "History of the Runnyeye Goblins, Vol. III". It chronicles the history of the goblins from when they made a new home in the Bog Mountain to the present.
1 NR - Many uncounted years would pass as the goblins would aimlessly wander throughout the world. Not possessing any powers of creation, they could no longer "make" a home and had to find something that already existed and could support their numbers. Eventually they would find a new home deep inside a cavern.
4 NR - Soon after they settled, the goblins would be assaulted by monstrous bull-men. Having neither the size or the weapons to stop them, the goblins would retaliate with suicidal charges against the minotaur's villages. After many of these death squads would run to their deaths, enough minotaur axes were secured by the goblins to allow them to fight on even terms.
20 NR- The wars between the minotaurs and the goblins would continue until a third party would appear. A large eyeball, much larger than a goblin, began communicating with the goblins. It asked to speak with the Big King, and when the meeting was over with, the Big King announced to his people that they would be called "Runnyeye".
21 NR - With the help of the Great Eyes, the goblins would overpower the minotaurs and put an end to the war. The subjugated minotaurs were then brought before the Great Eyes and made to bow their knees to their new masters. The now mentally controlled minotaurs took no time in conquering the unassuming goblins.
21 - 600 NR - The goblins, under the mental domination of the Great Eyes, would spend many years in a cruel form of captivity. Acting as the menial labor for the Great Eyes, the goblins would be forced to perform all manner of evil actions. This would continue for many centuries to come.
600 NR - The Rending would change the face of Norrath, causing the lands to shift. No longer attached to the rest of the world, the Runnyeye goblins would find that their Great Eye masters would spend much of their time away from their minions. This would be the beginning of the end for the Great Eyes.
600 NR - While the Great Eyes would turn their attention away from the goblins to discuss their future endeavors, their control would lessen over their mental slaves. A goblin only known as Gribble would bring about a change in the way things were done in Bog Mountain.
600-650 NR - Gribble would show the other goblins the manner in which to break the chains of mental slavery. This would cause what is called the Great Purge. The goblins would begin to slaughter what they now referred to as Evil Eyes. When the numbers were reduced to such a small amount, the goblins stopped and came up with an even crueler fate. They would enslave the Evil Eyes!
650 - Now - The goblins would proceed to subjugate not only the Evil Eyes, but the minotaurs and boarfiends as well. In addition to their reverse of fate, they seemed to be able to do something they had not done in quite a long time. One of them managed to construct a crude weapon with no assistance from the Evil Eyes.
Now - To this day, the Runnyeye goblins are free of their cruel masters. It will take many years before they manage to rebuild all of their lost knowledge. For now, however, the Runnyeye goblins are free to think for themselves and pursue all manner of interests. No longer will they be forced to have thoughts not their own. They are free to rule their own lives. Yes, they are completely free.
Books
Identifying Beetles This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A guide to the most commonly found beetles in Greater Faydark. These beetles are potentially dangerous to the city of Kelethin and should be eradicated.
There are two primary categories of beetles: those that thrive on living wood and those that prefer cut or dry wood.
Within these two categories are many subsets, however only three major types of beetles are found in Greater Faydark that could have a negative impact on the city of Kelethin.
The first type is the crystalline beetle, a rather iridescent specimen that frequents cut logs and beams.
In Greater Faydark, it is usually found near fallen logs on the forest floor, though it has also been seen leaving traces on the posts supporting various walkways connecting Kelethin’s platforms.
This is obviously dangerous, and an infestation could sever the connections between the platforms, or possibly undermine the platforms themselves.
Among the beetles that infest living wood, none is more prolific than the bark beetle.
Burrowing itself beneath a tree’s outer bark, this beetle's larvae can strip a small tree of enough bark to allow other insects or water damage to take hold.
While Kelethin's trees are very large and often considered invulnerable, if left unchecked, these bark beetles can proliferate and ruin entire sections of a tree's skin. Usually, these bark beetles start their evil deeds on any above ground roots, which are more tender than mature trees.
The blue tunneler is the final beetle present in Greater Faydark.
This beetle bores into massive living trees, creating cast networks of tunnels. These tunnels may cut off the natural flow of nutrients throughout a tree, eventually starving it to death.
Examine any mushrooms near a living tree for indicators that these beetles are nearby and ready to begin their life of destruction.
Treatment for these beetles is simple and effective. They must be removed!
There are no natural predators in Greater Faydark that will remove the beetle menace. Therefore, it is up to the citizens of Kelethin to be on the lookout for signs of infestation.
Once the beetles are removed from a source, they may not return for several seasons.
However, one must always be vigilant as these pests can return unexpectedly. They might also begin to infect nearby trees or fallen logs.
A watchful eye can prevent these creatures from getting out of hand.
Books
In Search of the Wooly Mammoth This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is a story about the unnamed author;s quest to find the Wooly Mammoths of the Everfrost Peaks.
Ever since I was a child, I remember hearing stories of great beasts that would plod across the snowy plains of the northlands.
These large beasts were very similar to the ones found in the southern plains of the Karanas, but covered in a great mass of shaggy hair.
I vowed that one day I would see these great beasts.
As I grew older, I would venture out to the plains to see these beasts.
I was shocked to see they were even larger than the picture my mind had painted. Standing twice as tall as a man, they had enormous ears that flapped down around their faces.
Thrilled at seeing an elephant for the first time, my mind raced at the thoughts of what a Wooly Mammoth could possibly look like.
My experience encouraged me to make the dangerous trek to the snowy northlands to find these beasts.
I visited every tavern in all of Qeynos and sought out brave adventurers that would accompany me on my journey. For you see, the only way to breach the frozen tundra was to travel through the lair of the gnolls - Blackburrow.
Gathering together several brave souls, including a barbarian native to the snowy town of Halas, we began hiking northwards through the Qeynos Hills.
Being careful to heed the advice of the Windstalkers, we deftly avoided all of the bears and the wolves that made these foothills their home. Eventually, we found ourselves standing before the maw of the gnoll's den.
My companions showed much bravery and skills in the combat arts by fending off the attacks of numerous hungry gnolls.
The barbarian, Narmat MacTargle, pointed out the winding tunnel that led to the snowy tundra of the north. Lighting our torches we continued our journey through this lightless cave.
Soon enough, I could feel the air getting cold.
Eventually we would reach the mouth of the tunnel, depositing us within the cold wastes of the north.
All around us were snow covered mountains and icy ground. Narmat told us that we would first want to journey to Halas to replenish our supplies.
Fortunately, as with Blackburrow, he knew the way.
Greeted by burly guards as large as my barbarian friends, we were allowed into the town just so long as we agreed to cause no harm.
When I told the guards about my quest to see the Wooly Mammoths, they just snorted and suggested I speak with Old Hemma.
Asking around, I eventually found where this ancient alder was found.
Blind for as many years as I was old, Old Hemma described in great detail the mighty Mammoths.
The part that I was interested in the most was the great tusks that protruded from their mouths.
Pointing to large spears, cups, plates, wall hangings and even the knob on the front door, Old Hemma told me that these were all carved from the teeth.
Telling me exactly how to find the breeding grounds of these magnificent beasts, he gave me a cryptic warning.
Saying that my quest would come to an end only when I found the cost of greed, he escorted me out of his house. Looking around, I noticed that every household had some adornment crafted from the teeth of Mammoths, just as Old Hemma had within his house.
My companions left the town at once, seeking a delta to the far northwest of the town.
The journey was long and hard, but we eventually found the delta as Old Hemma had described.
And this is when I understood what the old sage meant by finding the cost of greed. For all throughout the delta were the intact corpses of these once magnificent beasts, frozen to the ground.
Intact save for one small detail - all of the Mammoths had their tusks removed.
In the end, I started my quest too late, for the Mammoths were driven to extinction for no reason other than their two front teeth.
Books
In Search of the Wooly Mammoth This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This is a story about the unnamed author;s quest to find the Wooly Mammoths of the Everfrost Peaks.
Ever since I was a child, I remember hearing stories of great beasts that would plod across the snowy plains of the northlands.
These large beasts were very similar to the ones found in the southern plains of the Karanas, but covered in a great mass of shaggy hair.
I vowed that one day I would see these great beasts.
As I grew older, I would venture out to the plains to see these beasts.
I was shocked to see they were even larger than the picture my mind had painted. Standing twice as tall as a man, they had enormous ears that flapped down around their faces.
Thrilled at seeing an elephant for the first time, my mind raced at the thoughts of what a Wooly Mammoth could possibly look like.
My experience encouraged me to make the dangerous trek to the snowy northlands to find these beasts.
I visited every tavern in all of Qeynos and sought out brave adventurers that would accompany me on my journey. For you see, the only way to breach the frozen tundra was to travel through the lair of the gnolls - Blackburrow.
Gathering together several brave souls, including a barbarian native to the snowy town of Halas, we began hiking northwards through the Qeynos Hills.
Being careful to heed the advice of the Windstalkers, we deftly avoided all of the bears and the wolves that made these foothills their home. Eventually, we found ourselves standing before the maw of the gnoll's den.
My companions showed much bravery and skills in the combat arts by fending off the attacks of numerous hungry gnolls.
The barbarian, Narmat MacTargle, pointed out the winding tunnel that led to the snowy tundra of the north. Lighting our torches we continued our journey through this lightless cave.
Soon enough, I could feel the air getting cold.
Eventually we would reach the mouth of the tunnel, depositing us within the cold wastes of the north.
All around us were snow covered mountains and icy ground. Narmat told us that we would first want to journey to Halas to replenish our supplies.
Fortunately, as with Blackburrow, he knew the way.
Greeted by burly guards as large as my barbarian friends, we were allowed into the town just so long as we agreed to cause no harm.
When I told the guards about my quest to see the Wooly Mammoths, they just snorted and suggested I speak with Old Hemma.
Asking around, I eventually found where this ancient alder was found.
Blind for as many years as I was old, Old Hemma described in great detail the mighty Mammoths.
The part that I was interested in the most was the great tusks that protruded from their mouths.
Pointing to large spears, cups, plates, wall hangings and even the knob on the front door, Old Hemma told me that these were all carved from the teeth.
Telling me exactly how to find the breeding grounds of these magnificent beasts, he gave me a cryptic warning.
Saying that my quest would come to an end only when I found the cost of greed, he escorted me out of his house. Looking around, I noticed that every household had some adornment crafted from the teeth of Mammoths, just as Old Hemma had within his house.
My companions left the town at once, seeking a delta to the far northwest of the town.
The journey was long and hard, but we eventually found the delta as Old Hemma had described.
And this is when I understood what the old sage meant by finding the cost of greed. For all throughout the delta were the intact corpses of these once magnificent beasts, frozen to the ground.
Intact save for one small detail - all of the Mammoths had their tusks removed.
In the end, I started my quest too late, for the Mammoths were driven to extinction for no reason other than their two front teeth.
Books
Isabella Cellus' Family History Book This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
My ancestors, going back to Isabella Cellus, loved traveling through the area we now call Antonica. I am trying to compile our stories into remembrances of what was and how it has changed over time. If you bought this volume and its covers were removed, know that the seller is probably keeping out the good bits for him or herself! Entry One Put book away.
I am sure that some of my family's writings still exist elsewhere in Norrath. Unless they were destroyed in the Shattering or as mentioned before, held back by unscrupulous vendors. Whatever portion of this tome you have, cherish it and remember the Cellus family of Qeynos. Entry One Put book away.
"Antonica," by Isabella Cellus. I am traveling through an area known as Qeynos Hills. It's filled with quite a population of animals and different sorts of folks. Someone is following me -- Entry Two Put book away.
-- so I am not enjoying this journey. Anyway, from these Hills, one can see North Qeynos, Western Karana and the frosted peaks of the northern mountains. The Sabertooth gnolls that come over from Blackburrow are especially annoying. They keep stealing my paper! Those little runts! During my -- Entry Three Put book away.
-- travels, I've met a lovely ranger named Holly Windstalker. She's very friendly and outgoing, but a bit crazed about wolves and bears. We were having a picnic near the Surefall Glades, when someone walked by with -- Entry Four Put book away.
-- a wolf pelt over his shoulder. Holly went nuts! She up and gave this poor fellow a piece of her mind, then chased him all the way to Blackburrow! He shouted at her, "My lady -- Entry Five Put book away.
-- the wolf attacked me first!" Holly didn't seem to care. I think I'll head over that way to interview him for my next bit on Blackburrow. Thanks to Holly, now I know someone who goes there! Entry Six Put book away.
The fellow Holly chased to Blackburrow is related to a handsome scout named Malityn. He's very noble and good-hearted, and I've been spending a lot of time with him. Blackburrow is a classic dungeon, very dark and gloomier the further down into it one gets. Groups of Sabertooth gnolls are hard at work digging out tunnels. With Malityn at my side, however, I felt very safe. He must do something about -- Entry Seven Put book away.
-- his hair. Anyway, Blackburrow is a pretty dismal place and dampness is not good for my complexion. Malityn was starting to be so possessive! If anyone so much as spoke to me, he'd whack off their head! So, it's farewell Malityn and back to Qeynos Hills. Hopefully, I'll be able to shake this cold. I'm going to gather some willowbark to brew some tea, which will help tremendously with my headache. I saw some willows to the north, beyond the aqueduct. Entry Eight Put book away.
There is a lot of unrest these days in the Qeynos Hills, which makes me rethink my adventuring out in the wilds. Barbarians are moving southward from their home in Halas, although the reason isn't clear to me. They sure are big, though! I might wander up that way. That would mean another trip through Blackburrow, though, and I am not sure I'm ready to face -- Entry Nine Put book away.
-- Malityn. Unless he's ready to move on with me, there is no point in continuing to see him. Holly says scouts can be that way, especially when he spends all that time underground, investigating those gnolls. Some days I wish I had -- Entry Ten Put book away.
-- never left the safety of South Qeynos. Malityn says he's ready to leave Blackburrow and come with me, as he thinks the damp is ruining his hair. At last! The woods and hills are lovely but I will lay aside my pen for now and return to my home. Perhaps our daughter will carry on the tale. Close book
Books
Jerb Northstar's Journal This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Jerb Northstar's Journal - Page 3 (shinies in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Jerb Northstar's Journal - Page 5 (plundered from a crate at 461, -40, 245 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Jerb Northstar's Journal - Page 7 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Jerb Northstar's Journal - Page 8 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Jerb Northstar's Journal - Page 10 (shinies in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Jerb Northstar's Journal - Page 12 (shinies in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Discovered on 11 Nov 2005 at 10:12:14 PST.
"Jerb Northstar's Journal"
Second Edition
This book is titled "Jerb Northstar's Journal". It appears to be a chronicle of how a druid investigated some new visitors that came to live within his forest.
Entry Thirty-Eight -
I have spoken with Left Paw and he told me that there are visitor within the Pines. Though he was too interested in the salmon, in between mouthfuls he told me that I would find them down by the shore.
I may wish to see who these guests are, and what intentions they have.
Entry Forty-Three - I have seen our visitors from afar. I cannot tell for certain what they have planned, but it looks as if our guests may be staying for a while to come. I believe I shall introduce myself to these women so that they know the Glade and the Pines are already being looked after.
Entry Forty-Six -
I am very uncertain about why these women have come to our trees. Though they claim they are refugees, I could tell there was something unspoken between them whenever they would talk.
The most mysterious was what appeared to be their leader. I will record my findings and bring this to the Circle. Perhaps their wisdom may better know what to do.
Arialla Clearsong appears to be the leader of this group of women.
She is the one who introduced each of her fellows and explained why they were here in the Jaggedpine.
She said they would take refuge on the small island for the time being and leave it as it was when they were done. She refused to say what it was that they were "doing", however.
Andria introduced herself as a templar.
I was unfamiliar with the term, but she assured me it was just a word her people used to describe those who held faith within their hearts.
I was unable to get her to tell me what god she worshipped, which draws my suspicion.
Abella claimed to be a sorcerer.
She explained that she drew energies from the surrounding air and crafted them into other forms.
I am unfamiliar with the workings of magic that comes not from nature, so much of what she said meant nothing to me.
Alexis described herself as a sooth.
When I asked her what that meant, she told me that I would surely find out one day. I took her for being one of the rudest of the group.
Anessa called herself a thaumaturge.
She started to explain what it was that a thaumaturge did, but was interrupted by Arialla who had questions for me. When I answered and asked Anessa to continue, she told me I would not find it interesting.
I am no fool, however. I know Arialla gave Anessa a signal to hold her silence.
Abigail said that she was a mystic.
She told me how she could see those who were trapped between the worlds of life and death.
Telling her that I did not believe in such nonsense, I felt the wind kick up around my hair. I am sure it was nothing more than mere coincidence.
Anathema was the last one I spoke with, and she in turn aroused my suspicion the most. She told me she was a protector, but when I asked of what, she just looked to Arialla.
I stood between the two, blocking visual contact, and that was when I could see the tears begin to well up in her eyes.
I am certain there is more going on than meets the eye to these women.
Books
Jerb Northstar's Journal This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is titled "Jerb Northstar's Journal". It appears to be a chronicle of how a druid investigated some new visitors that came to live within his forest.
Entry Thirty-Eight -
I have spoken with Left Paw and he told me that there are visitor within the Pines. Though he was too interested in the salmon, in between mouthfuls he told me that I would find them down by the shore.
I may wish to see who these guests are, and what intentions they have.
Entry Forty-Three - I have seen our visitors from afar. I cannot tell for certain what they have planned, but it looks as if our guests may be staying for a while to come. I believe I shall introduce myself to these women so that they know the Glade and the Pines are already being looked after.
Entry Forty-Six -
I am very uncertain about why these women have come to our trees. Though they claim they are refugees, I could tell there was something unspoken between them whenever they would talk.
The most mysterious was what appeared to be their leader. I will record my findings and bring this to the Circle. Perhaps their wisdom may better know what to do.
Arialla Clearsong appears to be the leader of this group of women.
She is the one who introduced each of her fellows and explained why they were here in the Jaggedpine.
She said they would take refuge on the small island for the time being and leave it as it was when they were done. She refused to say what it was that they were "doing", however.
Andria introduced herself as a templar.
I was unfamiliar with the term, but she assured me it was just a word her people used to describe those who held faith within their hearts.
I was unable to get her to tell me what god she worshipped, which draws my suspicion.
Abella claimed to be a sorcerer.
She explained that she drew energies from the surrounding air and crafted them into other forms.
I am unfamiliar with the workings of magic that comes not from nature, so much of what she said meant nothing to me.
Alexis described herself as a sooth.
When I asked her what that meant, she told me that I would surely find out one day. I took her for being one of the rudest of the group.
Anessa called herself a thaumaturge.
She started to explain what it was that a thaumaturge did, but was interrupted by Arialla who had questions for me. When I answered and asked Anessa to continue, she told me I would not find it interesting.
I am no fool, however. I know Arialla gave Anessa a signal to hold her silence.
Abigail said that she was a mystic.
She told me how she could see those who were trapped between the worlds of life and death.
Telling her that I did not believe in such nonsense, I felt the wind kick up around my hair. I am sure it was nothing more than mere coincidence.
Anathema was the last one I spoke with, and she in turn aroused my suspicion the most. She told me she was a protector, but when I asked of what, she just looked to Arialla.
I stood between the two, blocking visual contact, and that was when I could see the tears begin to well up in her eyes.
I am certain there is more going on than meets the eye to these women.
Books
Local Color - Halas This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is titled "More Adventures of Jorbo and Mappy ". It is the story of two halfling boys and how they happened upon some exciting adventures.
Jorbo and Mappy, two friends who left for an exciting journey one day, happened across a very interesting person. Looking just like a halfling, the man had lizard scales covering his entire body, and two small little horns sprouting from the top of his head. He was chewing on a small wooden stick, and would puff smoke between words. Interested at their discovery, the friends asked him if the man knew where to find adventure.
Laughing and puffing smoke, the odd halfling introduced himself as the Drafling. He said he knew many different places where to find adventure, and offered to show the two boys where to find it. Taking him up on his invitation, both Jorbo and Mappy followed him to adventures they never would have found on their own.
The first interesting thing the Drafling showed the two boys was a goblin who could speak three languages. The two boys asked the goblin how he was able to do it, and the goblin pointed out that he had three tongues. When they asked where they could find more tongues, the goblin told them that tongues always hid away inside books.
The goblin then offered to trade tongues with the boys. They boys had become rather accustomed to their own tongues, so they declined. The goblin nodded his head and told them that if anyone ever asks them for their names, they should never give it away. He said that if you give a person your name, you won't have one anymore, and you won't know what to call yourself. They knew this was wise advice.
The Drafling patted the boys on the shoulders and said it was time to go. He had already finished eating the stick he was chewing on and was now chewing on another. The Drafling told them that he would now show them other exciting sights. They told the goblin "thank you", asked him his name, and the goblin said "I don't know anymore".
The Drafling would then take the boys to a grove of trees and told them to watch for what was about to happen. In front of them, there were really small people walking around. One group was a bunch of girls, and the other group was a bunch of boys. Every now and then one of the boys would run over and pull one the girls hair, then run back to his friends.
The two friends began to laugh at the sight before them. The Drafling popped them on the back of the head and told them to keep watching. After several more girls were made to cry after having their hair pulled, the little boys started laughing so hard that they didn't notice a cat had crept up behind them.
As the cat crept closer and closer, the little girls refused to say anything, for they had their hair pulled by those mean boys. Soon enough, the cat pounced on all of the little boys, causing them all to scream for their mothers. Right at the moment it's mouth was about to gobble up all the boys, the Drafling waved his had, and the cat disappeared.
The two friends asked the Drafling what had just happened. The Drafling smacked his head and sighed, then told them that he showed them what happens when people are mean. He looked at them, chomped on the stick for a moment, and said not to pull the girls hair or maybe they might find a big cat standing behind them. The boys quickly nodded their heads, for they understood that.
The Drafling then told the boys that they would need to find their own adventures, for it was time that he went home. He brought them back to where he found them and said goodbye. Before he left, however, he told them of a few places where they could find some interesting things, gave them a wink, and was gone. Jorbo and Mappy immediately started running for the place where the mysterious halfling had pointed out.
Books
Perinius' Log This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
I'm not sure what is different about me, but my friends all say it's Veronica. They give me a hard time about her, but at the same time I think they respect what I have found. From my perspective things just seem different. I breathe easier and stand taller.
I don't know how she does it. The Captain had been riding me all day and I was in a foul, foul mood. Veronica smiled at me and things were... better.
I told her I loved her. She's said as much to me on many occasions, but only now have I realized my own feelings. When I finally did tell her she just smiled and said, "I know.'' I found that cute.
The date has been set. Veronica and I shall be joined. Everyone says I should be nervous, but I am more happy than anything else. Perhaps nervousness will come later.
The date approach.. Veronica has been spending more and more time with her wedding planners. Now I am getting the jitters. Normally she's around to calmy my fears but without her I have nobody to talk sense into me. Maybe it's just normal though.
I... just found a letter from one of Veronica's "former" suitors. If I read this correctly they are going to dine together this evening. --- This pain is immense. The letter was true to the last detail. My Veronica... is not my Veronica. I cannot comprehend how this could have occurred. My mind is blank, my heart is reeling, and my soul is spinning. Can my perceptions be so off? Why...
Books
Quotes of General Urduuk This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
In this book, we see the Rallosian Army's advance through the eyes of Ilkalla, a Qeynosian Guard at an outpost on Lake Rathetear. Entry One Put book away.
For as long as she could, Ilkalla watched Gerren's progress up the steep cliffs bordering Lake Rathetear. Even when she could no longer pick him out among the shadows cast by the jagged rocks, she fancied she could see him making his way cautiously along. Finally, she crept into the hut she and Gerren had shared beside their outpost and slept. The Rallosian Army would launch its barges across the Lake and she would need her strength to meet them. Entry Two Put book away.
The sun was high overhead when Ilkalla awoke. Her dreams were troubled by the thrumming of the ogres' victory drums which had started up again while she slept. "Why couldn't they use a victory flute instead?" she grumbled, latching on to the least of the concerns this day would bring. She had been able to cross the Lake on a coracle twice in one night, but she had been pulling only herself. She was not sure how long the massive, heavy Rallosians barges would take to make the same crossing. Entry Three Put book away.
There were very few humans around Lake Rathetear. Ilkalla was the only one present at the strategy meeting, where the aviak and centaur leaders stood before parchment maps, marking off the approaches across the Lake and the defensive positions available. The wide arrows indicating the ways the Rallosian Army could attack were wide swathes of red ochre compared to the tiny ash grey lines for defense. To Ilkalla, the ochre marks looked like dried blood. Entry Four Put book away.
"The best course of action is to stop them before they cross," said Khaza, an aviak general. "The aqua goblins will join with the ogres, not with us. We have fought them too long for them to suddenly consider us their allies," responded Errod of the centaurs. "Perhaps we could put our defense in two zones, rather than hoping to defend across the entire shore," said Ilkalla. She pointed to the most likely site where the Rallosian barges would land. "Aviaks in front over the water and the rest of us on the shore." Entry Five Put book away.
"With some aviaks in the flanks to keep the Rallosians from spreading our front lines too thin," agreed Khaza. "We might not survive for long against the entire Rallosian Army, but we can pick them off and lessen their numbers." The aviak and centaur leaders sent word to their gathered forces. Ilkalla (a "non-flier" as the aviaks called them) would join a centaur unit held in a third tier reserve. Entry Six Put book away.
Mixed now with the steady beat of the victory drums was the sound of chanting. The Rallosians were crossing the Lake, chanting to keep their oarsmen in rhythm and their deep voices carried across the water, bouncing off the mountains. No doubt their ruckus was designed to inspire fear amongst the defenders waiting for their approach. Instead, it filled them with anger and purpose. They might die this day, but they were taking as many ogres with them as they could. Entry Seven Put book away.
Ilkalla chafed at being assigned to the third tier, but she knew her strengths did not include hand-to-hand combat. She gathered beside her all her own arrows plus the quivers Gerren had left behind. She looked toward the Rathe Mountains again, wondering how he was faring and praying that Tunare -- wherever she may be -- would guide him. Ilkalla had never been one of the faithful, praying to the gods at every rainbow or stubbed toe, but somehow it seemed fitting to pray today. Entry Eight Put book away.
The chanting grew louder along with sound of vigorous splashing from the ogre paddlers. They were not skilled watersmen, but they were strong. As the first barge approached, the aviaks went into motion, throwing themselves into the faces of the Rallosians. The ogres' chanting was now disrupted by the fighting calls of the aviaks -- shrill, piercing and challenging. The barges did not halt with this interference; they continued their slow progress forward. Entry Nine Put book away.
Thanks to the aviaks' efforts and the skills of the archers in the second tier, the first barge to hit the shore came in at an awkward angle. The spiked boards scraped heavily into the loose gravel shore with enough force that many of the ogres standing ready for battle were set off balance. The centaurs charged in to take advantage of the moment, but another barge gliding in set loose a volley of arrows that tore into the second tier. All too soon, the third tier moved forward. Entry Ten Put book away.
At the far end of her line, Ilkalla took careful but quick aim at the ogres, trying to avoid the remaining aviaks and centaurs at the front of the line. From the corner of her eye she caught a movement, but was unable to stop the blow. Sinking to the rocky shore, Ilkalla's mind drifted like the waters surrounding her. "I always thought that water was blue," she murmured dazedly. As the final blow struck, a shriveled gnoll's paw floated up beside her on the waves of the red lake. Close Book.
Books
Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension - Page 1 (plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension - Page 3 (plundered from a page at -330, -33, 27 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension - Page 4 (plundered from bellows at 386, -119, -156 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension - Page 8 (plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension - Page 9 (plundered from a cot at 253, -25, -149 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension - Page 12 (looted from orcs in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Discovered on 11 Nov 2005 at 10:12:13 PST.
"Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension
Second Edition
This book details how the orcs would organize into armies the likes of which had not been seen on Norrath for millennia.
The following historical account details what stories would describe as the main turning point in the rise of the orcs.
No longer primal savages, the orcs would organize into armies the like that hadn't been seen on Norrath for millennia.
Several accounts of thus time period still exist in varying forms, which have been condensed together within this volume.
Snow Orcs: Launching a surprise attack on both Surefall Glade and Qeynos at the same time, the Snow Orcs would attempt to divide the two cities.
The orcs sent wave after wave of gnoll suicide squads at the humans.
Employing frighteningly effective tactics, the destruction caused by the orcs would seem to be amplified by their leader - a being engulfed in fire.
As the invasion would wear on, the gnoll's numbers would be decimated - leaving behind only women and children in Blackburrow.
The Avatar of Flame would ultimately send the signal that would spell the doom for Qeynos. Having suffered major losses to the gnolls, the human city would stand no chance against the orcish hordes marching straight for them.
Were it not for a miracle that happened that day, Qeynos would not be standing.
As the Snow Orc horde began their charge, a great rumbling was felt in the earth. It intensified to the point of toppling many of the nearby towers.
When the dust settled, the armies of Qeynos gazed upon a huge hole in the land where the hordes once stood. Slowly they realized that the very earth had swallowed the entire orc army. They watched in amazement as the ground began to reform, leaving no trace that there was ever a rift in the earth.
Even with this turn of events, the war was far from over.
The Avatar of Flame, somehow avoiding the great sinkhole, still stood with only a few remaining orcish troops.
The Qeynosians, having suffered severe losses from the invasion, would then see their second miracle that day. Approaching from the north, the combined forces of the Knights of Thunder and the Druids of Surefall were riding to join the ranks of Qeynos - being led by the Avatar of Storms.
Unbeknownst to the human forces, however, was that the Avatar of Flame had reinforcements of his own. And they, too, had just arrived.
Deathfist Orcs: Though they had just traveled many leagues to join with their Rallosian brethren, the Deathfist orcs would find that the war in the south had changed since they were called.
Already controlling the Innothule swamp, the Rallosian Army had now set their sights on new targets.
Splitting the forces into two armies, one would sweep to the west being led by the Rallosian Warlord. The other, being led by Emperor Gash and the Avatar of War, would return to the north.
Traveling back through the desert wasteland the orcs had just devastated, the Rallosians would remark upon the efficiency of the orcs' work.
Sometime during the march, Emperor Gash would send several platoons towards the hills, but not offering to explain why.
When questioned, he would reply that the ogres needn't worry about having enough troops when they reached their destination.
Though working together as allies, the orcs and the ogres would maintain wide berths during the march. This would prove a stroke of luck for the Rallosians, but not for the Deathfists. As they the armies passed into an open stretch of desert, the Rallosians would watch as tens of thousands of orcs would instantly be swallowed by the sand in one fell swoop.
Though a devastating loss to the Deathfist Empire, Emperor Gash informed the Rallosians and the Avatar of War that all was not lost. For, he claimed, the orcs he brought with him were only one half of the Empire. The other half were already waiting at their destination.
Finally reaching their destination, the remaining orcs and the Rallosians joined with the other half of the Deathfist Empire.
Employing the tactics of the orcs and the unstoppable might of the Rallosians, the Avatar of War began preparing for battle against their target - the great city of Freeport.
When the assault was set to begin, the Avatar of War gazed upon Freeport and watched as thousands of Militia gathered to defend the walls.
The battle was about to begin.
The orcs, once viewed as a petty annoyance, would rise from primitive savagery to tactical genius.
Ancient tales that told of their former greatness were oft overlooked as being nothing more than fairy tales.
Norrath would come to know that the stories were actually true, and were more attention paid to them, they would have known that the orcs had "returned" to Norrath.
And their "return" would be forever burned into the memory by the part they played in the War of Defiance.
Books
Rise of the Orcs - The Ascension This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book details how the orcs would organize into armies the likes of which had not been seen on Norrath for millennia.
The following historical account details what stories would describe as the main turning point in the rise of the orcs.
No longer primal savages, the orcs would organize into armies the like that hadn't been seen on Norrath for millennia.
Several accounts of thus time period still exist in varying forms, which have been condensed together within this volume.
Snow Orcs: Launching a surprise attack on both Surefall Glade and Qeynos at the same time, the Snow Orcs would attempt to divide the two cities.
The orcs sent wave after wave of gnoll suicide squads at the humans.
Employing frighteningly effective tactics, the destruction caused by the orcs would seem to be amplified by their leader - a being engulfed in fire.
As the invasion would wear on, the gnoll's numbers would be decimated - leaving behind only women and children in Blackburrow.
The Avatar of Flame would ultimately send the signal that would spell the doom for Qeynos. Having suffered major losses to the gnolls, the human city would stand no chance against the orcish hordes marching straight for them.
Were it not for a miracle that happened that day, Qeynos would not be standing.
As the Snow Orc horde began their charge, a great rumbling was felt in the earth. It intensified to the point of toppling many of the nearby towers.
When the dust settled, the armies of Qeynos gazed upon a huge hole in the land where the hordes once stood. Slowly they realized that the very earth had swallowed the entire orc army. They watched in amazement as the ground began to reform, leaving no trace that there was ever a rift in the earth.
Even with this turn of events, the war was far from over.
The Avatar of Flame, somehow avoiding the great sinkhole, still stood with only a few remaining orcish troops.
The Qeynosians, having suffered severe losses from the invasion, would then see their second miracle that day. Approaching from the north, the combined forces of the Knights of Thunder and the Druids of Surefall were riding to join the ranks of Qeynos - being led by the Avatar of Storms.
Unbeknownst to the human forces, however, was that the Avatar of Flame had reinforcements of his own. And they, too, had just arrived.
Deathfist Orcs: Though they had just traveled many leagues to join with their Rallosian brethren, the Deathfist orcs would find that the war in the south had changed since they were called.
Already controlling the Innothule swamp, the Rallosian Army had now set their sights on new targets.
Splitting the forces into two armies, one would sweep to the west being led by the Rallosian Warlord. The other, being led by Emperor Gash and the Avatar of War, would return to the north.
Traveling back through the desert wasteland the orcs had just devastated, the Rallosians would remark upon the efficiency of the orcs' work.
Sometime during the march, Emperor Gash would send several platoons towards the hills, but not offering to explain why.
When questioned, he would reply that the ogres needn't worry about having enough troops when they reached their destination.
Though working together as allies, the orcs and the ogres would maintain wide berths during the march. This would prove a stroke of luck for the Rallosians, but not for the Deathfists. As they the armies passed into an open stretch of desert, the Rallosians would watch as tens of thousands of orcs would instantly be swallowed by the sand in one fell swoop.
Though a devastating loss to the Deathfist Empire, Emperor Gash informed the Rallosians and the Avatar of War that all was not lost. For, he claimed, the orcs he brought with him were only one half of the Empire. The other half were already waiting at their destination.
Finally reaching their destination, the remaining orcs and the Rallosians joined with the other half of the Deathfist Empire.
Employing the tactics of the orcs and the unstoppable might of the Rallosians, the Avatar of War began preparing for battle against their target - the great city of Freeport.
When the assault was set to begin, the Avatar of War gazed upon Freeport and watched as thousands of Militia gathered to defend the walls.
The battle was about to begin.
The orcs, once viewed as a petty annoyance, would rise from primitive savagery to tactical genius.
Ancient tales that told of their former greatness were oft overlooked as being nothing more than fairy tales.
Norrath would come to know that the stories were actually true, and were more attention paid to them, they would have known that the orcs had "returned" to Norrath.
And their "return" would be forever burned into the memory by the part they played in the War of Defiance.
Books
Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book details the histories of several orcish tribes when they were nothing more than savage beasts.
The following historical account details the early years of the orcish people.
Not much is known about these savages, for most that has been written about them speak only of their predations rather than their personal histories.
The following facts have been taken from many different sources ranging from fragments of parchment to tales told by elderly elves.
The Deathfist Orcs - Before the Rending, Antonica was much larger than it is today. Many orcs would roam this once great continent, banding together in tribes. One of these tribes called themselves the Deathfist orcs.
Making their home near the city of Freeport, they were a deadly threat to travelers.
Preying upon merchant caravans traveling to the nearby fortress of Highhold, the Deathfist orcs would acquire goods of all types, ranging from foodstuffs to finely crafted weapons.
Attracting the attention of nearby brigands, they would ultimately come to an unspoken agreement to not get in each other's ways, sometimes even joining forces with each other.
Working alongside their Dervish Cutthroat partners, the Deathfists would become enough of a threat to Freeport that the city started issuing bounties for proof of their deaths.
This would continue for many years to come, but the city was never able to fully exterminate these ruthless savages.
Snow Orcs - One of several tribes of orcs living on the great continent of Antonica, the Snow Orcs had managed to thrive by choosing to migrate to a desolate, frozen wasteland.
Living in the land that was once called Everfrost, the Snow Orcs had only one major enemy to contend within upon those frozen plains - the barbarians of Halas.
An uneasy peace would exist between their barbarian neighbors and themselves.
Due to this truce, The Snow Orcs were able to devote more time to worshipping their god than their other tribal counterparts in other lands.
One of the few tribes known to have shown signs of having more than just animal-level thought, the Snow Orcs would create small temples to perform primitive rituals and ceremonies to Rallos Zek.
The barbarian clans would eventually unite, causing the shaky truce to come to and end.
Destroying every temple they could find, the barbarians would wage war upon the Snow Orcs for the coming centuries.
During this time, the Snow Orcs would revert to savagery, all but forgetting their shamanistic qualities.
The Crushbone Orcs - Another tribe that would by migrating far away were the Crushbone Orcs. In a weird chapter of orcish history, the Crushbone tribe would build a great fleet of crude boats and rafts and sail off to the former continent of Faydwer.
Never before had anyone seen a level of ingenuity evidenced by these primal savages.
Many of the orcs would survive the crossing of the ocean, which is the most astounding part of this tale.
Wasting no time in making new enemies upon this new continent, the Crushbone orcs would begin warring with the native dwarves and soon after, the elves.
Being overwhelmed by the cooperation of the dwarves and elves, the orcs would be routed battle after battle.
Were it not for finding an abandoned outpost in a secluded vale, the Crushbone tribe's history would have ended there.
Using the fort as a base of operations, the Crushbone orcs would soon begin to turn the table on the elves and dwarves. Launching surprisingly organized raids upon the tree city of Kelethin, the Crushbone orcs would become a force of destruction rather than annoyance.
Eventually seeking aid from adventuring types, the elves would find that the Crushbone orcs had organized into a haphazard army, but one that could not easily be put down even with the combined might of the elven and dwarven nations.
In hindsight, this would be the first warning of what was to come.
Books
Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime - Page 1 (looted from orcs in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime - Page 2 (plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime - Page 3 (plundered from a cart at 303, -32, -140 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime - Page 9 (looted from orcs in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime - Page 11 (plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime - Page 12 (looted from orcs in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Discovered on 11 Nov 2005 at 22:48:04 PST.
"Rise of the Orcs - The Deadtime"
Second Edition
This book details the histories of several orcish tribes when they were nothing more than savage beasts.
The following historical account details the early years of the orcish people.
Not much is known about these savages, for most that has been written about them speak only of their predations rather than their personal histories.
The following facts have been taken from many different sources ranging from fragments of parchment to tales told by elderly elves.
The Deathfist Orcs - Before the Rending, Antonica was much larger than it is today. Many orcs would roam this once great continent, banding together in tribes. One of these tribes called themselves the Deathfist orcs.
Making their home near the city of Freeport, they were a deadly threat to travelers.
Preying upon merchant caravans traveling to the nearby fortress of Highhold, the Deathfist orcs would acquire goods of all types, ranging from foodstuffs to finely crafted weapons.
Attracting the attention of nearby brigands, they would ultimately come to an unspoken agreement to not get in each other's ways, sometimes even joining forces with each other.
Working alongside their Dervish Cutthroat partners, the Deathfists would become enough of a threat to Freeport that the city started issuing bounties for proof of their deaths.
This would continue for many years to come, but the city was never able to fully exterminate these ruthless savages.
Snow Orcs - One of several tribes of orcs living on the great continent of Antonica, the Snow Orcs had managed to thrive by choosing to migrate to a desolate, frozen wasteland.
Living in the land that was once called Everfrost, the Snow Orcs had only one major enemy to contend within upon those frozen plains - the barbarians of Halas.
An uneasy peace would exist between their barbarian neighbors and themselves.
Due to this truce, The Snow Orcs were able to devote more time to worshipping their god than their other tribal counterparts in other lands.
One of the few tribes known to have shown signs of having more than just animal-level thought, the Snow Orcs would create small temples to perform primitive rituals and ceremonies to Rallos Zek.
The barbarian clans would eventually unite, causing the shaky truce to come to and end.
Destroying every temple they could find, the barbarians would wage war upon the Snow Orcs for the coming centuries.
During this time, the Snow Orcs would revert to savagery, all but forgetting their shamanistic qualities.
The Crushbone Orcs - Another tribe that would by migrating far away were the Crushbone Orcs. In a weird chapter of orcish history, the Crushbone tribe would build a great fleet of crude boats and rafts and sail off to the former continent of Faydwer.
Never before had anyone seen a level of ingenuity evidenced by these primal savages.
Many of the orcs would survive the crossing of the ocean, which is the most astounding part of this tale.
Wasting no time in making new enemies upon this new continent, the Crushbone orcs would begin warring with the native dwarves and soon after, the elves.
Being overwhelmed by the cooperation of the dwarves and elves, the orcs would be routed battle after battle.
Were it not for finding an abandoned outpost in a secluded vale, the Crushbone tribe's history would have ended there.
Using the fort as a base of operations, the Crushbone orcs would soon begin to turn the table on the elves and dwarves. Launching surprisingly organized raids upon the tree city of Kelethin, the Crushbone orcs would become a force of destruction rather than annoyance.
Eventually seeking aid from adventuring types, the elves would find that the Crushbone orcs had organized into a haphazard army, but one that could not easily be put down even with the combined might of the elven and dwarven nations.
In hindsight, this would be the first warning of what was to come.
Books
Rise of the Orcs - The Fall This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Rise of the Orcs - The Fall - Page 4 (plundered from a lantern at 333, 80, -41 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Fall - Page 5 (plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Fall - Page 6 (plundered from a page at -68, -37, -717 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Fall - Page 10 (plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Fall - Page 11 (looted from orcs in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Fall - Page 12 (plundered from a skeleton at -212, 0, -537 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Discovered on 13 Nov 2005 at 12:25:20 PST.
"Rise of the Orcs - The Fall"
Second Edition
This book details how the orcs would nearly succeed at toppling the two most powerful cities on Norrath.
The following historical account details the orc's involvement during the short, yet devastating, War of Defiance.
Simultaneously laying siege to the two largest cities on Norrath, the orcs would come close to achieving greatness, only to be crushed in the final moments.
Several accounts of this time period still exist in varying forms, which have been condensed together within this volume.
Snow Orcs: Numbering only in the hundreds, the Snow Orcs would have their numbers reinforced by the Avatar of Flame's hidden army.
Coming from the Plains of Karana, hundreds of goblins and giants would join their ranks to do battle with combined forces of the humans.
The resulting clash between forces would echo halfway across the world.
For eight days, the battle would rage. Giants would smash the Qeynosian Guard, druids would kill orcs, but neither side was winning.
Ultimately, the Qeynosians would make a valiant charge that would end the war.
The Knights of Thunder would land a killing blow against the Orcish horde by severing the head from the Avatar of Flame's shoulders.
Losing the guidance from their divine leader, the giants, goblins, and orcs would finally fall to the Qeynosians.
Not having enough troops to hunt down the stragglers, so the fallen army would scatter to the four winds. The few remaining Snow Orcs would be routed back through Blackburrow, and that is where history would last see these people.
It is not known how many Snow Orcs survived the journey through their former slaves' den, but it is known that orc bones would be seen in the gnoll's rubbish pits for months to come.
Deathfist Orcs: The siege of Freeport would not bode well for the Militia. Not expecting the combined might of the orcs and the ogres, the Militia did all they could just to keep the walls standing.
Soon enough, the humans would realize that the orcish and ogrish armies were doing nothing more than taunting them. When it was noticeable in the faces of every one of the guards that all hope was lost, something unexpected happened. A greenish mist began covering the land for as far as the eye could see. Filling the lungs of everyone, it seemed nothing more than an odd weather phenomenon. Nothing could be further from the truth.
The orcs would look in horror as they watched as all of the ogres began to cough up clouds of green colored mist from their lungs.
These spasms would become more and more violent until the ogres would collapse dead from asphyxiation. Looking all around them, the Deathfist army would see every last one of their Rallosian brethren lying dead on the battlefield, with nary a scratch on them.
To make matters worse for the orcs, the battle would be joined by two other armies, intent on finishing what the green mist had started.
Though their numbers were unimaginable, the Deathfists were not able to withstand an army on three fronts - The Freeport Militia on one side, the Ashen Order on another, and the Knights of Truth on the last.
The orcs would not go down without a fight, however. It would take the death of the Avatar of War before the Deathfist would be routed.
With their numbers reduced to the mere hundreds, the Deathfist orcs fled past the Ashen Order monks towards the Desert of Ro, where they were never seen again.
The orcs would neither be heard nor seen for the next several decades.
Aside from isolated clans that remained out of the War of Defiance, Norrath believed the threat was forever gone. With the coming of the Rending and later the Shattering, the endless hordes of the orcs would begin to become nothing more than stories again.
This would prove to be folly once again.
The re-emergence of the orcs would first be seen in the Commonlands.
A clan calling themselves the Bloodskulls would begin to become a new threat to Freeport. Using siege engines, Freeport has managed to keep these orcs at bay, but they must remain ever vigilant.
Coupled with this clan that emerged overnight, those foolish enough to ply their trade on the sea lanes claim to have seen great armadas of ships roaming the water. Those that have survived these encounters claim the crews of these ships to be made up of orcs.
Some unfounded reports claim that that the Deathfist Empire had managed to survive their defeat during the War of Defiance.
These stories claim that the phantom armadas exist and they're nothing more than the naval branch of the Deathfist Empire.
Even wilder stories claim there is a land filled with these orcs, and not only have they rebuilt their Empire, they're preparing for another attack on Norrath.
Fortunately, these stories have no proof to validate these foolish claims.
Books
Rise of the Orcs - The Fall This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book details how the orcs would nearly succeed at toppling the two most powerful cities on Norrath.
The following historical account details the orc's involvement during the short, yet devastating, War of Defiance.
Simultaneously laying siege to the two largest cities on Norrath, the orcs would come close to achieving greatness, only to be crushed in the final moments.
Several accounts of this time period still exist in varying forms, which have been condensed together within this volume.
Snow Orcs: Numbering only in the hundreds, the Snow Orcs would have their numbers reinforced by the Avatar of Flame's hidden army.
Coming from the Plains of Karana, hundreds of goblins and giants would join their ranks to do battle with combined forces of the humans.
The resulting clash between forces would echo halfway across the world.
For eight days, the battle would rage. Giants would smash the Qeynosian Guard, druids would kill orcs, but neither side was winning.
Ultimately, the Qeynosians would make a valiant charge that would end the war.
The Knights of Thunder would land a killing blow against the Orcish horde by severing the head from the Avatar of Flame's shoulders.
Losing the guidance from their divine leader, the giants, goblins, and orcs would finally fall to the Qeynosians.
Not having enough troops to hunt down the stragglers, so the fallen army would scatter to the four winds. The few remaining Snow Orcs would be routed back through Blackburrow, and that is where history would last see these people.
It is not known how many Snow Orcs survived the journey through their former slaves' den, but it is known that orc bones would be seen in the gnoll's rubbish pits for months to come.
Deathfist Orcs: The siege of Freeport would not bode well for the Militia. Not expecting the combined might of the orcs and the ogres, the Militia did all they could just to keep the walls standing.
Soon enough, the humans would realize that the orcish and ogrish armies were doing nothing more than taunting them. When it was noticeable in the faces of every one of the guards that all hope was lost, something unexpected happened. A greenish mist began covering the land for as far as the eye could see. Filling the lungs of everyone, it seemed nothing more than an odd weather phenomenon. Nothing could be further from the truth.
The orcs would look in horror as they watched as all of the ogres began to cough up clouds of green colored mist from their lungs.
These spasms would become more and more violent until the ogres would collapse dead from asphyxiation. Looking all around them, the Deathfist army would see every last one of their Rallosian brethren lying dead on the battlefield, with nary a scratch on them.
To make matters worse for the orcs, the battle would be joined by two other armies, intent on finishing what the green mist had started.
Though their numbers were unimaginable, the Deathfists were not able to withstand an army on three fronts - The Freeport Militia on one side, the Ashen Order on another, and the Knights of Truth on the last.
The orcs would not go down without a fight, however. It would take the death of the Avatar of War before the Deathfist would be routed.
With their numbers reduced to the mere hundreds, the Deathfist orcs fled past the Ashen Order monks towards the Desert of Ro, where they were never seen again.
The orcs would neither be heard nor seen for the next several decades.
Aside from isolated clans that remained out of the War of Defiance, Norrath believed the threat was forever gone. With the coming of the Rending and later the Shattering, the endless hordes of the orcs would begin to become nothing more than stories again.
This would prove to be folly once again.
The re-emergence of the orcs would first be seen in the Commonlands.
A clan calling themselves the Bloodskulls would begin to become a new threat to Freeport. Using siege engines, Freeport has managed to keep these orcs at bay, but they must remain ever vigilant.
Coupled with this clan that emerged overnight, those foolish enough to ply their trade on the sea lanes claim to have seen great armadas of ships roaming the water. Those that have survived these encounters claim the crews of these ships to be made up of orcs.
Some unfounded reports claim that that the Deathfist Empire had managed to survive their defeat during the War of Defiance.
These stories claim that the phantom armadas exist and they're nothing more than the naval branch of the Deathfist Empire.
Even wilder stories claim there is a land filled with these orcs, and not only have they rebuilt their Empire, they're preparing for another attack on Norrath.
Fortunately, these stories have no proof to validate these foolish claims.
Books
Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining - Page 2 (looted from orcs in Zek, the Orcish Wastes or plundered from a page at -204, -34, 29 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining - Page 3 (plundered from a page at -233, -29, -393 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining - Page 6 (plundered from a skeleton at -225, -26, -605 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining - Page 7 (plundered from a bucket at 235, -121, -120 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining - Page 10 (looted from orcs in Zek, the Orcish Wastes or plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining - Page 11 (looted from orcs in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Discovered on 9 Nov 2005 at 17:58:44 PST.
"Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining"
Second Edition
This book details how the orcs would organize into armies the likes of which had not been seen on Norrath for millennia.
The following historical account details what stories would describe as the main turning point in the rise of the orcs.
No longer primal savages, the orcs would organize into armies the like that hadn't been seen on Norrath for millenia.
Several accounts of thus time period still exist in varying forms, which have been condensed together within this volume.
The Deathfist: Having defeated the Freeport Militia on several occassions, the Deathfist orcs would cause the city's armies to rethink their strategies.
During this time, the Emperor of the Deathfist orcs would be visited by a being of immense power.
This visitor would cause the Deathfist to send out a call to all of the minor tribes that made up the entire empire.
The Snow Orcs: Efficiently using many ancient artifacts acquired from the Dragon Vox, the Snow Orcs would begin to push back against the barbarians.
Eventually laying siege to Halas, they would signal the death-knell for the rugged barbarians. The Snow Orcs would immediately change direction, however, after meeting with a strange visitor.
Leaving Halas behind, they began marching to the south with a determined pace.
The Crushbone: Not much is known about the Crushbone orcs during this time period.
Having taken part in a great war that ravaged the continent of Faydwer, these orcs would fade into obscurity. All that is known is that a small group of Crushbones would sail across the ocean on great ships they built, intent on joining up with the Deathfist on the main continent.
They claim their motivation for doing so would be due to a directive given to them by a mysterious visitor.
Snow Orcs: Marching through the frozen tundra of Everfrost Peaks, the Snow Orcs would gather every tribe along their way, eventually forming into a great army.
They would continue this march, annihilating everything in their path. Rather than raiding and capturing small villages along their way, they would simply kill everyone and raze the buildings to the ground.
This march would eventually end when they reached the homeland of the gnolls, Blackburrow.
Having evidenced the wanton slaughter they had caused on their way to the gnoll's home, one would expect the orcs to have done the same to the dog-men.
Instead, however, the gnolls were waiting for them and invited the orcs inside their den. No battle took place that day, and the orcs passed into the winding caves without harm.
Making camp at sites prepared for them, it become evident the orcs and the gnolls were working together.
The residents of the nearby Qeynos received word of the plight of Halas and would send forces to help the barbarians.
None of thier forces could reach the frozen tundra due to pact between the gnolls and the orcs, however.
All that would be learned during this time was the orcs now residing within Blackburrow were no longer the guests of the gnolls, but instead the masters. By now, the Snow Orcs of Blackburrow had enslaved every last gnoll and were using them to mine or for their war efforts.
Deathfist Orcs: Not long after their visit by the mysterious stranger, Emperor Gash would begin to mobilize every member of his tribe into a great army.
Spanning from the southern Rujarkian orcs to the western Kithicorian orcs of the Deathfist Empire, they all were given orders to arm themselves and collapse their nomadic camps.
The stranger's message was then delivered to every orcish soldier - War.
Amassing their mighty armies within the Desert of Ro, their ancestral homeland, the orcs began to march south.
Just like the Snow Orcs, they would decimate anyone and everything within their path.
From gypsies to desert madmen, there was nothing left alive in the Desert of Ro after they had crossed its endless dunes.
They would continue their march until they finally reached the southernmost Innothule swamp. This was where their forces were joined to an even larger army.
The Second Rallosian Empire, comprised of ogres who regained their long-lost intelligence, welcomed the orcs into their ranks.
Joining together into one great army, the Deathfist orcs watched as their Emperor fell to his knees and swore fealty to the leader of this titanic army - The Avatar of War.
When the Avatar stated that the Deathfist armies were larger than he had expected, Emperor Gash smiled enigmatically and told him, "If this is the case, then we have already won, your Divineness."
Books
Rise of the Orcs - The Rejoining This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book details how the orcs would organize into armies the likes of which had not been seen on Norrath for millennia.
The following historical account details what stories would describe as the main turning point in the rise of the orcs.
No longer primal savages, the orcs would organize into armies the like that hadn't been seen on Norrath for millenia.
Several accounts of thus time period still exist in varying forms, which have been condensed together within this volume.
The Deathfist: Having defeated the Freeport Militia on several occassions, the Deathfist orcs would cause the city's armies to rethink their strategies.
During this time, the Emperor of the Deathfist orcs would be visited by a being of immense power.
This visitor would cause the Deathfist to send out a call to all of the minor tribes that made up the entire empire.
The Snow Orcs: Efficiently using many ancient artifacts acquired from the Dragon Vox, the Snow Orcs would begin to push back against the barbarians.
Eventually laying siege to Halas, they would signal the death-knell for the rugged barbarians. The Snow Orcs would immediately change direction, however, after meeting with a strange visitor.
Leaving Halas behind, they began marching to the south with a determined pace.
The Crushbone: Not much is known about the Crushbone orcs during this time period.
Having taken part in a great war that ravaged the continent of Faydwer, these orcs would fade into obscurity. All that is known is that a small group of Crushbones would sail across the ocean on great ships they built, intent on joining up with the Deathfist on the main continent.
They claim their motivation for doing so would be due to a directive given to them by a mysterious visitor.
Snow Orcs: Marching through the frozen tundra of Everfrost Peaks, the Snow Orcs would gather every tribe along their way, eventually forming into a great army.
They would continue this march, annihilating everything in their path. Rather than raiding and capturing small villages along their way, they would simply kill everyone and raze the buildings to the ground.
This march would eventually end when they reached the homeland of the gnolls, Blackburrow.
Having evidenced the wanton slaughter they had caused on their way to the gnoll's home, one would expect the orcs to have done the same to the dog-men.
Instead, however, the gnolls were waiting for them and invited the orcs inside their den. No battle took place that day, and the orcs passed into the winding caves without harm.
Making camp at sites prepared for them, it become evident the orcs and the gnolls were working together.
The residents of the nearby Qeynos received word of the plight of Halas and would send forces to help the barbarians.
None of thier forces could reach the frozen tundra due to pact between the gnolls and the orcs, however.
All that would be learned during this time was the orcs now residing within Blackburrow were no longer the guests of the gnolls, but instead the masters. By now, the Snow Orcs of Blackburrow had enslaved every last gnoll and were using them to mine or for their war efforts.
Deathfist Orcs: Not long after their visit by the mysterious stranger, Emperor Gash would begin to mobilize every member of his tribe into a great army.
Spanning from the southern Rujarkian orcs to the western Kithicorian orcs of the Deathfist Empire, they all were given orders to arm themselves and collapse their nomadic camps.
The stranger's message was then delivered to every orcish soldier - War.
Amassing their mighty armies within the Desert of Ro, their ancestral homeland, the orcs began to march south.
Just like the Snow Orcs, they would decimate anyone and everything within their path.
From gypsies to desert madmen, there was nothing left alive in the Desert of Ro after they had crossed its endless dunes.
They would continue their march until they finally reached the southernmost Innothule swamp. This was where their forces were joined to an even larger army.
The Second Rallosian Empire, comprised of ogres who regained their long-lost intelligence, welcomed the orcs into their ranks.
Joining together into one great army, the Deathfist orcs watched as their Emperor fell to his knees and swore fealty to the leader of this titanic army - The Avatar of War.
When the Avatar stated that the Deathfist armies were larger than he had expected, Emperor Gash smiled enigmatically and told him, "If this is the case, then we have already won, your Divineness."
Books
Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing - Page 4 (plundered from a lantern at 325, -111, -109 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing - Page 5 (plundered from a bucket at 259, -118, -108 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing - Page 6 (plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing - Page 10 (plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing - Page 11 (plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing - Page 12 (plundered from pages in Zek, the Orcish Wastes or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Discovered on 11 Nov 2005 at 22:48:06 PST.
"Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing"
Second Edition
This book highlights the turning point when the orcs would start to become a force to be reckoned with.
The following historical account details what some stories describe as the "return" of the orcs.
Once primal savages, the orcs would become frightening masters of tactics and strategy not seen on Norrath for nearly a thousand years.
The following facts have been taken from many different sources ranging from fragments of parchment to tales told by elderly elves.
The Deathfist Orcs: By the Age of Turmoil, the Deathfist orcs would become a formidable threat to the city of Freeport.
Having grown in size, the Deathfist orcs would absorb all of the surrounding tribes, making them the largest tribe on Norrath.
Their numbers would prompt the Overlord of Freeport to send his armies against these savages from time to time in an attempt to keep them from destroying all commerce.
This would change one day, however.
When one of the Freeport Militia raiding parties failed to return one day, several search parties were sent after them.
When none of them returned either, one third of the Militia was sent to find the cause of their disappearance.
Of the twelve hundred soldiers that left to search for the patrols, only seventeen would return to describe what happened to the legion. Their tale would change the way people viewed the orcs the world over.
As the legion reached the last known site of the troops, they spotted several orcs fleeing into a narrow ravine.
Following them into the ravine, they spotted the mangled bodies of their fallen comrades. At that same moment, a wave of boulders fell from the surrounding cliffs, closing off their escape.
That was when the hundreds of enraged, trained elephants were let loose by the Deathfist orcs. At full speed, they began to stampede through the ravine... straight for the doomed Militia.
The Snow Orcs: During this time, the Snow Orc's numbers would be reduced drastically.
Having been driven to the eastern half of Everfrost Peaks, the Snow Orcs were wedged between the lair of a mighty dragon on one side and the ever-expanding mammoth-tusk trade on the other.
Were it not for a change in the way they used their weapons, the snow orcs would count this time period as their last on Norrath.
The shamans of the Snow Orc tribes would at times raise the bodies of the fallen, friend or foe alike.
These icy boned skeletons would then be sent loose to wander the frozen wastelands, attacking anything it would find. The Snow Orcs hoped that the skeletons would one day find a barbarian or adventurer and kill them.
By some unknown means, the Snow Orcs would change tactics and start using their undead minions with surprising efficiency.
Cleverly hiding their actions from everyone, the orcs would begin to bury many lines of skeletons beneath the snow outside the entrance to the great dragon's lair.
As great heroes would come running out of her lair holding some stolen artifact, a group of orc shamans would be waiting. At the precise moment, all of the shamans would raise the skeletons to life, trapping the raiding party inside a circle of hundreds of skeletons.
It wouldn't take long for the undead to overwhelm the heroes. The Snow orcs would then take the artifacts from the dead adventurers, flay the flesh from their bones, and add them to their army of undead.
The Crushbone Orcs : No one knows for sure where they acquired them, but by this time in history the Crushbone orcs would be seen carrying weapons of dark elf make.
Rumors tell of a dark elf ambassador being seen in the highest tower of the orc's castle, so it can only be assumed the orcs had brokered a deal with their people.
Considering the less than philanthropic nature of the dark elves, it is still a mystery as to what the orcs were providing in return.
The Crushbone orcs would claim a stunning victory against the elves of Kelethin one fateful day.
Amassing their highly trained armies, they launched an attack against both the dwarven city of Kaladim and the high elven city of Felwithe.
The residents of the tree city of Kelethin split their forces to help defend their allies' cities and were able to stop the orcish legionnaires with only minimal causalities.
Little did they know, the true target of the orcish assault was the city of Kelethin.
Attacking with their real army, the Crushbone orcs would succeed at chopping down two of the ancient trees supporting the wood elf city.
By the time the wood elves would return home and put a stop to the orcs, half of Kelethin would be destroyed.
Books
Rise of the Orcs - The Rousing This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book highlights the turning point when the orcs would start to become a force to be reckoned with.
The following historical account details what some stories describe as the "return" of the orcs.
Once primal savages, the orcs would become frightening masters of tactics and strategy not seen on Norrath for nearly a thousand years.
The following facts have been taken from many different sources ranging from fragments of parchment to tales told by elderly elves.
The Deathfist Orcs: By the Age of Turmoil, the Deathfist orcs would become a formidable threat to the city of Freeport.
Having grown in size, the Deathfist orcs would absorb all of the surrounding tribes, making them the largest tribe on Norrath.
Their numbers would prompt the Overlord of Freeport to send his armies against these savages from time to time in an attempt to keep them from destroying all commerce.
This would change one day, however.
When one of the Freeport Militia raiding parties failed to return one day, several search parties were sent after them.
When none of them returned either, one third of the Militia was sent to find the cause of their disappearance.
Of the twelve hundred soldiers that left to search for the patrols, only seventeen would return to describe what happened to the legion. Their tale would change the way people viewed the orcs the world over.
As the legion reached the last known site of the troops, they spotted several orcs fleeing into a narrow ravine.
Following them into the ravine, they spotted the mangled bodies of their fallen comrades. At that same moment, a wave of boulders fell from the surrounding cliffs, closing off their escape.
That was when the hundreds of enraged, trained elephants were let loose by the Deathfist orcs. At full speed, they began to stampede through the ravine... straight for the doomed Militia.
The Snow Orcs: During this time, the Snow Orc's numbers would be reduced drastically.
Having been driven to the eastern half of Everfrost Peaks, the Snow Orcs were wedged between the lair of a mighty dragon on one side and the ever-expanding mammoth-tusk trade on the other.
Were it not for a change in the way they used their weapons, the snow orcs would count this time period as their last on Norrath.
The shamans of the Snow Orc tribes would at times raise the bodies of the fallen, friend or foe alike.
These icy boned skeletons would then be sent loose to wander the frozen wastelands, attacking anything it would find. The Snow Orcs hoped that the skeletons would one day find a barbarian or adventurer and kill them.
By some unknown means, the Snow Orcs would change tactics and start using their undead minions with surprising efficiency.
Cleverly hiding their actions from everyone, the orcs would begin to bury many lines of skeletons beneath the snow outside the entrance to the great dragon's lair.
As great heroes would come running out of her lair holding some stolen artifact, a group of orc shamans would be waiting. At the precise moment, all of the shamans would raise the skeletons to life, trapping the raiding party inside a circle of hundreds of skeletons.
It wouldn't take long for the undead to overwhelm the heroes. The Snow orcs would then take the artifacts from the dead adventurers, flay the flesh from their bones, and add them to their army of undead.
The Crushbone Orcs : No one knows for sure where they acquired them, but by this time in history the Crushbone orcs would be seen carrying weapons of dark elf make.
Rumors tell of a dark elf ambassador being seen in the highest tower of the orc's castle, so it can only be assumed the orcs had brokered a deal with their people.
Considering the less than philanthropic nature of the dark elves, it is still a mystery as to what the orcs were providing in return.
The Crushbone orcs would claim a stunning victory against the elves of Kelethin one fateful day.
Amassing their highly trained armies, they launched an attack against both the dwarven city of Kaladim and the high elven city of Felwithe.
The residents of the tree city of Kelethin split their forces to help defend their allies' cities and were able to stop the orcish legionnaires with only minimal causalities.
Little did they know, the true target of the orcish assault was the city of Kelethin.
Attacking with their real army, the Crushbone orcs would succeed at chopping down two of the ancient trees supporting the wood elf city.
By the time the wood elves would return home and put a stop to the orcs, half of Kelethin would be destroyed.
Books
Snuffing the Fireknight This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 1 (looted in The Lesser Faydark)
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 2 (looted in The Lesser Faydark)
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 3 (looted in The Lesser Faydark)
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 4 (looted in Loping Plains)
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 5 (looted in Loping Plains)
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 6 (looted in New Tunaria)
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 7 (looted in New Tunaria)
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 8 (looted in Mistmoore Catacombs)
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 9 (looted in Mistmoore Catacombs)
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 10 (looted in Kaladim)
Snuffing the Fireknight - Page 11 (looted in Kaladim)
Discovered on 30 Nov 2006 at 16:26:47 PST.
Snuffing the Fireknight -a memoir- by Varyn T'Vael
It was Marghya's idea to approach his companions. We thought her foolish, we were wrong. "Their price," she argued, "will be far cheaper in the long run." We put no stop to her attempt. She laughed at our "approval." "In time," she replied. According to her, we all had more learning to do. She was right; our studies kept us occupied.
Marghya busied herself elsewhere, but the three of us -- Darjyl, Rhentos, and myself -- unlocked the secrets of fire. We learned its secrets while he, the Fireknight, used them to terrorize our people, burn our fields, slay our cattle, and undermine our power. Marghya -- as always -- stressed patience.
We heard his stories at least once a week. "Tall as a hill giant," they would say. "Can cleave a horse in two with one stroke," "eats the flesh of his victims," "sears the ground where he walks and is as hot as a brand to the touch." As his path neared our keep the stories changed. "Saved a babe from the river," "put the man to death but gave his herd to those he had mistreated," "freed the entire house staff."
His nearing presence made Marghya giddy. Our studies complete, she called us together. "It is time." She donned a hood and fled into the night. Darjyl and Rhentos slept. I tried, but visions of fiery torment stained my mind. When Marghya returned her wicked grin called our attention. "It is done." She retreated quickly to her study, saying only, "tomorrow," before closing herself off and leaving us with naught to do but wait.
Come morning the courtyard was alive with commotion. I strained yet failed to pick out the shouted words. Instead it was Marghya's familiar grim that told me of the Fireknight's presence. She led us to the ramparts, the four of us ready to meet the four crusaders: the Fireknight and his three companions. The crowd parted and they approached. The Fireknight cut the air with a hot shimmer. The cloak about him was dark red, a coal that refused to die. He drew his blade and spoke, ordering us to change... everything. We looked to Marghya, she smiled and raised her scepter.
The scepter dropped, the crowd gasped. The Fireknight's three companions faced him, weapons ready. Confidence left his lips in a boisterous laugh, but it would not save him. Marghya prepared her spells. Darjyl, Rhentos, and I did the same. When Marghya finally spoke her word, 'Vantaer,' we focused our energy on the Fireknight.
By then the knight had already killed one of his companions, the dwarf's body shaking in the street. Only a moment later the Erudite fell, gutted and choking. The Fireknight spun to face the elf but our magic broke through and his body twisted to the ground, the sword fell from his grasp, and his gaze came to us. His eyes hurt to look upon, his rage was undeniable, but we dared not flinch lest our spells falter. Marghya held up her hand for the crowd to see. She closed her fist and with it the eyes of the Fireknight.
That night we gathered in Marghya's study. The Fireknight's cloak lay before us. "Two reasons," Marghya spoke. "This has become part of his legend, we must destroy it to destroy him. And, of course, the power we extract from it will fuel our needs." We nodded, and Marghya finally revealed her plan. We stripped the cloak's enchantment -- as much as we could, at least -- prior to taking it apart. The leather, the silk and the woven steel shimmered with power even when separated.
To Darjyl, Marghya gave the woven steel portion of the cloak, sending him to the fiery mountains to Solusek where a gnomish friend would be waiting. To Rhentos she gave the silken garment, sending him to the Catacombs of Mistmoore where he would meet with the Magelords of our sister coven, with whom Marghya had already hatched a separate plan. To me she gave the heavy leather, and the dirty task of feeding Jhal'Dolek.
When we returned, our cloaks faded and impotent, Marghya wrapped the bodies of the Fireknight's fallen comrades in the fabrics, a final symbol of disdain. To the elf ranger, alive, yet hysterical, she gave the final cloak. The Fireknight's body we never saw, nor were we privy to what Marghya did with it, but the stories from the commoners -- true or not -- left us all uneasy.
It was thus that Marghya snuffed out the Fireknight. His legend she twisted and made her own, until the stories the commoners and slaves told were not of the mythical Fireknight, but Marghya and her Magelords, and the terrible powers they controlled. The cloak, his sigil, defeated and destroyed, served as a reminder to those that would question our rule.
Books
Snuffing the Fireknight This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
Snuffing the Fireknight -a memoir- by Varyn T'Vael
It was Marghya's idea to approach his companions. We thought her foolish, we were wrong. "Their price," she argued, "will be far cheaper in the long run." We put no stop to her attempt. She laughed at our "approval." "In time," she replied. According to her, we all had more learning to do. She was right; our studies kept us occupied.
Marghya busied herself elsewhere, but the three of us -- Darjyl, Rhentos, and myself -- unlocked the secrets of fire. We learned its secrets while he, the Fireknight, used them to terrorize our people, burn our fields, slay our cattle, and undermine our power. Marghya -- as always -- stressed patience.
We heard his stories at least once a week. "Tall as a hill giant," they would say. "Can cleave a horse in two with one stroke," "eats the flesh of his victims," "sears the ground where he walks and is as hot as a brand to the touch." As his path neared our keep the stories changed. "Saved a babe from the river," "put the man to death but gave his herd to those he had mistreated," "freed the entire house staff."
His nearing presence made Marghya giddy. Our studies complete, she called us together. "It is time." She donned a hood and fled into the night. Darjyl and Rhentos slept. I tried, but visions of fiery torment stained my mind. When Marghya returned her wicked grin called our attention. "It is done." She retreated quickly to her study, saying only, "tomorrow," before closing herself off and leaving us with naught to do but wait.
Come morning the courtyard was alive with commotion. I strained yet failed to pick out the shouted words. Instead it was Marghya's familiar grim that told me of the Fireknight's presence. She led us to the ramparts, the four of us ready to meet the four crusaders: the Fireknight and his three companions. The crowd parted and they approached. The Fireknight cut the air with a hot shimmer. The cloak about him was dark red, a coal that refused to die. He drew his blade and spoke, ordering us to change... everything. We looked to Marghya, she smiled and raised her scepter.
The scepter dropped, the crowd gasped. The Fireknight's three companions faced him, weapons ready. Confidence left his lips in a boisterous laugh, but it would not save him. Marghya prepared her spells. Darjyl, Rhentos, and I did the same. When Marghya finally spoke her word, 'Vantaer,' we focused our energy on the Fireknight.
By then the knight had already killed one of his companions, the dwarf's body shaking in the street. Only a moment later the Erudite fell, gutted and choking. The Fireknight spun to face the elf but our magic broke through and his body twisted to the ground, the sword fell from his grasp, and his gaze came to us. His eyes hurt to look upon, his rage was undeniable, but we dared not flinch lest our spells falter. Marghya held up her hand for the crowd to see. She closed her fist and with it the eyes of the Fireknight.
That night we gathered in Marghya's study. The Fireknight's cloak lay before us. "Two reasons," Marghya spoke. "This has become part of his legend, we must destroy it to destroy him. And, of course, the power we extract from it will fuel our needs." We nodded, and Marghya finally revealed her plan. We stripped the cloak's enchantment -- as much as we could, at least -- prior to taking it apart. The leather, the silk and the woven steel shimmered with power even when separated.
To Darjyl, Marghya gave the woven steel portion of the cloak, sending him to the fiery mountains to Solusek where a gnomish friend would be waiting. To Rhentos she gave the silken garment, sending him to the Catacombs of Mistmoore where he would meet with the Magelords of our sister coven, with whom Marghya had already hatched a separate plan. To me she gave the heavy leather, and the dirty task of feeding Jhal'Dolek.
When we returned, our cloaks faded and impotent, Marghya wrapped the bodies of the Fireknight's fallen comrades in the fabrics, a final symbol of disdain. To the elf ranger, alive, yet hysterical, she gave the final cloak. The Fireknight's body we never saw, nor were we privy to what Marghya did with it, but the stories from the commoners -- true or not -- left us all uneasy.
It was thus that Marghya snuffed out the Fireknight. His legend she twisted and made her own, until the stories the commoners and slaves told were not of the mythical Fireknight, but Marghya and her Magelords, and the terrible powers they controlled. The cloak, his sigil, defeated and destroyed, served as a reminder to those that would question our rule.
Books
The Contentment This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is a creation myth as told by the Valkyrie.
When the world was still young, all things were clean. The elements worked in harmony and the Urges of Heaven were calm.
This was the time known as the Contentment. All things were good and all things were at peace. This would soon change with the coming of the mortals.
As life would begin, the Contentment would end.
As the Urges of Heaven would lay their seeds in the earth, they would blossom into beings great and small.
Running out of room to grow, these children of the Urges would eventually struggle against each other for dominance.
Seeing this, the Urge of Ice bore her children and hid them deep away within her own home, one of never-ending Ice.
The children of Ice would be named Valkyries, and old word in their Mother Urge's hidden tongue. Free from the predations of the other children, the Valkyries were free to create a society unhampered by warfare. As their numbers multiplied, they would eventually create a mighty kingdom that prospered in peace.
Building huge spires that floated in the sky, the Valkyries would exist in pure harmony.
The Urge of Ice would smile upon them, for she had created the only children that amongst all the Urges that would see this bliss.
Choosing one of these women as her emissary, she would leave them to their eternal rapture as the Urge attended to other matters.
Their ruler, Frikka, was the most beautiful of all the Valkyries. Her wings were as black as a calm dream and her crimson hair was as vibrant as her heart.
Soaring among her sisters and daughters and mothers, all the Valkyries admired her for what she was - a symbol of complete perfection.
Frikka would take the Mother Urge's blessing and spread it out to her people.
Promoting the arts, ballads and paintings and sculptures would be made to honor the concept of perfection and harmony. This would continue for many ages and the Valkyries would enjoy a life free of pain and hurt.
Just as the Contentment would end, so would the perfect world of the Valkyries.
As Frikka sat upon her throne, she would think of things that she could give to her people to make them even happier.
As she would delve deeper into contemplation she began to think of things she had never thought of before. One of these things was the nature of Happiness itself. She knew what being happy was, but she did not understand what it was NOT.
So she continued to think on this.
Telling her people that she was contemplating a new gift that the Valkyries were to be given, Frikka shut herself away for a long time.
Locked away in a room by herself, she thought not just about Happiness, but of Peace and Harmony.
If she was to make these concepts even greater, she must understand where they came from.
After a great deal of time had passed, she gained understanding of what it was to be happy.
She understood the nature of peace. She knew how harmony came into being. And with this understanding, she now knew how to increase this among her people.
Frikka stood upon her balcony and gazed down at her people as they gently floated through the sky. Unfurling her exquisite black wings, she flew out to join them.
Frikka was the greatest Queen of the Valkyries, for not only did she create the greatest age of the Valkyries, she would also be the one to tear it apart.
For in her contemplation on the nature of Happiness, Peace, and Harmony she found what the Mother Urge had hidden from her children - Despair, War, and Strife.
Books
The Contentment This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
The Contentment - Page 6 (shinies or looted in Everfrost)
The Contentment - Page 8 (shinies in Everfrost)
The Contentment - Page 10 (looted in Everfrost)
The Contentment - Page 11 (shinies in Everfrost)
The Contentment - Page 12 (looted in Everfrost)
Discovered on 12 Nov 2005 at 20:17:25 PST.
The Contentment
Second Edition
This book is a creation myth as told by the Valkyrie.
When the world was still young, all things were clean. The elements worked in harmony and the Urges of Heaven were calm.
This was the time known as the Contentment. All things were good and all things were at peace. This would soon change with the coming of the mortals.
As life would begin, the Contentment would end.
As the Urges of Heaven would lay their seeds in the earth, they would blossom into beings great and small.
Running out of room to grow, these children of the Urges would eventually struggle against each other for dominance.
Seeing this, the Urge of Ice bore her children and hid them deep away within her own home, one of never-ending Ice.
The children of Ice would be named Valkyries, and old word in their Mother Urge's hidden tongue. Free from the predations of the other children, the Valkyries were free to create a society unhampered by warfare. As their numbers multiplied, they would eventually create a mighty kingdom that prospered in peace.
Building huge spires that floated in the sky, the Valkyries would exist in pure harmony.
The Urge of Ice would smile upon them, for she had created the only children that amongst all the Urges that would see this bliss.
Choosing one of these women as her emissary, she would leave them to their eternal rapture as the Urge attended to other matters.
Their ruler, Frikka, was the most beautiful of all the Valkyries. Her wings were as black as a calm dream and her crimson hair was as vibrant as her heart.
Soaring among her sisters and daughters and mothers, all the Valkyries admired her for what she was - a symbol of complete perfection.
Frikka would take the Mother Urge's blessing and spread it out to her people.
Promoting the arts, ballads and paintings and sculptures would be made to honor the concept of perfection and harmony. This would continue for many ages and the Valkyries would enjoy a life free of pain and hurt.
Just as the Contentment would end, so would the perfect world of the Valkyries.
As Frikka sat upon her throne, she would think of things that she could give to her people to make them even happier.
As she would delve deeper into contemplation she began to think of things she had never thought of before. One of these things was the nature of Happiness itself. She knew what being happy was, but she did not understand what it was NOT.
So she continued to think on this.
Telling her people that she was contemplating a new gift that the Valkyries were to be given, Frikka shut herself away for a long time.
Locked away in a room by herself, she thought not just about Happiness, but of Peace and Harmony.
If she was to make these concepts even greater, she must understand where they came from.
After a great deal of time had passed, she gained understanding of what it was to be happy.
She understood the nature of peace. She knew how harmony came into being. And with this understanding, she now knew how to increase this among her people.
Frikka stood upon her balcony and gazed down at her people as they gently floated through the sky. Unfurling her exquisite black wings, she flew out to join them.
Frikka was the greatest Queen of the Valkyries, for not only did she create the greatest age of the Valkyries, she would also be the one to tear it apart.
For in her contemplation on the nature of Happiness, Peace, and Harmony she found what the Mother Urge had hidden from her children - Despair, War, and Strife.
Books
The Dying This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is a creation myth as told by the Valkyrie.
When the world would enter its twilight years, the memories of youth would become bittersweet. The elements would clash against each other and the Urges would withdraw. This time was known as the Dying. Things were only good or bad, there was no in between. And the world would be introduced to people they had never seen before.
The Mother Urge had watched what had happened to her children during her absence. The "gifts" that the queen of the Valkyries, Frikka, had given to her beautiful children had destroyed them.
In a scream of both anguish and anger, a wave of force washed over everyone of the Valkyries.
As the divine force spread into the bodies of the Valkyries, they felt gut-wrenching pain course through their bodies.
All around them, they felt something they had never felt before - Disappointment. Then they felt another feeling - Horror.
For one by one, the Valkyries began to watch as they changed.
Their hair was the first to change.
The Valkyries watched as their color from their black hair began to drain, dripping down their backs. When the draining was done, it had no color.
The worst was to come next. After their hair drained, they stood in shock as their wings would do the same. When the draining was complete, they would be as full of color as the ice they lived within.
Not understanding what was happening, they looked around at each other.
Ceasing their warfare for a moment, they spied something from way up high. Above them, there was a small black speck that was becoming larger and larger.
As it got closer, they realized it for what it was - their queen, Frikka.
Plummeting to the ground, Frikka still possessed the beautiful color of the Valkyries. But another color, red, covered her entire body.
As they watched, she made no attempt to stop her descent. Finally, after what would seem an eternity, Frikka would hit the ground with an impact that left enormous crater many miles below.
And for the first time ever, the Valkyries learned another concept - Death.
The houses and temples that floated in the air were soon to follow their queen.
One by one, the structures plummeted to the ground below, leaving only the Valkyries that hovered in the air. And soon, they too would be moved.
The Mother Urge showed her face to her children, and in one fell swoop exiled them from her home forever.
Foreigners in a new land, the Valkyries would quickly come to terms with their newfound mortality.
Losing many of their numbers to the creatures that already existed upon this world, they would eventually build a new home.
Having been exiled from their original home, the Valkyries would need to learn to survive in this brave new land.
Encountering beasts with great horns was only the first of many obstacles the Valkyries would have to overcome.
Creatures very much like themselves, yet with no wings, would harass them from time to time.
Gathering together, they would divert their War from among themselves and direct it toward these enemies.
To this day, these proud people remain within the icy reaches of the cold northlands. Keeping to themselves, not much is known about them.
What is known, though, is that they claim to want three things - they want an end to war, and an end to strife, and an end to their eternal despair.
Books
The Dying This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
The Dying - Page 6 (shinies or looted in Everfrost)
The Dying - Page 7 (shinies in Everfrost)
The Dying - Page 8 (shinies in Everfrost)
Discovered on 14 Nov 2005 at 22:17:09 PST.
The Dying
Second Edition
This book is a creation myth as told by the Valkyrie.
When the world would enter its twilight years, the memories of youth would become bittersweet. The elements would clash against each other and the Urges would withdraw. This time was known as the Dying. Things were only good or bad, there was no in between. And the world would be introduced to people they had never seen before.
The Mother Urge had watched what had happened to her children during her absence. The "gifts" that the queen of the Valkyries, Frikka, had given to her beautiful children had destroyed them.
In a scream of both anguish and anger, a wave of force washed over everyone of the Valkyries.
As the divine force spread into the bodies of the Valkyries, they felt gut-wrenching pain course through their bodies.
All around them, they felt something they had never felt before - Disappointment. Then they felt another feeling - Horror.
For one by one, the Valkyries began to watch as they changed.
Their hair was the first to change.
The Valkyries watched as their color from their black hair began to drain, dripping down their backs. When the draining was done, it had no color.
The worst was to come next. After their hair drained, they stood in shock as their wings would do the same. When the draining was complete, they would be as full of color as the ice they lived within.
Not understanding what was happening, they looked around at each other.
Ceasing their warfare for a moment, they spied something from way up high. Above them, there was a small black speck that was becoming larger and larger.
As it got closer, they realized it for what it was - their queen, Frikka.
Plummeting to the ground, Frikka still possessed the beautiful color of the Valkyries. But another color, red, covered her entire body.
As they watched, she made no attempt to stop her descent. Finally, after what would seem an eternity, Frikka would hit the ground with an impact that left enormous crater many miles below.
And for the first time ever, the Valkyries learned another concept - Death.
The houses and temples that floated in the air were soon to follow their queen.
One by one, the structures plummeted to the ground below, leaving only the Valkyries that hovered in the air. And soon, they too would be moved.
The Mother Urge showed her face to her children, and in one fell swoop exiled them from her home forever.
Foreigners in a new land, the Valkyries would quickly come to terms with their newfound mortality.
Losing many of their numbers to the creatures that already existed upon this world, they would eventually build a new home.
Having been exiled from their original home, the Valkyries would need to learn to survive in this brave new land.
Encountering beasts with great horns was only the first of many obstacles the Valkyries would have to overcome.
Creatures very much like themselves, yet with no wings, would harass them from time to time.
Gathering together, they would divert their War from among themselves and direct it toward these enemies.
To this day, these proud people remain within the icy reaches of the cold northlands. Keeping to themselves, not much is known about them.
What is known, though, is that they claim to want three things - they want an end to war, and an end to strife, and an end to their eternal despair.
Books
The First Battle This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
The First Battle - Page 1 (shinies or looted in Everfrost)
The First Battle - Page 2 (shinies in Everfrost)
The First Battle - Page 3 (shinies in Everfrost)
The First Battle - Page 9 (looted in Everfrost)
The First Battle - Page 11 (shinies in Everfrost)
The First Battle - Page 12 (looted in Everfrost)
Discovered on 13 Nov 2005 at 20:35:20 PST.
The First Battle
Second Edition
This book is a creation myth as told by the Minotaurs
When it began, there was but Earth and Sky. Nothing else existed, for nothing had to.
They were not friends, nor were they enemies. And this is the way it would be countless ages, for there was no such thing as time.
But all things must come to an end, as did the wholeness of Earth and Sky.
Sky was loud and Earth was quiet.
Sky was quick to anger and would scream when upset, which would happen much of the time. Earth was slow to anger, but when provoked would rumble louder and groan with its displeasure. Not understanding Sky, Earth took a piece of its partner and created companions that had some of its own qualities.
And thus, the Kings were made.
Seeing the companions Earth had made, Sky took a piece of its partner and made a companion of its own.
Placing a piece of itself into the piece of Earth, it floated in the space that was Sky. And since Sky only did this out of jealousy, Sky told its new companion that it should be seen by all of the Kings and Earth to let them know that Sky's companion was better.
And this, the Sun was made.
Soon enough, both Earth and the Kings would see the greatness of the Sky Sun.
Earth wanted the Sky Sun as a companion as well and asked the Kings to spread their great wings and fly upwards to snatch it from Sky. Sky, remaining ever jealous, told Sky Sun to go away whenever the Kings flew too close.
Thus, Night and Day were made.
Sky, being insecure, was lonely whenever the Sky Sun would leave her alone.
So Sky, in her jealousy, reached down again and took another piece from Earth and made two more companions.
Having taken a large piece, Sky cut it in half and made two companions. Though not as bright as the Sky Sun, both of these new companions would entertain Sky when the Sky Sun was away.
And thus, the Two Moons were made.
Earth watched as Sky created more companions and after much consideration, chose to make more companions than Sky ever could.
He reached up and grabbed many pieces of Sky and made companion after companion after companion. Soon enough, there were more companions than could be counted.
And thus, Life was created.
Sky soon noticed that it only had three companions and Earth had many.
Barely able to contain its anger Sky screamed like a bawling child. The screaming continued for so much time that when it finally calmed, Sky looked down and saw that it had scattered Life to many different corners of Earth.
And thus, the Races were made.
Feeling anger for what Sky had done to Life, Earth had erupted into anger.
Lashing out personally at Sky, it hurled itself up towards its partner. Fiery violence flew high towards Sky, cutting her and scraping her. Every blow landed against Sky would create a small little hole to mark the damage, and all of the fists would fall back to Earth.
And thus, the Stars and the Mountains were made.
From every cut that punctured its body, Sky would bleed. And since there were hundreds of punches, there was much blood.
Sky would bleed and bleed, not stopping for many ages. Covering Earth in its blood, it would take many ages before Sky would staunch the flow, though never healing the wounds.
And thus, the Oceans were made.
This would be known as the First Battle. It would mark the beginning of the endless battle between Earth and Sky.
The fight would last for many eternities, for both sides were no longer partners but now enemies.
This would continue until the Last Battle would come one day.
Books
The First Battle This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is a creation myth as told by the Minotaurs
When it began, there was but Earth and Sky. Nothing else existed, for nothing had to.
They were not friends, nor were they enemies. And this is the way it would be countless ages, for there was no such thing as time.
But all things must come to an end, as did the wholeness of Earth and Sky.
Sky was loud and Earth was quiet.
Sky was quick to anger and would scream when upset, which would happen much of the time. Earth was slow to anger, but when provoked would rumble louder and groan with its displeasure. Not understanding Sky, Earth took a piece of its partner and created companions that had some of its own qualities.
And thus, the Kings were made.
Seeing the companions Earth had made, Sky took a piece of its partner and made a companion of its own.
Placing a piece of itself into the piece of Earth, it floated in the space that was Sky. And since Sky only did this out of jealousy, Sky told its new companion that it should be seen by all of the Kings and Earth to let them know that Sky's companion was better.
And this, the Sun was made.
Soon enough, both Earth and the Kings would see the greatness of the Sky Sun.
Earth wanted the Sky Sun as a companion as well and asked the Kings to spread their great wings and fly upwards to snatch it from Sky. Sky, remaining ever jealous, told Sky Sun to go away whenever the Kings flew too close.
Thus, Night and Day were made.
Sky, being insecure, was lonely whenever the Sky Sun would leave her alone.
So Sky, in her jealousy, reached down again and took another piece from Earth and made two more companions.
Having taken a large piece, Sky cut it in half and made two companions. Though not as bright as the Sky Sun, both of these new companions would entertain Sky when the Sky Sun was away.
And thus, the Two Moons were made.
Earth watched as Sky created more companions and after much consideration, chose to make more companions than Sky ever could.
He reached up and grabbed many pieces of Sky and made companion after companion after companion. Soon enough, there were more companions than could be counted.
And thus, Life was created.
Sky soon noticed that it only had three companions and Earth had many.
Barely able to contain its anger Sky screamed like a bawling child. The screaming continued for so much time that when it finally calmed, Sky looked down and saw that it had scattered Life to many different corners of Earth.
And thus, the Races were made.
Feeling anger for what Sky had done to Life, Earth had erupted into anger.
Lashing out personally at Sky, it hurled itself up towards its partner. Fiery violence flew high towards Sky, cutting her and scraping her. Every blow landed against Sky would create a small little hole to mark the damage, and all of the fists would fall back to Earth.
And thus, the Stars and the Mountains were made.
From every cut that punctured its body, Sky would bleed. And since there were hundreds of punches, there was much blood.
Sky would bleed and bleed, not stopping for many ages. Covering Earth in its blood, it would take many ages before Sky would staunch the flow, though never healing the wounds.
And thus, the Oceans were made.
This would be known as the First Battle. It would mark the beginning of the endless battle between Earth and Sky.
The fight would last for many eternities, for both sides were no longer partners but now enemies.
This would continue until the Last Battle would come one day.
Books
The Growing This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is a creation myth as told by the Valkyrie
As the world aged, the innocence of youth would begin to fade.
As the elements would rebuff one another, so too would the Urges bristle in the presence of another. This was the time known as the Growing.
Things were neither good nor were they bad, for the mortals would be the ones to make the ultimate choice. However, this was not the case everywhere.
In another world, in a world of never-ending Ice, there would be a place where the Contentment never ended.
The Valkyries soared throughout their kingdom city known as the Cloister of Euphoria. Being led by their queen, Frikka, they would know only Happiness, Peace, and Harmony. After ages of contemplation, the queen would understand how this came to be. For you see, Frikka was the first Valkyrie to think of the opposite.
Knowing that Happiness came from the absence of Despair, that Peace came about from the end War, and Harmony was known only when Strife was overcome.
Seeing that her people did not know this, they could never appreciate what it was that they had. And that was what she would give to the Valkyries - appreciation of the gifts given to them by the Mother Urge.
Gathering her people together, she gave a grand speech about what it was that she had found.
She explained to them what they were missing in their lives, but her speech was only met with blank stares.
As she continued, she saw that she would have to give a demonstration of what she meant.
In order for her people to understand Happiness she must show them Despair. Selecting from the crowd the greatest ballad singer within the Cloister of Euphoria, the queen banished her to a life in exile. For the first time ever, a cry of anguish was heard within the Cloister. Frikka explained that only when the singer would return to the Cloister, would Despair end and Happiness resume.
In order for her people to understand Peace, she would have to show them what War was.
She divided the Cloister of Euphoria into two peoples and set them against each other. Initially not knowing what to do, they stood there.
After some time, however, the Valkyries got the hang of it and aggressively attacked each other. Frikka explained that once everyone could learn to get along with each other, War would end and Peace would begin.
In order for her people to understand Harmony, she would have to show them what Strife was.
To demonstrate this she began to destroy all of the art, all of the songs, and all of the sculpture within the Cloister of Euphoria. As the Valkyries looked at their spartan surroundings, they felt strife deep in their hearts.
Frikka explained that when the art, and with it comfort, would return is when Strife would end and Harmony would begin again.
Frikka concluded her speech to the Valkyries by telling them that when all Happiness, Peace, and Harmony would return, the people would truly appreciate it all the more.
Leaving her people with her greatest gift, she returned to her chambers to think upon what more she could give her people.
As she sat in her chamber knowing that her people were no longer living in ignorance, Frikka felt as if she had granted her people a new life.
She stood upon her balcony and watched as the maiden after maiden would fight against each other, struggling to survive, and many wallowing in the depths of anguish.
And she knew this would be all for the better one day.
As she contemplated what she saw in the now ruined city of the Cloister, she was approached by the Urge of Ice.
The Mother Urge asked Frikka what had happened in her absence and Frikka explained everything she had done for the Valkyries.
The Mother Urge exploded in a fury never before seen by the Valkyries and its wake washed over them all.
Books
The Growing This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
The Growing - Page 2 (shinies or looted in Everfrost)
The Growing - Page 3 (shinies in Everfrost)
The Growing - Page 6 (shinies in Everfrost)
The Growing - Page 7 (shinies in Everfrost)
The Growing - Page 10 (shinies or looted in Everfrost)
The Growing - Page 11 (shinies or looted in Everfrost)
Discovered on 18 Nov 2005 at 2:33:46 PST.
The Growing
Second Edition
This book is a creation myth as told by the Valkyrie
As the world aged, the innocence of youth would begin to fade.
As the elements would rebuff one another, so too would the Urges bristle in the presence of another. This was the time known as the Growing.
Things were neither good nor were they bad, for the mortals would be the ones to make the ultimate choice. However, this was not the case everywhere.
In another world, in a world of never-ending Ice, there would be a place where the Contentment never ended.
The Valkyries soared throughout their kingdom city known as the Cloister of Euphoria. Being led by their queen, Frikka, they would know only Happiness, Peace, and Harmony. After ages of contemplation, the queen would understand how this came to be. For you see, Frikka was the first Valkyrie to think of the opposite.
Knowing that Happiness came from the absence of Despair, that Peace came about from the end War, and Harmony was known only when Strife was overcome.
Seeing that her people did not know this, they could never appreciate what it was that they had. And that was what she would give to the Valkyries - appreciation of the gifts given to them by the Mother Urge.
Gathering her people together, she gave a grand speech about what it was that she had found.
She explained to them what they were missing in their lives, but her speech was only met with blank stares.
As she continued, she saw that she would have to give a demonstration of what she meant.
In order for her people to understand Happiness she must show them Despair. Selecting from the crowd the greatest ballad singer within the Cloister of Euphoria, the queen banished her to a life in exile. For the first time ever, a cry of anguish was heard within the Cloister. Frikka explained that only when the singer would return to the Cloister, would Despair end and Happiness resume.
In order for her people to understand Peace, she would have to show them what War was.
She divided the Cloister of Euphoria into two peoples and set them against each other. Initially not knowing what to do, they stood there.
After some time, however, the Valkyries got the hang of it and aggressively attacked each other. Frikka explained that once everyone could learn to get along with each other, War would end and Peace would begin.
In order for her people to understand Harmony, she would have to show them what Strife was.
To demonstrate this she began to destroy all of the art, all of the songs, and all of the sculpture within the Cloister of Euphoria. As the Valkyries looked at their spartan surroundings, they felt strife deep in their hearts.
Frikka explained that when the art, and with it comfort, would return is when Strife would end and Harmony would begin again.
Frikka concluded her speech to the Valkyries by telling them that when all Happiness, Peace, and Harmony would return, the people would truly appreciate it all the more.
Leaving her people with her greatest gift, she returned to her chambers to think upon what more she could give her people.
As she sat in her chamber knowing that her people were no longer living in ignorance, Frikka felt as if she had granted her people a new life.
She stood upon her balcony and watched as the maiden after maiden would fight against each other, struggling to survive, and many wallowing in the depths of anguish.
And she knew this would be all for the better one day.
As she contemplated what she saw in the now ruined city of the Cloister, she was approached by the Urge of Ice.
The Mother Urge asked Frikka what had happened in her absence and Frikka explained everything she had done for the Valkyries.
The Mother Urge exploded in a fury never before seen by the Valkyries and its wake washed over them all.
Books
The Last Battle This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
When it is to end, Sky and Earth would wage endless war against each other.
As one side gained the advantage, the other side would steal it away from the other. This would continue until both agreed to one Final Battle.
Sky made its champions to fight against Earth, and Earth made its champions to fight against Sky.
Earth thought long and hard and created its champion.
Taking only from Earth and placing no Sky within its creation, Earth breathed its own essence into its warriors.
Sky watched Earth, and being ever jealous, stole some of Earth to put in its champions. Earth was smarter, for there was not much room for Sky's essence in its creations.
And thus, the Minotaurs and the Valkyries were created.
As the Final Battle would begin, the Minotaurs would win every battle.
Soon enough Sky realized it was about to lose, the great act of treachery was performed. Sky hid away its champions to stall the battle.
Earth seeing this, stole a piece of Sky when it wasn't looking and showed the Minotaurs how to use Sky against its champions when the battle would resume.
And thus, Magic was made.
The Kings would watch as the Minotaurs were given everything and they, Earth's first companions, were given nothing.
Having a piece of Sky within them, they felt jealousy just as she did. The Kings reached out and stole most of the Minotaur's Magic, upon which Earth banished the Kings into a circle of hidden places.
And thus, the Evil Ring was made.
Thinking this was a sign of weakness on Earth's part, Sky brought forth the Valkyries once again.
Continuing to cheat during the Final Battle, Sky summoned forth all of its strength and blew away all of the Earth's many, many companions. All that remained on Earth's body were the Minotaurs and the Valkyries.
And thus, the Last Two were made.
As the two champions fought, so would Earth and Sky. Watching as both champions were about to end in a draw, Sky launched a daring assault upon Earth. Opening all of its old wounds, Sky began to bleed upon Earth hoping to drown the Minotaurs. Earth was ready for this trick and formed a shield.
The blood of Sky and the shield of Earth would become merged as one.
And thus, Ice was formed.
Sky could no longer reach Earth and Earth could no longer reach Sky, for Ice separated the two.
Knowing that Sky could no longer touch Earth in anger, its anger raged out of control. Getting more and more angry, Sky spun itself into great circling storms until finally it could not undo the great knot it had tied itself in.
And thus, the Great Maelstrom was made.
Earth could no longer reach Sky and Sky could no longer reach Earth, for Ice separated the two. Knowing that Earth was prevented from lashing out in its anger, it began to boil and stew in its frustration. Its anger would rumble and rumble, tearing itself apart. When the anger subsided, Earth had crumbled until it was only a tiny portion of what it used to be. And thus, the Final Land was made.
Knowing the Last Battle could not be won by cheating, allowing only for the champions to decide the outcome, Sky became spiteful.
Reaching over to one of its original companions, Sky squeezed it until it burst, raining pieces of a Moon down upon the Ice.
And thus, the One Moon was made.
And now the fight continues. The Valkyries are the champions of Sky and we Minotaurs are the champions of Earth.
The Final Battle will be fought until there is only one victor.
And since we Minotaurs have more essence of Earth than the Valkyries have of Sky, it is only a matter of time before Earth prevails and the Valkyries are destroyed.
Books
The Last Battle This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
The Last Battle - Page 3 (shinies or looted in Everfrost)
The Last Battle - Page 4 (shinies in Everfrost)
The Last Battle - Page 8 (shinies in Everfrost)
The Last Battle - Page 9 (shinies in Everfrost)
The Last Battle - Page 12 (looted in Everfrost)
Discovered on 12 Nov 2005 at 17:25:46 PST.
The Last Battle
Second Edition
This is a creation myth as told by a Minotaur.
When it is to end, Sky and Earth would wage endless war against each other.
As one side gained the advantage, the other side would steal it away from the other. This would continue until both agreed to one Final Battle.
Sky made its champions to fight against Earth, and Earth made its champions to fight against Sky.
Earth thought long and hard and created its champion.
Taking only from Earth and placing no Sky within its creation, Earth breathed its own essence into its warriors.
Sky watched Earth, and being ever jealous, stole some of Earth to put in its champions. Earth was smarter, for there was not much room for Sky's essence in its creations.
And thus, the Minotaurs and the Valkyries were created.
As the Final Battle would begin, the Minotaurs would win every battle.
Soon enough Sky realized it was about to lose, the great act of treachery was performed. Sky hid away its champions to stall the battle.
Earth seeing this, stole a piece of Sky when it wasn't looking and showed the Minotaurs how to use Sky against its champions when the battle would resume.
And thus, Magic was made.
The Kings would watch as the Minotaurs were given everything and they, Earth's first companions, were given nothing.
Having a piece of Sky within them, they felt jealousy just as she did. The Kings reached out and stole most of the Minotaur's Magic, upon which Earth banished the Kings into a circle of hidden places.
And thus, the Evil Ring was made.
Thinking this was a sign of weakness on Earth's part, Sky brought forth the Valkyries once again.
Continuing to cheat during the Final Battle, Sky summoned forth all of its strength and blew away all of the Earth's many, many companions. All that remained on Earth's body were the Minotaurs and the Valkyries.
And thus, the Last Two were made.
As the two champions fought, so would Earth and Sky. Watching as both champions were about to end in a draw, Sky launched a daring assault upon Earth. Opening all of its old wounds, Sky began to bleed upon Earth hoping to drown the Minotaurs. Earth was ready for this trick and formed a shield.
The blood of Sky and the shield of Earth would become merged as one.
And thus, Ice was formed.
Sky could no longer reach Earth and Earth could no longer reach Sky, for Ice separated the two.
Knowing that Sky could no longer touch Earth in anger, its anger raged out of control. Getting more and more angry, Sky spun itself into great circling storms until finally it could not undo the great knot it had tied itself in.
And thus, the Great Maelstrom was made.
Earth could no longer reach Sky and Sky could no longer reach Earth, for Ice separated the two. Knowing that Earth was prevented from lashing out in its anger, it began to boil and stew in its frustration. Its anger would rumble and rumble, tearing itself apart. When the anger subsided, Earth had crumbled until it was only a tiny portion of what it used to be. And thus, the Final Land was made.
Knowing the Last Battle could not be won by cheating, allowing only for the champions to decide the outcome, Sky became spiteful.
Reaching over to one of its original companions, Sky squeezed it until it burst, raining pieces of a Moon down upon the Ice.
And thus, the One Moon was made.
And now the fight continues. The Valkyries are the champions of Sky and we Minotaurs are the champions of Earth.
The Final Battle will be fought until there is only one victor.
And since we Minotaurs have more essence of Earth than the Valkyries have of Sky, it is only a matter of time before Earth prevails and the Valkyries are destroyed.
Books
The Merchant's Deal This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
The Merchant's Deal - Page 3 (shinies in The Feerrott)
The Merchant's Deal - Page 5 (shinies in The Feerrott)
The Merchant's Deal - Page 7 (looted in The Feerrott)
The Merchant's Deal - Page 8 (looted in The Feerrott)
The Merchant's Deal - Page 10 (plundered from a stone pillar at 185, -9, 182 in The Feerrott)
The Merchant's Deal - Page 12 (looted in The Feerrott)
Discovered on 4 Feb 2006 at 16:47:05 PST.
The Merchant's Deal
Second Edition
This book tells the tale of a merchant and what befell him in his quest for riches.
In the days of long ago, deep beneath the surface and far away from the land, there was a great city that prospered through trade.
Many a successful merchant would live like kings, drinking the finest wines and owning the smartest thralls. For every merchant king, there would be hundreds of merchants that would die copperless and broke.
T'Nax the Merchant vowed he would not be one of these failures.
T'Nax first began to sell clay bowls to visitors from far off lands. When he made no money from this, he began to deal in fine steel.
Adamantium would be desired shortly thereafter, rendering his steel worthless.
Insisting that he would not fail, he chose the riskiest of ventures - the sale of jewels.
Investing the last of his money in precious red rubies, he would come to find that the fickle market would change.
For it was not red that the people wanted, it was blue. Having no coin left to purchase even one blue diamond, T'Nax proclaimed his vehement hatred to all of his fellow merchants.
Hearing this exclamation, a mysterious shopper approached him.
"Did I hear you say that you would do anything to make more money than all of these merchant kings combined?" the stranger asked.
"To simplify it, yes, that is what I said" replied T'Nax
The shopper smiled in a very odd way and told T'Nax that he knew of a way that he could make it happen for the merchant.
T'Nax listened intently to what the shopper had to say.
The mysterious stranger told the merchant that there was an untapped market that he knew of. The stranger would offer T'Nax not only the location of where this market was, but also the merchandise that the people would be interested in.
All he asked for was one half of the profits.
T'Nax readily agreed to this deal, and both parties shook hands in a contract.
The stranger told T'Nax to venture to the Feerrott and set up shop amongst the marshes. The surrounding ogres would soon become very interested in purchasing all manner of materials.
Once the merchant established his merchant camp, the stranger would arrive with the supplies to be sold.
Having traveled long and hard, T'Nax reached the Feerrott.
Once he built his camp, the stranger arrived just as was promised. T'Nax was shocked to see an endless amount of odd materials filling his stores.
The stranger reminded T'Nax that he was promised half of the profits and promised to return in one year's time.
For the next year, T'Nax would watch as his sales would increase more and more each day.
Finally, as the seasons would pass a full cycle, the stranger returned. Having seen how his endless supply of merchandise had gained him near a thousand platinum coins already, T'Nax asked for more time.
He promised that by the time the stranger would return, he would have increased his profit ten times over. The stranger agreed, promising to return in two years.
Two years passed, and now T'Nax had turned the one thousand into ten.
T'Nax had asked the stranger for even more time, promising to turn the ten thousand into one hundred thousand. The stranger agreed once again, promising to return in five years.
By the time the stranger returned one last time, T'Nax had the most ambitious request waiting for the stranger.
"I will give you my eternal vow that I will not leave this place until I have one million platinum coins to split between us. All I ask is that you give me all the time I need," T'Nax proclaimed, having no plans on keeping his oath. Sealing the deal with a handshake, the stranger pulled back his hood and revealed his face. Innoruuk, the god of Hatred and Spite, laughed at T'Nax and said, "I accept your eternal vow, friend, but I regret to inform you that it might be some time until I return." With that, the stranger turned and walked away, never to be seen again. And T'Nax still waits.
Books
The Merchant's Deal This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book tells the tale of a merchant and what befell him in his quest for riches.
In the days of long ago, deep beneath the surface and far away from the land, there was a great city that prospered through trade.
Many a successful merchant would live like kings, drinking the finest wines and owning the smartest thralls. For every merchant king, there would be hundreds of merchants that would die copperless and broke.
T'Nax the Merchant vowed he would not be one of these failures.
T'Nax first began to sell clay bowls to visitors from far off lands. When he made no money from this, he began to deal in fine steel.
Adamantium would be desired shortly thereafter, rendering his steel worthless.
Insisting that he would not fail, he chose the riskiest of ventures - the sale of jewels.
Investing the last of his money in precious red rubies, he would come to find that the fickle market would change.
For it was not red that the people wanted, it was blue. Having no coin left to purchase even one blue diamond, T'Nax proclaimed his vehement hatred to all of his fellow merchants.
Hearing this exclamation, a mysterious shopper approached him.
"Did I hear you say that you would do anything to make more money than all of these merchant kings combined?" the stranger asked.
"To simplify it, yes, that is what I said" replied T'Nax
The shopper smiled in a very odd way and told T'Nax that he knew of a way that he could make it happen for the merchant.
T'Nax listened intently to what the shopper had to say.
The mysterious stranger told the merchant that there was an untapped market that he knew of. The stranger would offer T'Nax not only the location of where this market was, but also the merchandise that the people would be interested in.
All he asked for was one half of the profits.
T'Nax readily agreed to this deal, and both parties shook hands in a contract.
The stranger told T'Nax to venture to the Feerrott and set up shop amongst the marshes. The surrounding ogres would soon become very interested in purchasing all manner of materials.
Once the merchant established his merchant camp, the stranger would arrive with the supplies to be sold.
Having traveled long and hard, T'Nax reached the Feerrott.
Once he built his camp, the stranger arrived just as was promised. T'Nax was shocked to see an endless amount of odd materials filling his stores.
The stranger reminded T'Nax that he was promised half of the profits and promised to return in one year's time.
For the next year, T'Nax would watch as his sales would increase more and more each day.
Finally, as the seasons would pass a full cycle, the stranger returned. Having seen how his endless supply of merchandise had gained him near a thousand platinum coins already, T'Nax asked for more time.
He promised that by the time the stranger would return, he would have increased his profit ten times over. The stranger agreed, promising to return in two years.
Two years passed, and now T'Nax had turned the one thousand into ten.
T'Nax had asked the stranger for even more time, promising to turn the ten thousand into one hundred thousand. The stranger agreed once again, promising to return in five years.
By the time the stranger returned one last time, T'Nax had the most ambitious request waiting for the stranger.
"I will give you my eternal vow that I will not leave this place until I have one million platinum coins to split between us. All I ask is that you give me all the time I need," T'Nax proclaimed, having no plans on keeping his oath. Sealing the deal with a handshake, the stranger pulled back his hood and revealed his face. Innoruuk, the god of Hatred and Spite, laughed at T'Nax and said, "I accept your eternal vow, friend, but I regret to inform you that it might be some time until I return." With that, the stranger turned and walked away, never to be seen again. And T'Nax still waits.
Books
The Murkies This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
"The Murkies," a tale about a group of children who called themselves "The Murkies" because their leader threatened to beat them up if they didn't. Entry One Put book away
Ever since they could remember, they had all been friends. Murkie, Fletcher, Cogs and Grubs had all grown up playing together in the narrow streets of Beggar's Court. One day, as Grubs was scrounging for metal among the market stalls, he overheard a couple of the Militia guardsmen grumbling about their impeding transfer once Beggar's Court had been reduced to rubble. The area, they said, was needed to build a research facility. Entry Two Put book away
Grubs gathered his friends and told them the bad news. "If they flatten this place, we won't have anywhere to live!" cried Fletcher. "We're not gonna let it happen," said Murkie, the group's leader. "I'll think of something," he added as they headed to their respective homes for supper. The prospects didn't look good and Murkie was troubled. If only they could find a way to pay off the research facility's owners, the way they paid off other nuisances. Entry Three Put book away
The next day, the boys gathered at Grubs' house, which overlooked the market. They liked playing here because they could see which merchant was having a good day, then they could later slip down and tease that merchant into giving them a treat. They sat forlornly, gazing out the narrow, curtainless window. Soon, Cogs perked up, pointing toward the fishmonger. "She's put something big in her trash pile! Let's go see!" Entry Four Put book away
The boys raced downstairs and teased the fishmonger into letting them take the bulky parchment sheet from her garbage. "Go on," she said, "I used to wrap the entrails in it, but if I'm moving soon I'm going to get me a new parchment." Murkie led the way to the boys' secret headquarters beneath the docks. He unfolded the smelly parchment because he had seen what attracted Cogs' attention. It was a map. Entry Five Put book away
"It's just a map of old Freeport," said Fletcher. Then he peered closer and asked, "Isn't that the symbol of the Seafury Buccaneers?" The four boys conked their skulls together as they quickly bent forward to see. Murkie grabbed the map and said, rubbing his head, "It is. Looks like they buried treasure in the Serpent Sewer. Do you know what that means?" Cogs piped up, "It means the Buccaneers are gnomes!" Entry Six Put book away
Arming themselves with stout ropes, candles and (in the case of Grubs) a very large sack of provisions, the boys set out to find the buried treasure. Cogs brought with him his latest gadget, a fire-breathing stick. "See? You pump the handle and the flame comes out the other end!" He demonstrated, but had unfortunately put the fire-breathing part on backwards and thus scorched off his eyebrows. The other boys thought he looked peculiar without any eyebrows, but decided not to mention it. Entry Seven Put book away
The boys were familiar with the passage through Thieves' Way, having used it many times themselves in the past to dodge irate merchants. They made it to the Serpent Sewer without incident. Fletcher held aloft a burning brand to light their passage, while Murkie held the map. They paused now and then to review their progress. Legend had it that the Serpent Sewer was filled with giant serpents and they did not want to get lost. Entry Eight Put book away
The Serpent Sewer was not the comfortable surroundings of Thieves' Way. One of the many times Grubs stopped to eat, he leaned against a hidden lever on the wall which caused several large pieces of gnollish machinery to spring to life in their path. Cogs was enchanted, but Fletcher and Murkie, who were pierced by dozens of little metal shards, were not so pleased -- at first. "Hey, look!" exclaimed Murkie, turning to push Grubs into the water, "There's a secret passage under the machine! Good work, Grubs!" Entry Nine Put book away
Sending Cogs in first (because he was the smallest), the boys followed the passage until they found themselves standing before a perfect replica of a Seafury ship. Their jaws dropped. They were even more surprised when a couple of actual Seafury buccaneers leaped out to accost them! Grubs screamed in fright and turned to run back up the passage, tripping on a wire that crossed the path. A shower of boulders fell from the ceiling of the passage, blocking out everyone's view in a cloud of dust. Entry Ten Put book away
"Will you look at that?" commanded Murkie, although it was impossible for any of the boys to look elsewhere. The boulders had cracked the buccaneers and their ship in half, spilling out piles of gold and platinum (from the ship, not the buccaneers). "We're rich! We've saved Beggar's Court!" crowed Cogs. "Are you kidding?" scoffed Murkie, "To heck with the Court -- now we're rich enough to move into the city!" And they did. Close Book
Books
The Nine Contemplations This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book presents several riddles that the druids and rangers of a place called the Surefall Glade would puzzle over.
To know truth, one must understand the cycles of life and nature. In order to find harmony within the Surefall Glade, you must find harmony within yourself. Take these mantras and know them in your heart. When the words become second thought, then you will have found your balance within the world.
Growth
"Stasis without thought, Timeless nothing is a wrong. Once this sprouts from naught, It will guide one all life long."
Decay
"To live one's full life, One must start and one must end. As joy is to strife, It is growth's only true friend."
Health
"When life is so quick, Vim and vigor should not hide. The mind pours the tonic, Body is where it resides."
Ocean
"To ride on its back, One feels the strength of our moons. Sink into its black, One will gaze at life filled dunes."
Sky
"It falls from above, And sinks deep into the lung. True home of the dove, And every song it has sung."
Storm
"In numbers they're loud, And forms tempests from breezes. Welcome it's wet shroud, For its gift replenishes."
Sun
"If one stares too long, It will be the last sight seen. From it trees grow strong, Changing yellow into green."
Underfoot
"Darkness rules supreme, In the globe below the peat. Just as in a dream, Its gateway is its conceit."
Hope
"When all things are none, When existence is bereft, There will be but one, The only thing that is left."
Books
The Nine Contemplations This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
The Nine Contemplations - Page 5 (plundered from a stool at 522, -39, 250 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
The Nine Contemplations - Page 6 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
The Nine Contemplations - Page 8 (plundered from a skeleton at 671, -25, 85 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
The Nine Contemplations - Page 10 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
The Nine Contemplations - Page 11 (shinies in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
The Nine Contemplations - Page 12 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Discovered on 10 Nov 2005 at 19:40:00 PST.
"The Nine Contemplations"
Second Edition
This book presents several riddles that the druids and rangers of a place called the Surefall Glade would puzzle over.
To know truth, one must understand the cycles of life and nature. In order to find harmony within the Surefall Glade, you must find harmony within yourself. Take these mantras and know them in your heart. When the words become second thought, then you will have found your balance within the world.
Growth
"Stasis without thought, Timeless nothing is a wrong. Once this sprouts from naught, It will guide one all life long."
Decay
"To live one's full life, One must start and one must end. As joy is to strife, It is growth's only true friend."
Health
"When life is so quick, Vim and vigor should not hide. The mind pours the tonic, Body is where it resides."
Ocean
"To ride on its back, One feels the strength of our moons. Sink into its black, One will gaze at life filled dunes."
Sky
"It falls from above, And sinks deep into the lung. True home of the dove, And every song it has sung."
Storm
"In numbers they're loud, And forms tempests from breezes. Welcome it's wet shroud, For its gift replenishes."
Sun
"If one stares too long, It will be the last sight seen. From it trees grow strong, Changing yellow into green."
Underfoot
"Darkness rules supreme, In the globe below the peat. Just as in a dream, Its gateway is its conceit."
Hope
"When all things are none, When existence is bereft, There will be but one, The only thing that is left."
Books
The Orcs of Norrath This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
This book is a guide that is intended to help the reader identify orcs by analyzing various noticeable features about them.
Having grown up in Freeport, I have known about orcs ever since I was a small child.
Though my parents would commonly threaten to feed me to the orcs when I was acting in an unruly manner, I wouldn't actually see one until I was close to fifteen years old.
Since then I have devoted much time to studying these beasts and have collected my findings within these pages.
One of the first things that a person will notice about the orc is their body shape.
They stand slightly shorter than human-height, yet possess the hulking brutish qualities of an ogre.
Having a slightly stooped posture, the orc's monster-like qualities rarely cause someone to mistake them for a traveling human or half-elf.
The arms of these horrible beasts are one of the most striking features.
Rarely will you find an orc who does not possess a frightening amount of muscles bulging throughout their arms. Their musculature extends from their fingertips all the way up to their shoulders.
The upper body strength of an orc should never be underestimated.
Easily recognized, an orc's face belies its monstrous nature.
Mottled and pockmarked, their faces are pressed together causing them to look as if they have a perpetual scowl.
The nose is not defined, rather appearing to be two small holes with flaps of skin around them.
One cannot look at the face of an orc and not notice the tusk-like fangs jutting from their mouth.
These teeth cause the orcs to speak in an incoherent manner, making it difficult to understand whether they are crying for mercy, or crying out for reinforcements.
Surprisingly, they do not use their teeth as weapons, which is fortunate indeed.
Coming in a variety of different colors, the orc's skin will range from a deep green to a burnt orange and even all the way to a deep black.
Not much is known why there is such a broad range in the skin coloration, but it can be said that their aggressive nature isn't affected by the color of their skin.
Orcs are not exclusively carnivores. They have been seen from time to time eating various plants if meat is not available.
Though their food of choice is (usually) cooked meat, some groups of orcs have been reported to cultivating food from grains to livestock.
Though they have the reputation of eating living people, I have come to the conclusion that this is just a story that must have started many years ago.
At first it may look as if the weapons used by the orcs are crude and rusted. This may be the case in the Commonlands, but not in Zek.
Utilizing the same standard swords and axes used the world over, the metal they use in its construction is what makes them so effective.
Being very similar to iron, the metal has a red tint that gets more vibrant for a short time after the weapon has been used to kill something.
The orcs has two modes of dress. Either they will be covered from head to toe in the strongest armor they can get their hands on, or they will be stripped down to nothing more than breeches.
The latter is usually worn by those holding lesser positions, such as lumberjacks.
There is no such thing as "casual" clothing amongst the orcs.
Of all the information I've collected about the orcs over the years, there is one thing that I have always found disturbing.
No matter where I have gone, from the Commonlands all the way to Zek, I have never once spied a female orc.
This causes me to believe that of all the countless orcs I've seen... I've only seen one half of their numbers.
Books
The Orcs of Norrath This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
The Orcs of Norrath - Page 3 (shinies in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
The Orcs of Norrath - Page 4 (shinies in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
The Orcs of Norrath - Page 5 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
The Orcs of Norrath - Page 6 (shinies or looted in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
The Orcs of Norrath - Page 7 (plundered from a shelf at 225, -40, 201 in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
The Orcs of Norrath - Page 8 (shinies in Zek, the Orcish Wastes)
Discovered on 10 Nov 2005 at 10:11:14 PST.
"The Orcs of Norrath
Second Edition
This book is a guide that is intended to help the reader identify orcs by analyzing various noticeable features about them.
Having grown up in Freeport, I have known about orcs ever since I was a small child.
Though my parents would commonly threaten to feed me to the orcs when I was acting in an unruly manner, I wouldn't actually see one until I was close to fifteen years old.
Since then I have devoted much time to studying these beasts and have collected my findings within these pages.
One of the first things that a person will notice about the orc is their body shape.
They stand slightly shorter than human-height, yet possess the hulking brutish qualities of an ogre.
Having a slightly stooped posture, the orc's monster-like qualities rarely cause someone to mistake them for a traveling human or half-elf.
The arms of these horrible beasts are one of the most striking features.
Rarely will you find an orc who does not possess a frightening amount of muscles bulging throughout their arms. Their musculature extends from their fingertips all the way up to their shoulders.
The upper body strength of an orc should never be underestimated.
Easily recognized, an orc's face belies its monstrous nature.
Mottled and pockmarked, their faces are pressed together causing them to look as if they have a perpetual scowl.
The nose is not defined, rather appearing to be two small holes with flaps of skin around them.
One cannot look at the face of an orc and not notice the tusk-like fangs jutting from their mouth.
These teeth cause the orcs to speak in an incoherent manner, making it difficult to understand whether they are crying for mercy, or crying out for reinforcements.
Surprisingly, they do not use their teeth as weapons, which is fortunate indeed.
Coming in a variety of different colors, the orc's skin will range from a deep green to a burnt orange and even all the way to a deep black.
Not much is known why there is such a broad range in the skin coloration, but it can be said that their aggressive nature isn't affected by the color of their skin.
Orcs are not exclusively carnivores. They have been seen from time to time eating various plants if meat is not available.
Though their food of choice is (usually) cooked meat, some groups of orcs have been reported to cultivating food from grains to livestock.
Though they have the reputation of eating living people, I have come to the conclusion that this is just a story that must have started many years ago.
At first it may look as if the weapons used by the orcs are crude and rusted. This may be the case in the Commonlands, but not in Zek.
Utilizing the same standard swords and axes used the world over, the metal they use in its construction is what makes them so effective.
Being very similar to iron, the metal has a red tint that gets more vibrant for a short time after the weapon has been used to kill something.
The orcs has two modes of dress. Either they will be covered from head to toe in the strongest armor they can get their hands on, or they will be stripped down to nothing more than breeches.
The latter is usually worn by those holding lesser positions, such as lumberjacks.
There is no such thing as "casual" clothing amongst the orcs.
Of all the information I've collected about the orcs over the years, there is one thing that I have always found disturbing.
No matter where I have gone, from the Commonlands all the way to Zek, I have never once spied a female orc.
This causes me to believe that of all the countless orcs I've seen... I've only seen one half of their numbers.
Books
The Tale of Tirazzah This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
A competent bookbinder is a valuable resource who can restore any book that's had pages removed.
The Tale of Tirazzah - Page 4 (looted in The Sinking Sands or The Pillars of Flame)
The Tale of Tirazzah - Page 7 (plundered from a book at -1319, -226, -594 in The Sinking Sands)
The Tale of Tirazzah - Page 9 (looted in The Sinking Sands or The Pillars of Flame)
The Tale of Tirazzah - Page 10 (plundered from bones at -366, -134, -1140 in The Sinking Sands)
The Tale of Tirazzah - Page 12 (looted in The Sinking Sands or The Pillars of Flame)
The Tale of Tirazzah - Page 13 (looted in The Sinking Sands or The Pillars of Flame)
The Tale of Tirazzah - Page 14 (plundered from a mug at -64, -110, -124 in The Sinking Sands)
The Tale of Tirazzah - Page 16 (plundered from a rug at -245, -104, -39 in The Sinking Sands)
Discovered on 3 May 2006 at 8:22:08 PDT.
by "Tirazzah," an unknown Dervin female
While there is no way to learn the entire truth, the fragments of this parchment indicate that there is more to the history of the Djinn Master than had previously been known.
My hand trembles as I write this, for my escape will no doubt bring consequences that I cannot even imagine.
I would not have these things forgotten by those who follow us, nor do I expect to live long should we be caught. Meleeal cannot travel with me into the city, for his kind is unknown therein.
I am called Tirazzah and my role was as First Consort of the Nameless One. Last night, Meleeal flew to the window of the room in which I had been kept and gave me the signal that I had been awaiting... and dreading.
I climbed onto the ledge and jumped onto his back.
What led us to this point, where all the comforts and pleasures of my environment were not enough?
Did I suddenly grow up and ralize that love is not what exists in your surroundings but what exists in your heart? I thought I loved the Nameless One and that he loved me, and yet the whispers of others caused my love to falter.
Does that mean it was not love at all?
I was raised by my family, knowing my destiny. The Nameless One requires many things, including consorts, from those under his protection.
From birth, I had been marked as a future consort. On the day of our joining, I went without fear as he had always been kind to his harem.
The splendors of my surroundings overcame any trace of fear in my heart.
The Nameless One was indeed kind. He often spent time with me in the gardens of the Citadel, explaining things I had never seen before.
He presented me with a sphinx of my own, Meleeal, that I might occasionally travel to see my parents.
I visited them frequently until their deaths. The Nameless One took their remains and formed great pillars in the desert with them, so that I would always be able to see them.
As time wore on, it seemed some of the other consorts were less pleased by the Nameless One's favor towards me. I would find little notes pinned to my pillows with daggers.
Once, someone had clipped Meleeal's wings so that he could not fly normally. Had not the Nameless One saved us when we were tumbling from the tower, we would have perished.
The whispers were the hardest for me to ignore. As anyone who has had one cricket in a room can attest, the softest sounds are often the hardest to ignore.
"He uses her," they would whisper. "He killed her parents so that she would have nowhere to run." "She thinks he is a god, but soon she will feel his wrath."
I knew the whispers were made by the jealous consorts displaced by my arrival. In my confusion, I turned to Samirah, who had been First Consort until my arrival.
She sympathized with me, telling me that such things always happened to the First Consort. I confided my fears to her and she comforted me.
For a while, at least.
The poisoning of the monkeys alarmed me the most. The Nameless One enjoyed their antics as much as I did, and he gave me several to amuse me.
One night after we had supped, I called for them and they did not appear. The Nameless One and I strolled to the balcony to see if they had wandered into the gardens, and there we found their bodies, contorted in agony.
He asked if I knew who could have done such a thing, and in my grief I poured out to him the whispers I had heard in the dark.
His anger was terrible to behold! He summoned forth all the other consorts, including Samirah, and demanded answers. They did not respond at first, but he pressed them, saying he would kill them one by one until he learned the truth.
Samirah, who I thought was my friend, then admitted to leading the other consorts in all that had happened.
The Nameless One's wrath knew no bounds! He struck her to the ground and she stood up, her lip bleeding, to curse him. But his curse was swifter and stronger, and to my horror the others changed form before my eyes.
I fled the room.
I hid from him, though he begged to see me. "I did this to save you, beloved!" he cried. "Do not judge me through their eyes, the eyes of traitors!"
I refused to see him, my heart pounding so hard I could scarcely breathe. Would that be my fate if I displeased him? Would he hurt me as he had the others?
And so, I fled. I do not know where I will go or how I can hide from the Nameless One.
He said he loves me, but his love and his hate are both curses. Samirah and the others disappeared into the night as do I.
I am afraid of what may come of this.
Editor's note: It is difficult to check the veracity of this account, as the Dervin female "Tirazzah" has never been identified with any certainty. Obviously, if this tale is true, it is likely that she went into hiding or perhaps exile.
Books
The Three Keys - The First Key This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Three Keys - the First". It is the story of a small girl by the name of Aiven and what when she is given three separate keys.
As Aiven woke up that morning, she felt the day would bring her all manner of exciting surprises. But this was a common feeling, her being a girl of only ten years. She had already learned that discoveries could be found anywhere if you just went looking. What she didn't know was that that today, those discoveries would come looking for her.
After she helped her mother around the farm for most of the morning, Aiven asked if she could go play. She listened patiently to all the warnings her mother recited to her, for she had heard them all before. With a final "I will, Mom", she sprinted off to explore, with not a second thought to what her mother said. After all, how dangerous could a troll actually be?
As Aiven engrossed herself in a rousing game of "What's Under This Rock?", she lost all track of time. Even though her mother had told her to be home well before sunset on penalty of the switch, she paid little attention to the lengthening shadows. Not until one stole over her rather quickly did she finally look up, only to see what - or who - was casting the shadow.
Standing in front of her was an old woman wearing odd robes. She asked Aiven, "What is it, little girl, that you are looking for?" Aiven instantly remembered all the warnings her mother gave her, especially the ones about little girls being sold to the dark elves. "Interesting things," she replied, at which time the old woman smiled.
"If you are seeking things of interest, then these will help you open the way to finding them," the old woman said, and handed Aiven a small pouch. Inside were three keys, one copper, one silver, and one gold. "But what doors do they unlock?" she asked. "Many exciting discoveries," the old woman said warmly. Aiven looked up to ask what the old woman meant, but she saw that she had vanished without a trace.
Aiven decided it was now a good time to go home. As she turned around, she was surprised to see a door standing right behind her. Not pausing to question how that was even possible, she quickly tried the keys, knowing this was no mere coincidence. The first one she tried opened the door right away. Looking inside, she saw the most interesting sights she had ever witnessed.
Entranced by what she saw, Aiven stepped inside the door. Floating all around her were oddly shaped rocks, straw-stuffed poppets, and bowls of flavored iced creams. Inside this enormous room was everything she could ever want! Just as she was about to start eating some of the iced creams, she noticed an adjoining room connected to this one. She thought, "If this room contains so many wonders, what does the next room hold?"
In the next room, she saw someone who looked like her older sister. If she had one, that is. The young maiden was locked in an embrace with a young man wearing a suit of shining armor. As they were about to kiss each other, Aiven exclaimed, "Ewww! Boys are icky!" At that moment, Aiven noticed that behind the couple was even another room. She sidestepped the two, let out another "ewww", and walked into the next room
In this room, she saw a smiling woman who looked a lot like her mother. Standing around the woman were several girls of different ages. The more she looked, the more she thought the girls looked a little like her. And though she couldn't exactly explain why, Aiven thought the room felt like "Happy". Aiven, feeling she was interrupting something, turned around to leave - at which point she smacked her face into a tree trunk.
As Aiven rubbed her bruised nose, she gave the tree a good pound with her fist. The tree then said, "No need to be rude." Aiven looked up and saw that is was not a tree after all, but rather a gigantic one-eyed man. He peered down at her with his one eye and said, "You unlocked the door to your heart. People usually never leave the first room they enter. Do you want to unlock the next door?"
Books
The Three Keys - The Second Key This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Three Keys - the Second". It is the story of a small girl by the name of Aiven and what happens to her when she seeks to unlock the second door.
Aiven would have never expected such amazing things to be hidden behind such an odd door. She looked at the remaining two keys and wondered what interesting things these ones kept locked away. Finally she answered the giant one-eyed man and said, "Yes, I think I am still curious. Show me to the next door," and remembering her manners finished with, "if you would be so kind."
The cyclops reached down and hoisted Aiven onto his shoulders and said, "Hold onto my topknot... it might get bumpy." He then proceeded to step out of the first door and back into the plains. Aiven asked the giant, "Where are we going?" to which he responded, "You have the key to unlock your mind. We are going to find the door".
The cyclops then began to walk with slow, steady steps. As they began to travel in the direction of the sun, his pace began to pick up. Sooner than Aiven would have thought possible, they had reached a great shoreline with endless ocean ahead of them. Instead of stopping, however, the cyclops continued walking into the ocean.
Aiven was worried that they would sink, but noticed that the cyclops never broke the surface of the water. She asked him, "How do you do that?" The cyclops replied back, "When you put you mind to something, nothing is impossible." And for some reason, that made perfect sense to Aiven.
They continued to travel across the ocean until they eventually made landfall in a misty green forest. Aiven said, "What an odd forest". The cyclops replied, "It is not a forest. When you give something a second thought, you may wind up seeing things differently." So Aiven looked and thought again, and saw the forest for what it really was this time. And they both continued traveling.
As they traveled on, they came upon a land covered in snow and ice. They climbed a great mountain and saw winged lizards engaged in heated arguments. After they passed, Aiven asked why they were arguing. "New ideas are just as important as old ones. They think otherwise", said the cyclops. And they traveled on.
Eventually, the pair found themselves walking around a wild land, full of lush jungles and arid savannas. All around them were the ruins of a once mighty civilization. Before Aiven had a chance to ask, the cyclops said, "Even though you think you 'can' do it, you should always ask yourself if you 'should' do it. No one here has ever learned that." And they traveled on.
Soon enough, the cyclops announced that they had arrived at their destination and lowered Aiven to the ground. She looked around and recognized where they were. "But, we're back at where we started!", she said. When there was no reply, she looked around and saw that he was gone. All she was left with were his words during their journey.
Aiven remembered what the cyclops said about giving things a second thought. She gave the door a second look and saw there was another keyhole she didn't see before. She thought about whether she 'should' open the door just because she 'could', but being ten years old, wasn't able to understand the cyclops meant by that. Aiven then unlocked the door... and found no room on the other side. This time, she knew to turn around.
As she turned around, she wasn't surprised to see a new companion. In front of her was a very old centaur. She had seen one before, so she knew not to be rude and stare. The centaur looked at her and said, "You have unlocked your mind, child. You have used two keys. Forget about the third. I can lead you safely home now, if you so desire."
Books
The Three Keys - The Third Key This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
This book is titled "The Three Keys - the Third". It is the story of a small girl by the name of Aiven and what happens to her when she unlocks the third and final door.
"But what about the third key?" she said, "What could this one possibly open?" The old centaur looked at her with a stony gaze and said, "This one unlocks your fate". Those words were enough to spark Aiven's curiosity once again. She had to know what the final key opened.
Aiven told the centaur that she wanted to see what the last key unlocked. The centaur said in a warningly, "That doorway is not for little girls. Some things are better left unknown". She insisted, however, until the centaur finally relented and told her to climb up onto his back. He told her to close her eyes as they traveled.
She felt the centaur begin to gallop, and waited impatiently. At least had the decency to let her see where they were going. After a short while, she risked a peek. All around her was a vibrant storm of colors, violently swirling in a chaotic maelstrom. She quickly shut her eyes again and refused to open them for the rest of the journey. What seemed like an eternity later, the centaur said, "We are here."
Where there were once swarming colors, all that remained was the pair, a door, and an endless field of white. Aiven asked where they were, but the centaur just looked at her dispassionately. Aiven realized he was waiting for her to unlock the door, so she obliged. As she was about to open the door, then centaur said, "It is not too late, child. I can take you home. I fear for what you will find inside, child."
Aiven told the centaur, "I can't stop now." I'm going to find out what my fate is. And with that, the centaur vanished. She knew it was now or never, and opened the door. Inside she saw an immense room, oozing with darkness. Aiven summoned all of her courage, and stepped through the door.
It didn't take long for her eyes to adjust to the darkness. It took a few moments more for her to realize she could see in perfect darkness. As a matter of fact, there were a number of odd things happening. For one, she felt like she was taller and her muscles ached. Another thing was that she was dressed in an odd robe and had a number of different interesting objects hanging from her sash. The most interesting thing was when she looked into a nearby hanging mirror, she saw that she had the face of an old woman.
Before she realized what was happening, she began walking to a massive door made from the blackest metal she had ever seen. She moved her hand in an odd manner and the door exploded into a thousand pieces. She then called out in an old, yet steady voice, "I am here, fiend! This world is not yours, it is ours! I may not be able to stop you, but I WILL slow you down." With that, a figure materialized in front of her... formed of a darkness unlike anything she had seen before.
The figure of pure darkness spoke, "You have refused our offers. You have destroyed our towers. You have entered our lands." It continued, "By my hands, it is your time to suffer... for all eternity", at which point Aiven presented forth a glimmering sphere. "No... you cannot know of that", the form screamed, "Two hundred thousand years and no one knows of that!!!" Aiven replied, "I remembered it from when I was a child."
At that moment the sphere in her hands started glowing white. "Finding this wasn't hard, fiend," said Aiven as the sphere's glow intensified, "What was difficult is letting go of the keys I held onto for all those years." The sphere was now as bright as the sun. "As a matter of fact, even what I'm about to do isn't as hard as letting go of those keys. For you see, I know for a fact that this is where it ends." With that, she took a deep breath, exhaled, and the sphere exploded with the intensity of a thousand suns instantly dying.
Aiven was shaken awake by her mother. "I was worried sick, Aiven!", she yelled, "I thought you were taken by the nomads!". Looking around, she realized she had dozed off beneath a tree on their farm. She told her mother she had the oddest dream, to which her mother said, "Don't believe any of that nonsense. No one ever got far by believing in silly dreams. Now you had better clean up before we eat dinner, do you hear me?". Aiven nodded her head and went back to the house to wash up. But first, she stopped by her room, took something from her pocket, and placed them under her pillow - three keys of copper, silver, and gold.
Books
The Tragedy of Ysa This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
The good lass Ysa Dondrael, daughter of John and Pila, disappeared seventeen years ago on a humid, moonless night. John and Pila were good people, and to lose a daughter as such broke the town's heart. Though none believed it, they were reassured constantly of her safe return. One month had gone by when Ysa returned. Her clothes were drenched, her hair a muss, and yet her lips wore a dagger of a smile. Despite that smile, her return was celebrated. Our time was spent rejoicing, not questioning. That night we thanked whatever forces we thought had saved the lovely young girl and were content to leave it at that.
As the days passed, however, curiosity got the best of us. We were too timid to approach the girl herself. Her parents became the target of our queries: "Where was she?" "What happened to her?" And most of all, "Why the smile"? That piercing smile. It cut across her face as a rend in a sheet hung to dry. Her dark, straight hair hung low, leaving little skin visible save that around her mouth; it completely covered her eyes. And always, always she wore that smile. In a room it followed you as might painted eyes.
Neither John nor Pila had any answers to give. They could not get her to speak, and dared not push her too far. It lingered in the town, unconscious, but we respected the family and kept our distance; would that we hadn't. It was a loud morning--two months at the least after Ysa's return--when Falkner roused his neighbors with his cries. He was a bloody mess, we thought he was sure to die before we learned none of the blood was his own. Though he was too affected to speak, he led us 'round the back of his house so we could see for ourselves.
His goats lay slaughtered. The meat often as not stripped from their bones. Their limbs separated from their bodies, scattered about FaIkner's yard. And there was a bloody mess of a trail leading toward the Deep Down gulch. It was then that I noticed the Dondraels were not present. I can't say I am the only one that noticed, It seemed a silly thing to notice at such a time, but I noticed regardless. I was overcome with unease and retired to my home. It was there, while sipping tea, that I saw John Dondrael steal from his house.
He crept forward, glancing over his shoulder. The twined package under his arm pulled at my curiosity. When he disappeared into the graveyard I took a moment to calm my thoughts. This was nothing, surely. Before my mind could make any accusations I left the house, intent on stimulating myself otherwise. I busied myself calming the fiasco at Falkner's.
That night I could not sleep. My ears amplified the sounds of the night as if they were not present before. The soft step of a night animal became the crunch of feet on ground toward the graveyard. The wind became whispered voices, conspirators. And the creaking and groaning of old houses became the growling of beasts, ready to devour. My mind would not let go of John in the graveyard. Before I knew what I was doing I found myself walking across the town and through the graveyard gates, shovel in hand. The moon was bright overhead, in a night or two it would be full. It gave me light enough to find the recently disturbed earth that I sought. I began to dig.
I found John's package and hefted it from the ground. I placed it upon a headstone and undid the twine knots. Before I got it open I twisted my face in reaction to the scent of goat urine. Once open, however, I was faced with what appeared to be a dark, folded piece of cloth. Blood. My hand was coated in blood now, I shouldn't have reached inside. I pulled back at the feel of it, knocking the package off of the headstone. The cloth freed itself from the package, enough of itself for me to recognize the frills of the white--now red--gown Ysa oft wore. Despite my fear, I was ready to pick up the item when I heard the soft steps of someone in the distance.
I turned to the town. There stood Ysa. Her naked body shone in the moonlight. Though I did not move, and did not breathe, she faced me. I could not see her eyes, the open grin stared me in the face. My heart raced, the wind picked up, Ysa turned and disappeared between two buildings. I do not know how long I stood there. I was afraid to move or make any noise. I wanted to place John's package back within the confines of the earth, but there was no way I could hide the blood that spilled across the headstone and soaked into the ground. I was tired, and afraid, I left the scene and ran home. I slept, though I know not how I managed it.
I awoke to commotion. My hands were clean of blood, I did not recall cleaning them, but I was glad of it. I exited my house and joined the throng that had gathered outside Ysa's house. I didn't need to ask questions, others were doing enough of that. I only listened. "I didn't see her but Alba did, and Tyra says she did too." "Oh, that poor boy." "Like a ravenous wolf, they say." Pila Dondrael stood guard between her door and the angry crowd, but the look on her face gave away her lack of conviction. When they pushed her aside she did not struggle. Four pitchfork-wielding citizens entered first. Those that followed quickly stopped and backed from the house.
Silence spread through the crowd, and one by one people found their way to the door to look in. There John Dondrael sat, his head heavy on his clenched hands, his body shaking as if in a sobbing heave, yet his face was vacant On the floor Ysa lay. Her neck brightly blemished with John's guilt, her face discolored, her smile straightened. We left. No words were given, no explanation asked. Justice, it seemed to us, was done, yet at what cost to John?
Time passed. My mind cannot recall how much, exactly. John wore a cold, expressionless face then just as Ysa had worn her terrible smile. Pila too seemed unable to function. Her father, a tradesman from far away, came to retrieve her one day. John did not see her off. And then, one day, John, too, was gone. The children say he scared them from Wayunder Lake that day, he and his heavy sack going in never to emerge. The adults would rather not speak of it.
Books
Through the Rathe Mountains This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
This completed book can be placed in your house and read.
In this book, we follow the adventures of Gerren from his outpost on Lake Rathetear through the Rathe Mountains which have been taken by the Rallosian Army. Entry One Put book away.
Gerren dressed simply. His task would require stealth and speed, for the aviaks reported bands of ogres patrolling the familiar paths through the Rathe Mountains. If Gerren were to break through their lines, he would need to blaze his own trail. And Gerren definitely needed to make his way through -- he and fellow Guardsman Ilkalla had been at the Qeynos' outpost on Lake Rathetear for several months while the Rallosian Army crept closer. Now, the Rallosians were building an enormous barge to carry them across the water. Entry Two Put book away.
Ilkalla pressed a dried gnoll's foot into Gerren's hand. "For luck," she said. "I don't know why, but we've always had that in our family; I want you to carry it with you on this journey." Neither of them said it, but they both knew it was true: the likelihood of his making it through was the equivalent of the aviaks and centaurs holding the Rallosians off. They did not expect to see each other again. After a quick meal, Gerren took a little-traveled way up the face of the slope along the edge of the Lake. Entry Three Put book away.
"I can see now why this is travelled so infrequently," Gerren muttered, pausing for a moment to catch his breath. The rocky mountain face was so steep that in some points, Gerren would need to retrace his steps to consider the options from several angles. Once, a slice of rock upon which he was perched gave way and he slid down quite a distance before being able to stop himself. Entry Four Put book away.
Three-quarters of the way up was a cleft in the rocks through which this path passed. The splintered boulders forming the opening folded over on the side facing the Lake, making it impossible to peer around. Gerren knew that if the Rallosians were already on the pathway beyond the rocks, he was doomed. There was no quick escape route. He unsheathed his knife and the gnoll's foot Ilkalla had given him tumbled out, bouncing off the rocks down the face of the mountain. Entry Five Put book away.
"There goes the lucky gnoll's foot," Gerren thought, with a smile. Somehow, the idea that the foot of dead creature could be lucky was amusing. He slipped through the cleft and found the way clear. Tension released in his neck, although he was still wary as he felt his way to another cluster of granite boulders marking another turn in the path. Entry Six Put book away.
Hill giants! Gerren leaned back into the boulders, blending himself into the rocks. The Rallosian Army was not the only thing in the Rathe Mountains, but hill giants were not usually found near this forlorn area. Perhaps they, too, had been displaced by the invading ogres. Gerren watched them as they milled around for several minutes before striding off down the narrow, featureless road. Entry Seven Put book away.
Gerren waited until the sun was directly overhead before moving. There was a stretch of the passage with no easy alternative route -- not that the ways he had been travelling had been easy at all. Still, with the sun above he would cast no shadows and might be able to slip undetected across the roadway. Even covered by his superior camouflage, Gerren knew that there were things he could do to make himself even less visible to his enemies. Entry Eight Put book away.
The roadway was clear and Gerren slipped into the shadows of another clutch of boulders. He paused there to listen for the sounds of pursuit, but there was only silence. That in itself was worrisome, as there were usually birds trilling or insects buzzing. Gerren would even welcome the wuffing sounds of the great bears. "Everything must be hiding from the Rallosians," he thought, "Perhaps I should get lower to the ground myself." Entry Nine Put book away.
Calming himself, Gerren spent a moment recalling the spells of transformation. He remembered amusing Ilkalla on their watches by changing himself into a wolf and padding around, sniffing things. He said a quick prayer for her and the small force by Lake Rathetear, then cast his spell. Energy rippled within him and he shook himself to spread it through to the very tips of his dark fur. Entry Ten Put book away.
Gerren set off through the rocks, keeping always to the shaded side of the paths. The club that hit him in the back of his head was so quick and brutal that he did not feel a thing as he slumped lifeless to the ground. "Found something for dinner!" yelled the troll that had killed him. The gleeful yelps greeting this cry echoed through the otherwise watchful Rathe Mountains. Close Book.
Books
Welcome to Haven This item can be placed on the floor in any house type.
I can place this book in my home. Whenever I get a home, that is.
This is a short introduction to Haven and a couple of etiquette rules that keep neutrality pleasant for everyone.
Haven is a refuge for those of us who, by choice or by chance, are not aligned with any of the major cities. As some of us are from one city or the other, tensions can sometimes run high. However, Haven is intended as a respite from the problems outside our walls. We ask that you leave your animosities behind you once you enter Haven.
Many ask us why Haven is in a cave. The answer is simple. When you do not wish to be located with any ease, the best place to go is underground. These caverns are conveniently networked to various locations, which makes Haven ideally situated to those of us in exile.
How did we locate such a great place?
This question is much more difficult to answer, as Haven has been continuously inhabited for several generations.
Several tunnels within the cavern are collapsed, possibly as a result of the Rending. Fortunately, access to water, sir, and food were not affected.
How can you return to Haven once you leave? Due to its special qualities, return to Haven is only available to those who really, really need it. Once you align yourself firmly with a major city, you'll no longer be able to enter Haven. While you're one of us, you'll always know how to return. In other words...it's a SECRET that we aren't about to write down!
By now you have noticed that several folks have made Haven their more or less permanent home. While most of you may view Haven as a stopping point in your journey, others find that life beyond the human cities is quite refreshing. If you like this lifestyle, feel free to stick around! We have many amenities, though permanent housing is not one of them.
Does that mean you can live in exile forever but never have a home?
Not necessarily. If you can withstand the journey to the Desert of Ro, Maj'Dul is open to all comers.
You will need to be able to get there, however, on your own.
One thing we ask is that you do not carry conflicts with your neighbors into Haven.
We strive for a neutral environment as we are all, whether we admit it or not, on the same side while outside the cities.
Grievances should be settled before returning to the seclusion of our Haven, to preserve our unique habitat.
Remember that you are not alone on your journey, though at some points along the way you might feel that way. Others have had to make the same choices you will need to make very shortly. Make friends with those who surround you in Haven, whether you agree with their views or not. This is your home and they are your family, at least for a little while. Safe travels!
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Frogloks
Shard of Love
Plague
Griffon Towers
Return of the Gods
Spires
Kunark Rising
A Prophet Returns
Shard of Hate
Gathering Tempest (Void Storms Chapter 1)
Storm Break (Void Storms Chapter 2)
Breaking Ground (Void Storms Chapter 3)
Raising the Banner (Void Storms Chapter 4)
Void Storms
Quellithulian Spires
Attack on the Crowns
Halas Reborn
Druid Rings
Destiny of Velious Prelude
Velious Transportation Event
Beastlord Prelude
A Goddess Risen
Malicious Threat
Panda, Panda, Panda! (Days of Summer)
Against the Elements
Mythic Passage
Dragon Attack!
Haven Bound
Beyond the Shattered Sea
Secrets of the Sands
Fractured Skies
Year of Darkpaw
Healers' Touch
Frostfell: 
Erollisi Day: 
Brewday: 
Chronoportals: 
Beast'r Eggstravaganza: 
Bristlebane Day: 
Oceansfull Festival: 
Scorched Sky Celebration: 
Summer Fireworks Festival: 
Tinkerfest: 
Nights of the Dead: 
Heroes' Festival: 
Gorowyn City Festival: 
Kelethin City Festival: 
Neriak City Festival: 
Qeynos City Festival: 
Freeport City Festival: 
New Halas City Festival: 
Moonlight Enchantments: 
"Brien - Clan Icereaver"
A Passenger's Journal
Collected Stories of Serpent Sewer
Deep Marshes
Perinius' Log
Welcome to Haven
